CopyrightThis document is Copyright © 2022 by the LibreOffice Documentation Team. Contributors arelisted below. This document maybe distributed and/or modify it under the terms of either the GNU
General Public License (https://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html), version 3 or later, or the Creative
Commons Attribution License (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/), version 4.0 or later.
All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.

Contributors
To this editionPeter Schofield

To previous editions
Jean Hollis Weber
Martin Fox
Vipul Gupta
Regina HenschelWinston Min Tjong
T. Elliot TurnerPeter Schofield
John Cleland
Kees Kriek
Dave Barton
Martin Saffron
Ron Faile Jr.

Elzett Kotze
John A Smith
Claire Wood
Hazel Russman
Low Song Chuan

Feedback
Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to the Documentation Team’s
mailing list: documentation@global.libreoffice.org

Note
Everything sent to a mailing list, including email addresses and any other personal
information that is written in the message, is publicly archived and cannot be deleted.

Publication date and software version
Published January 2022. Based on LibreOffice 7.2 Community.
Other versions of LibreOffice may differ in appearance and functionality.

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/Contents
Copyright................................................................................................................................... 2

Preface................................................................................................................................6
Who is this user guide for?........................................................................................................7
What is in this user guide?........................................................................................................7
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice.............................................................................7
How to get LibreOffice...............................................................................................................7
Installing LibreOffice..................................................................................................................7
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice.....................................................................................7
Extensions and add-ons............................................................................................................ 8
Where to get more help.............................................................................................................8
What you see may be different................................................................................................10
Using LibreOffice on macOS...................................................................................................11
Who wrote this user guide?.....................................................................................................12
Frequently asked questions....................................................................................................12
What is new in LibreOffice 7.2?...............................................................................................13

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw..........................................................................................14
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 15
Draw main window.................................................................................................................. 16
Choosing and defining colors..................................................................................................22
Grid, snap guides, and helplines.............................................................................................23

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes.................................................................................24
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 25
Drawing basic shapes............................................................................................................. 25
Glue points and connectors.....................................................................................................36
Drawing geometric shapes......................................................................................................37
Adding, inserting and formatting text.......................................................................................39

Chapter 3, Working with Objects...................................................................................40
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 41
Selecting objects..................................................................................................................... 41
Positioning and adjusting objects............................................................................................42
Using grid and snap functions.................................................................................................51
Using Helplines....................................................................................................................... 56
Changing object shape........................................................................................................... 57

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes.........................................................................69
Formatting lines...................................................................................................................... 70
Formatting area fills................................................................................................................. 78
Working with area fills............................................................................................................. 81
Working with shadows............................................................................................................ 96
Working with transparencies...................................................................................................98
Drawing styles......................................................................................................................... 99
Special effects....................................................................................................................... 104

Draw Guide 7.2 | 3

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects......................................................................111
Grouping objects................................................................................................................... 112
Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting.....................................................................114
Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects.........................................................................116
Duplication and cross-fading.................................................................................................118
Positioning objects................................................................................................................121

Chapter 6, Editing Images............................................................................................124
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 125
Importing images...................................................................................................................125
Exporting graphics................................................................................................................129
Formatting images (raster objects)........................................................................................130
Cropping images................................................................................................................... 133
Image filters.......................................................................................................................... 137
Replacing colors....................................................................................................................142
Conversion............................................................................................................................ 145

Chapter 7, Working with 3D Objects...........................................................................148
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 149
3D object types..................................................................................................................... 150
Creating 3D objects...............................................................................................................151
Editing 3D objects................................................................................................................. 154
Combining objects.................................................................................................................165
Assembling 3D objects..........................................................................................................166

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts...............................168
Connectors and glue points...................................................................................................169
Flowcharts............................................................................................................................. 178
Organization charts...............................................................................................................179

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text......................................................................181
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 182
Text mode............................................................................................................................. 182
Text boxes............................................................................................................................. 183
Text in Draw objects.............................................................................................................. 187
Pasting text........................................................................................................................... 190
Formatting text...................................................................................................................... 191
Bullet or numbered lists.........................................................................................................203
Text columns......................................................................................................................... 207
Using tables.......................................................................................................................... 209
Using fields........................................................................................................................... 218
Using hyperlinks....................................................................................................................219
Image maps.......................................................................................................................... 221
Fontwork............................................................................................................................... 223

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing............................................................226
Printing.................................................................................................................................. 227
Exporting............................................................................................................................... 233
4 | Draw Guide 7.2

Emailing documents.............................................................................................................. 235
Digital signatures................................................................................................................... 236
Removing personal data.......................................................................................................236
Redaction.............................................................................................................................. 238

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques....................................................................240
Drawing pages...................................................................................................................... 241
Master pages........................................................................................................................ 244
Templates.............................................................................................................................. 249
Multiple layers....................................................................................................................... 258
Dimensioning........................................................................................................................ 262
Drawing to scale.................................................................................................................... 266
Multiple views of a drawing...................................................................................................267
Gallery................................................................................................................................... 268
Colors................................................................................................................................... 270
Bézier curves........................................................................................................................ 279
Adding comments to a drawing.............................................................................................282
Coordinate system................................................................................................................ 283

Chapter 12 User Interface Variants..............................................................................285
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 286
Selecting user interface.........................................................................................................286
Standard Toolbar UI.............................................................................................................. 287
Tabbed UI.............................................................................................................................. 287
Single Toolbar UI & Sidebar UI..............................................................................................297
Tabbed Compact UI.............................................................................................................. 297
Groupedbar Compact UI.......................................................................................................297
Contextual Single UI............................................................................................................. 298

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts................................................................................299
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 300
Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts............................................................................300
Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts...........................................................................304
General function key and keyboard shortcuts.......................................................................308
Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts........................................................................309

Appendix B, Toolbars....................................................................................................314
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 315
Using toolbars....................................................................................................................... 315
Toolbars................................................................................................................................ 319

Draw Guide 7.2 | 5

Draw Guide 7.2

Preface
Drawing Vector Graphics in LibreOfficeWho is this user guide for?
Anyone who wants to quickly acquire knowledge on LibreOffice Draw and is new to drawing
software, or may be familiar with another office suite, will find this user guide very useful.
LibreOffice is an open-source office productivity software suite containing capabilities for word
processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases, and formula editing. LibreOffice
Draw is the vector graphics drawing application for LibreOffice.

What is in this user guide?
This user guide introduces the main features of LibreOffice Draw. Although Draw is a vector
graphics drawing tool, it can also perform some operations on raster graphics (pixels) such as
photographs. Using Draw, a wide variety of graphical images can be quickly created.
A few examples of the drawing functions are: layer management, snap functions and grid-point
system, dimensions and measurement display, connectors for making organization charts, 3D
functions that enable small 3D drawings to be created (with texture and lighting effects), drawing
and page-style integration, and Bézier curves.
The Draw Guide is not a course book to be worked through from beginning to end. Rather, it is areference work which can be browsed for guidance on particular topics.

Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice
For a detailed list of requirements and operating systems supported, see the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/system-requirements/.

How to get LibreOffice
Versions of LibreOffice for Windows, Linux, and macOS are freely available and can be
downloaded from https://www.libreoffice.org/download. Linux users will also find LibreOfficeincluded free in many of the latest distributions.
Portable and other versions of LibreOffice are listed on the download page. Linux, Vanilla, andother versions may differ in a few features from the descriptions in this user guide.

Installing LibreOfficeInformation on installing and setting up LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems isgiven here: https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/install-howto/.

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice
To change the default settings (options) in LibreOffice to match the required preferences, go toTools > Options on the Menu bar (LibreOffice > Preferences in macOS).

Tip
Some settings are intended for power users and programmers. If it is difficult tounderstand what an option does, LibreOffice recommends leaving the option on its
default setting unless instructions in this user guide recommend changing thesetting.

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice | 7

Settings are described in LibreOffice Help and the Getting Started Guide. These two sources
provide information on how to customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice
Draw, add new menus and toolbars, and assign macros to events.

Extensions and add-ons
Functionality can be added to LibreOffice with extensions and add-ons. Several extensions are
installed with the program and other extensions from the official extensions repository,
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ or from other sources. See the Getting Started Guide for more
information on installing extensions and add-ons.

Where to get more help
This user guide and other LibreOffice user guides, the built-in Help system, and user support
systems assume that users are familiar with computers and basic functions such as starting a
program, opening and saving files.

Help system
LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system and this can be used as the first line of support.
Windows and Linux users can choose to download and install the offline Help for use when notconnected to the Internet. Offline Help is installed with the MacOS version of LibreOffice.
To display the LibreOffice Help, press F1 or go to Help > LibreOffice Help on the Menu bar. If
the offline help is not installed on a computer, but is connected to the Internet, a dialog opens
giving the option to Read Help Online. Select this option and the default web browser opens at
the LibreOffice online help pages in the LibreOffice website.
The Help menu also includes links to other LibreOffice information and support facilities.
•

What's This? – for quick tips when a toolbar is visible, place the mouse cursor over anyof the tool icons to see a small tooltip box with a brief explanation of the tool function.
Also Extended Tips can be activated by going to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >General on the Menu bar. Extended Tips provide a brief description about tools andcommands. To display an extended tip, use the keyboard Shift+F1, then point to a tool orcommand.

•User Guides – opens the default browser at the Documentation page of the LibreOfficewebsite https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/english-documentation/. This page gives
access to the LibreOffice User Guides and other useful information that can be opened in
the default browser. Also, the User Guides are available in PDF format as a freedownload or to buy as printed copies.

•

Show Tip of the Day – opens a small window with a random tip on how to use
LibreOffice.

•Get Help Online – opens the default browser at the Ask LibreOffice forum of questions
and answers from the LibreOffice community, https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/.

•

Send Feedback – opens the default browser at the Feedback page of the LibreOfficewebsite https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/feedback/. From this page, bugs can bereported, new features suggested and communicated with other users in the LibreOfficecommunity.

•

Restart in Safe Mode – opens a dialog window giving options to restart LibreOffice andreset the software to its default settings. Restarting in safe mode also provides anopportunity to restore LibreOffice from a backup.

8 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

Get Involved – opens the default browser at the Get Involved page of the LibreOfficewebsite, https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. Choose a topic of interest to
help improve the program.

•

Donate to LibreOffice – opens the default browser at the Donation page of the
LibreOffice website, https://donate.libreoffice.org/ providing an opportunity to make adonation to support LibreOffice.

•License Information – outlines the licenses under which LibreOffice is made available.

•

Check for Updates – opens a dialog and checks the LibreOffice website for updates toversion of the software. The dialog provides an opportunity to download and install any
updates to LibreOffice.

•

About LibreOffice – opens a dialog and displays information about the version of
LibreOffice and the operating system being used. This information is often requested if
the community is asked for help or assistance with the software (on macOS, this option isfound under LibreOffice on the Menu bar).

Other free online support
The LibreOffice community not only develops software, but provides free, volunteer-based
support. See Table 1 and this web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/ For comprehensive
online support from the community, look at mailing lists and the Ask LibreOffice website,
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/. Other user websites also offer free tips and tutorials.
Table 1: Free support for LibreOffice users
Free LibreOffice support
FAQs

Answers to frequently asked questions
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Faq

Mailing lists

Free community support is provided by a network of experienced users
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/mailing-lists/

Questions & Answers
andKnowledge BaseFree community assistance is provided in a Question & Answer
formatted web service. Search similar topics or open a new one in
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions
The service is available in several other languages; just replace /en/with de, es, fr, ja, ko, nl, pt, tr, and many others in the web address
above.

Native language
supportThe LibreOffice website in various languages
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/nlc/
Mailing lists for native languages
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Local_Mailing_Lists
Information about social networking
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Website/Web_Sites_services

Accessibility options

Information about available accessibility options.
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/accessibility/

OpenOffice Forum

Another forum that provides support for LibreOffice, among other open
source office suites. https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/

Where to get more help | 9

Paid support and training
Support and training is available through service contracts from a vendor or consulting firm
specializing in LibreOffice. For information about certified professional support, see The
Document Foundation website: https://www.documentfoundation.org/gethelp/support/.

What you see may be different
Illustrations
LibreOffice runs on Windows, Linux, and macOS operating systems, each of which has several
versions and can be customized by users (fonts, colors, themes, window managers). The
illustrations in this guide were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems.
Therefore, some illustrations will not look exactly like what is seen on a computer display.
Also, some of the dialogs may differ because of the settings selected in LibreOffice. Either use
dialogs from the computer system (default) or dialogs provided by LibreOffice.
To change to using LibreOffice dialogs:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >General on the Menu bar to open the dialog for general options.
2) On a Mac operating system, go to LibreOffice > Preferences > General on the Menu
bar to open the dialog for general options.
3) Select Use LibreOffice dialogs in Open/Save dialogs to display the LibreOffice dialogs
on a computer display, as shown in Figure 1.
4) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Figure 1: Options LibreOffice General dialog

10 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 2: Options LibreOffice View dialog

Icons
The LibreOffice community has created icons for several icon sets, including Breeze, Colibre,
Elementary, Sifr, and Tango. Each user can select a preferred set. The icons used to illustratesome of the many tools available in LibreOffice may differ from the ones used in this guide. The
icons in this user guide have been taken from a LibreOffice installation that has been set todisplay the Colibre set of icons.
Change the icon set used in a LibreOffice installation as follows:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View
on the Menu bar to open the dialog for view options.
2) On a Mac operating system, go to LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > View on
the Menu bar to open the dialog for view options.
3) In Icon Style select Colibre (SVG) from the options available in the drop down list as
shown in Figure 2.
4) In Icon Size, select Small from the drop down lists for Toolbar, Notebookbar and Sidebar,
as shown in Figure 2.
5) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Note
Some Linux operating systems, for example Ubuntu, include LibreOffice as part ofthe installation and may not include the Colibre icon set. This icon set can be
downloaded from the software repository for the Linux operating system being used.

Using LibreOffice on macOS
Some keystrokes and menu items are different on macOS from those used in Windows andLinux. Table 2 below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this user guide. Fora more detailed list, see the application help.

Using LibreOffice on macOS | 11

Table 2: Example of macOS keyboard shortcuts
Windows or LinuxmacOS equivalent

EffectTools > Options on
Menu barLibreOffice > Preferenceson Menu bar

Access setup options

Right-click

Ctrl +click and/or right-click
depending on computer setup

Open a context menu

Ctrl (Control)⌘ (Command)

Used with other keys

F11

⌘+T

Open the Styles deck in the Sidebar

Who wrote this user guide?
This user guide was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from sales ofthe printed edition will be used to benefit the community.

Frequently asked questions
How is LibreOffice licensed?
LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved Mozilla Public
License (MPL). See https://www.libreoffice.org/about-us/licenses/. It is based on code from
Apache OpenOffice made available under the Apache License 2.0 but also includes
software that differs from version to version under a variety of other Open Source licenses.
New code is available under LGPL 3.0 and MPL 2.0.
May I distribute LibreOffice to anyone?
Yes.
May I sell it?
Yes.
May I use it in my business?
Yes.
How many computers may I install it on?
As many as you like.
Is LibreOffice available in my language?
LibreOffice has been translated (localized) into over 40 languages, so your language
probably is supported. Additionally, there are over 70 spelling, hyphenation, and thesaurus
dictionaries available for languages, and dialects that do not have a localized programinterface. The dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at: www.libreoffice.org.
How can you make it for free?
LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several
organizations.
I am writing a software application. May I use programming code from LibreOffice in myprogram?
You may, within the parameters set in the MPL and/or LGPL. Read the licenses:
https://www.mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.

12 | Draw Guide 7.2

Why do I need Java to run LibreOffice? Is it written in Java?
LibreOffice is not written in Java; it is written in the C++ language. Java is one of several
languages that can be used to extend the software. The Java JDK/JRE is only required forsome features. The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine. Java isavailable at no cost. More information and download links to the appropriate edition for youroperating system can be found at: https://java.com/en/download/manual.jsp

Note
If the LibreOffice features that require Java are to be used, it is important that thecorrect 32-bit or 64-bit edition matches the installed version of LibreOffice. For more
information, see the Getting Started Guide. If Java is not to be used, nearly all of the
LibreOffice features can still be used.
How can I contribute to LibreOffice?
You can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways, and you
do not need to be a programmer. To start, check out this webpage:https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/
May I distribute the PDF of this user guide, or print and sell copies?
Yes, as long as requirements are met for one of the licenses in the copyright statement at
the beginning of this user guide. There is no need to request special permission.
LibreOffice request that you share with the project some of the profits you make from salesof user guides, in consideration of all the work we have put into producing them.
Donate to LibreOffice: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/

What is new in LibreOffice 7.2?
The LibreOffice 7.2 Release Notes are available at this link
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/ReleaseNotes/7.2
Also at this link, the release notes for earlier versions of LibreOffice are located giving more
information on the features that are included in LibreOffice.

What is new in LibreOffice 7.2? | 13

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 1,
Introducing Draw

Introduction
LibreOffice Draw is a vector graphics drawing program, although it can also perform some
operations on raster graphics (pixels). Using Draw, a wide variety of graphical images can easilyand quickly be created.
Vector graphics store and display an image as an assembly of simple geometric elements suchas lines, circles, and polygons, rather than a collection of pixels (points on the screen). Vector
graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image.
Draw is fully integrated into the LibreOffice suite, and this simplifies exchanging graphics with allcomponents of the LibreOffice suite. If an image is created in Draw, reusing it in a Writer
document is relatively easy. For example, select and copy the drawing in Draw and then paste
the image directly into a Writer document. Also, drawings can be worked on directly from within
Writer or Impress, using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw.
The functionality of LibreOffice Draw is extensive. Draw was not designed to rival high-end
graphics applications, but it possesses more functionality than the drawing tools that are
generally integrated with the majority of office productivity suites.
A few examples of the drawing functions are: layer management, magnetic grid-point system,
dimensions and measurement display, connectors for making organization charts, 3D functions
that enable small three-dimensional drawings to be created (with texture and lighting effects),
drawing and page-style integration, and Bézier curves.
This Draw Guide is not a course book to be worked through from beginning to end. Rather, it is areference work in which can be browsed for guidance on particular topics.
This document describes only the functions associated with Draw. Some concepts, such as file
management or the way the LibreOffice environment works, are mentioned only briefly and arecovered in more detail in the Getting Started Guide.

Figure 3: Draw main window

Introduction | 15

Draw main window
Workspace
The large area in the center of the Draw main window (Figure 3) is the Workspace where
drawings are created. This drawing area can be surrounded with toolbars and information areas.
The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task being carried out, user
preferences, and computer setup.
The maximum size of a drawing page in LibreOffice Draw is limited by the computer setup andthe page size that that can be set and used in the printer connected to the computer.

Pages pane
In Draw, drawings can be split over several pages. Multi-page drawings are used mainly forpresentations. The Pages pane, on the left side of the Draw main window, gives an overview ofthe pages that created in a drawing. If the Pages pane is not visible, go to View > Page Pane on
the Menu bar. To make changes to the page order, drag and drop one or more pages displayedin the Pages pane.

Layers bar
By default, the Workspace consists of three layers (Layout, Controls and Dimension Lines)
and the tabs for these default layers appear at the bottom of the Workspace. The default layers
cannot be deleted or renamed, but layers can be added as and when necessary. A layer is aworkspace where drawing elements and objects can be inserted.
Tabs for layers appear in the Layers bar at the bottom of the Workspace. The Layers bar allows
for navigation between layers, adding layers as required, or deleting layers that have beencreated. For more information on layers, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Sidebar
The Sidebar has five main decks in Draw and is similar to the Sidebar in the other LibreOfficemodules. To open a deck, click on its icon on the right of the Sidebar, or click on Sidebar
Settings icon at the top of the tab bar and select a deck from the drop-down list. If the Sidebar is
not visible, go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5.
Properties
Contains panels for object properties, for example, Character, Paragraph, Area, Effect,
Shadow, Line, Position and Size and Columns. The available panels depends on the object
selected.
StylesProvides options to edit and apply Drawing Styles to objects within a drawing. When a styleis edited or modified, the changes are automatically applied to all of the elements formatted
using that style. In Draw, Presentation Styles are not available.
Gallery
From the Gallery deck, objects can be inserted into a drawing either as a copy or as a link.
The Gallery is divided into categories: Arrows, BPMN (Business Process Model and
Notation), Bullets, Diagrams, Flowchart, Icons, Network, Shapes, and Sounds. See
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more information on using the Gallery.
Navigator
On the Navigator deck, pages and objects in a drawing can be quickly selected. It is
recommended to give pages and objects in a drawing meaningful names so that they areeasily identified when using the Navigator.

16 | Draw Guide 7.2

Shapes
Provides quick selection of most items that are available on the Drawing toolbar: Lines andArrows, Curves and Polygons, Connectors, Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block Arrows,
Flowchart, Callouts, Stars and Banners, and 3D Objects.

RulersRulers are positioned on the upper and left-hand sides of the Workspace. If they are not visible,
go to View > Rulers in the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Ctrl+R. The rulers show
the size of a selected object on the page using double lines (highlighted in Figure 4). Also, rulers
can be used to manage object handles and guide lines when positioning objects.
The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers. Change the margins
directly on the rulers by dragging them with the cursor. The margin areas are normally indicatedby a grayed out area on the rulers as shown in Figure 4, but this does depend on computer
operating system and setup.
To change the measurement units of the rulers, right-click on a ruler and select the measurement
unit from the drop down list, as shown in Figure 5 for the horizontal ruler. Measurement units forthe horizontal and vertical rulers can be set to different measurement units.

Figure 4: Rulers showing object size

Figure 5: Ruler measurement units

Figure 6: Status bar

Draw main window | 17

Status bar
The Status Bar (Figure 6) is located at the bottom of the Workspace in all LibreOffice modules. To
hide the Status Bar, go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Status Bar.

Note
The measurement units shown on the Status Bar are set by going to Tools >Options > LibreOffice Draw > General on the Menu bar. These measurement units
can be different to the measurement units set for the rulers.
•

Slide number – shows the number of the drawing pane that is selected.

•

Information area – shows which action is being carried out, or object type selected.

•

Cursor position and Object size – shows different information depending on whether
objects are selected or not.
– When no object is selected, the position numbers show the current position (X and Y
coordinates) of the mouse cursor.
– When an object is selected and being resized with the mouse, the object size
numbers show the size of the object (width and height).
– If an object is selected, the position numbers shows the X and Y coordinates of theupper-left corner and the object size number pair displays the size of the object.
These numbers do not relate to the object itself, but to the selection outline, which isthe smallest possible rectangle that can contain the visible part or parts of the object;
see Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
– When an object is selected, clicking in either of these areas opens the Position andSize dialog. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.

•

Unsaved changes – indicates that the file needs saving. The icon displayed depends on
computer setup. Clicking on this icon opens the Save as dialog if the file is new and has
not been saved before. If the file has been saved already, then clicking on this icon
automatically saves the file after any changes have been made.

•Digital signature – indicates if the document is digitally signed. The icon only appears if
the drawing has a digital signature certificate. After the file has been saved, doubleclicking on this icon opens the digital signatures dialog. See LibreOffice Help for more
information on digital signature certificates.

•

Fit drawing – resizes the drawing so that the whole drawing appears in the Workspace.

•

Zoom slider and Zoom percentage – adjusts and indicates the zoom percentage of theWorkspace displayed. Double-clicking on zoom percentage opens the Zoom & View
Layout dialog.

Toolbars
To display or hide the various Draw toolbars, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selectfrom the drop down menu the toolbar required. For example, the Standard and Drawing toolbars
are shown by default, but the Line and Filling, Text Formatting, and Options toolbars are notshown.
The appearance of the tool icons on toolbars depends on the computer operating system and theselection of icon style and size in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View.
The tools available on a toolbar are indicated, either, by a shaded outline around the tool icon, ora check mark as shown by the example in Figure 7. For more information about working withtoolbars, see the Getting Started Guide.

18 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 7: Visible buttons on a toolbar
The four main toolbars used in Draw are as follows:Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar (Figure 8) is the same for all LibreOffice components and is notdescribed in detail in this chapter. By default, it is locked into position at the top of the Draw
main window.

Figure 8: Standard toolbar
Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 9) contains all the necessary functions for drawing various
geometric and freehand shapes, and for organizing them in the drawing. By default, it islocked into position on the left of the Draw main window. It is described in detail in
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes.

Figure 9: Drawing toolbar
Line and Filling toolbar
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 10) is used to modify the main properties of a drawing
object. The tools and pull-down lists vary according to the type of object selected. For
example, to change the style of a line, click on the up and down arrows for Line Style andselect the required style.
The functions on the Line and Filling toolbar are used to change the color, style, and widthof the line drawn, the fill color and style, and other properties of a selected object. If theselected object is a text frame, the Line and Filling toolbar is replaced by the Text
Formatting toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes.
Draw main window | 19

Figure 10: Line and Filling toolbar
Text Formatting toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 11) is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer. It isonly available when text or a text object has been selected in a drawing, replacing the Lineand Filling toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes, andChapter 9 Adding and Formatting Text.

Figure 11: Text Formatting toolbar

Adding and removing tools
The default set of tools on each toolbar can be modified using Visible Buttons. Adding or
removing a tool is as follows:
1) Either, right-click in an empty area on the toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ in the toolbar
title and select Visible Buttons from the context menu.
2) Click on a tool name to add or remove the tool.

Note
For more information on the available tools that can be added to a toolbar, see
Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide. When a tool is added to a
toolbar, its position on the toolbar (from left to right) is the same as its position in the
Visible Buttons context menu.

Available toolsets
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right side of the tool icon. This indicates that thetool has additional tools available. Click on this triangle ▼ to display the full set of tools(Figure 12).
This toolset can be turned into a floating toolbar. Click the area at the top of the toolset as shownin Figure 12, drag it across the screen to a convenient location and release the mouse button. To
close a floating toolbar, click on the X on the right of the toolbar title.

Note
When a toolset is made into a floating toolbar, the tool on the existing toolbar
remains in the toolbar and always shows the last tool used. This means that the toolicon on a screen may differ from the tool icon shown in this guide.

20 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 12: Available toolsets

Tip
When double-clicking on a tool, the command corresponding to that tool becomes
active and remains active. The tool command can be repeated as often as required.
To exit from this mode, press the Esc key or click on another tool. Please note that
this may not work for every tool on every toolbar.

Docked and floating toolbars
When Draw is opened, the Standard and Drawing toolbars, by default, are already locked anddocked into their positions on the main Draw window. These toolbars can be undocked creating
floating toolbars as follows:
1) Move the mouse cursor to the far left of the toolbar and over the toolbar handle(Figure 13). The cursor changes shape, normally to a grabbing hand, depending on
computer setup and operating system.
2) Click and drag on the toolbar handle to move the toolbar until it becomes a floating
toolbar. This floating toolbar capability is common to all components of LibreOffice.
To dock a floating toolbar, press and hold the Ctrl key, then double click on the title of the toolbar.
The toolbar moves into available space at the top of the Draw main window.
An alternative method of docking a toolbar is to click in the toolbar title and drag the toolbar to thedocked position required. This can be the top, bottom or one of the sides of the Draw main
window.

Unlocking and locking toolbars
By default when Draw is opened, any docked toolbars are locked into position and have to be
unlocked before they can become floating toolbars or repositioned on the Draw main window.
To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and deselect Lock Toolbar Position
from the context menu. A toolbar handle, as shown in Figure 13, appears at the left end of thetoolbar, indicating that the toolbar is unlocked and can be moved.

Figure 13: Toolbar handles

Draw main window | 21

To lock a toolbar into position, dock the toolbar into position, then right-click in a blank area on
the toolbar and select Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu. The toolbar handle
disappears from the left end of the toolbar.

Customizing toolbars
Draw toolbars can be customized by adding or removing commands to or from a toolbar. Also,
customization allows the creation of toolbars for specific purposes. Customizing toolbars is inaddition to using “Adding and removing tools” above.
For more information when adding a new commands, modifying toolbars, or creating toolbars,
see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.

Choosing and defining colors
Color palette
The Color Palette (Figure 14) provides quick access to a standard set of colors to use forselected objects and text in a drawing.
1) Go to View on the Menu bar and select Color Bar to open the Color Palette.
2) Select an object or text.
3) Left click on the color required for the area fill or text and change the color of the object ortext.
4) Right click on the color required for the object or text box border and change the color of
the border.
5)

Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Color Bar to close the Color Palette.

Figure 14: Color Palette (Color Bar)Note
The box with the X at the bottom left of the Color Palette corresponds to none (nocolor).

Specialized color palettes
In addition to the standard Color Palette, Draw has several specialized color palettes available,
giving a greater choice of color: for example, chart-palettes, material, html, and so on. After
selecting an object or text in a drawing, use one of the following to access the specialized color
palettes.
•

Area or fill color – Color page in the Area dialog, Fill Color on the Drawing or Line andFilling toolbar, or Fill in the Area section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

22 | Draw Guide 7.2

•Line color – Line page in the Line dialog, Line Color on the Drawing or Line and Filling
toolbar, or Color in the Line section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar•

Text color – Font Color tool on the Text Formatting toolbar, or Font Color in the
Character section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

For more information on selecting a color and a color palette for an object or text, see Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes, Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text and Chapter 11, Advanced
Draw Techniques.

Custom colors
In Draw, custom colors can be created using the Color Picker dialog, specific CMYK values, or
specific RGB values to match the color schemes used in a company. For more detailed
information on creating custom colors and color palettes, as well as more information on CMYK
and RGB color schemes, refer to Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Grid, snap guides, and helplines
The grid, snap guides, and helplines in Draw act as drawing aids when moving and positioning
objects in a drawing. These drawing aids can be turned on or off as follows:•Line and Filling toolbar – click on Display Grid or Helplines While Moving to turn thegrid or helplines on or off.

•

Options toolbar – click on Display Grid, Display Snap Guides, or Helplines While
Moving to turn the grid, snap guides, or helplines on or off.

•

Go to View > Grid and Helplines on the Menu bar and select or deselect Display Gridor Helplines While Moving on the submenu.

•

Go to View > Snap Guides on the Menu bar and select or deselect Display Snap
Guides on the submenu.

The grid and snap guides are displayed only on the screen and are not shown on a printed
drawing or when the drawing is used in another LibreOffice module. The color, spacing andresolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis. Draw also offers several
snap functions to position objects exactly in a drawing.
Helplines show the position of the object while moving and makes positioning an object mucheasier. If this function is activated, pairs of vertical and horizontal lines enclosing the object are
shown while moving the object. These helplines extend to the edges of the drawing area.
For more information on the grid, snap guides, snap functions, and helplines, see Chapter 3,
Working with Objects and Object Points.

Grid, snap guides, and helplines | 23

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 2,
Drawing Basic Shapes

Introduction
LibreOffice Draw can create 2D and 3D objects. This chapter shows how to draw simple 2D
objects. The following chapters describe how to work with and edit such objects. For more
information on 3D objects, see Chapter 7, Working with 3D Objects.
All shapes, whether they are lines, rectangles, or more complicated shapes, are called objects.
This is common notation in vector drawing software.
The drawing tools are found on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 15). This toolbar is normally locatedon the left side of the main Draw window. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars on
the Menu bar and select Drawing from the available options.
As with all the components of LibreOffice, the Drawing toolbar can be unlocked and placed theDraw workspace as a floating toolbar. Toolbars can be configured by adding, moving, hiding, ordeleting tools. See Chapter 1, Introducing Draw for more information.
When a shape is drawn, an object selected for editing, or text added to the drawing, theinformation field in the Status Bar (Figure 16) changes to reflect the action taken or in progress.
See Chapter 1, Introducing Draw for more information on the Status Bar.

Figure 15: Drawing toolbar

Figure 16: Status Bar

Drawing basic shapes
Basic shapes, including text, are treated as objects in Draw. The default set of tools available fordrawing basic shapes on the Drawing toolbar are shown in Figure 15. To add more tools to the
Drawing toolbar, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide for more information.
Some tool icons on the Drawing toolbar change shape according to the last tool used from theselection of available tools. Each tool that has a triangle ▼ next to the tool icon indicates that
more tools are available. See “Drawing geometric shapes” on page 37 for information on theavailable shapes.

Note
When a basic shape is drawn, or one selected for editing, the information area at theleft side in the status bar changes to reflect the present action. For example Linecreated, Text frame xxyy selected, and so on.

Straight lines
Creating straight lines
A straight line is the simplest element or object in Draw to create.
1) Use one of the following options to draw a straight line:– Click Insert Line on the Drawing toolbar.

Drawing basic shapes | 25

– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectInsert Line from the options available.
– Click Insert Line in the Line and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the Sidebar(Figure 17).
2) Place the cursor at the starting point on the drawing, then click and drag the cursor to
draw a straight line.
3) Release the mouse button when the end point is reached and a straight line is created. A
selection handle appears at each end of the line, showing that this object is the currently
selected object. The selection handle at the starting point of the line is slightly larger than
the selection handle at the end point, as shown in Figure 18.

Note
To snap the end of a straight line to the nearest grid point, keep the Ctrl key pressed
while drawing the straight line. This is the default behaviour of the Ctrl key. However,if the Snap to Grid option on View > Snap Guides on the Menu bar has been
selected, pressing the Ctrl key while drawing a straight line temporarily deactivates
the Snap to Grid option.

Figure 17: Lines and Arrows panel in Shapes deck on
SidebarFigure 18: Line starting point

26 | Draw Guide 7.2

Note
To restrict the drawing angle of a straight line to a multiple of 45 degrees (0, 45, 90,
135, and so on), keep the Shift key pressed while drawing a straight line. However, if
the option When creating or moving objects in the Constrain Objects section ofTools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid has been selected, pressing the Shift
key temporarily deactivates this restriction.

Note
To draw a straight line symmetrically outwards in both directions from the start point,
keep the Alt key pressed while drawing the straight line. This draws straight lines
from the middle of the straight line.

Formatting straight lines
When a straight line is drawn, it uses default attributes. To change any of these attributes andformat a straight line to the drawing requirements:
1) Select the straight line by clicking on it and display the selection handles.
2) Use one of the following methods to access and use the formatting options for a straightline:– Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 19).
– Use the tools Line Style, Line Width, and Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar(Figure 20).
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar to open the Line dialog (Figure 21).
– Right-click and select Line from the context menu to open the Line dialog.

Figure 19: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Drawing basic shapes | 27

Figure 20: Line and Filling toolbar

Figure 21: Line dialog - Line pageLines and arrows
Draw classifies both lines and arrows as lines and are drawn like straight lines (for more
information, see “Straight lines” on page 25). Hovering the cursor over each tool in the Lines andArrows sub-toolbar, or the Line and Arrows panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar indicateswhat type of line or arrow each tool draws. The information field on the Status Bar shows them
only as lines.

Creating lines or arrows
The tools available on the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 22) for creating lines or arrows
are, from left to right:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Insert Line
Line Ends with Arrow
Line with Circle/Arrow
Line with Square/Arrow
Line with Arrows

28 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Line Starts with Arrow
7) Line with Arrow/Circle
8) Line with Arrow/Square
9) Dimension Line
10) Line (45º)

Figure 22: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Note
The tool icon for the last tool used is already selected on the Drawing toolbar. This
makes it easier to use the same tool again.
1) Use one of the following methods to draw a line or arrow:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectthe type of line or arrow required from the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 22).
– Select the type of line or arrow required in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar (Figure 17 on page 26).
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the line or arrow, then click and drag the cursor.
The arrowhead(s) is drawn when the mouse button is released.
3) For more information on how to draw lines and arrows, see “Straight lines” on page 25.

Formatting line or arrow
After drawing a line or arrow, make sure it is selected and format the line or arrow to the drawing
requirements using one of the following methods:
1) To format the line used for an arrow, see “Straight lines” on page 25 for more information.
2) To format an arrow using the same arrowhead style for both ends of the arrow:a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar or right-click on the arrow to open the Linedialog.
c) Click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page (Figure 23).
d) Select an arrow style from the options available in the Arrow style drop-down list.
e) Click OK to apply the arrow style and close the Line dialog.
f)Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.

3) To format an arrow using different arrowhead styles for each end of the arrow:a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Open the Line panel on the Properties deck of the Sidebar (Figure 24).
c) In Line, click on Arrow Style to open the drop-down list for arrowhead stylesd) Select an arrowhead style from the left-hand list of arrowhead styles for the start pointof the arrow, when the arrow was drawn.
e) Select an arrowhead style from the right-hand list of arrowhead styles for the end
point of the arrow, when the arrow was drawn.
f)

Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.

Drawing basic shapes | 29

Figure 23: Line dialog - Arrow Styles page

Figure 24: Arrowhead styles in Line panel in
Properties deck on Sidebar

30 | Draw Guide 7.2

Rectangles or squares
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing a rectangle or square:– Click on Rectangle in the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of rectangle or square in the Basic Shapes panel on the Shapes deckin the Sidebar (Figure 25).
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of rectangle or square required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of rectangle or square from the Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 26).
To display the Legacy Rectangles toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar
and select it.
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the rectangle or square, then click and drag the
cursor until the required size is drawn. The rectangle or square is drawn from the starting
point using the bottom right corner as the anchor point.
3) If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to draw
a square.
4) If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw a
rectangle from its center.
5) If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging the
cursor to draw a square from its center.
6) If a square option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw asquare from its center.

Figure 25: Shapes deck on Sidebar

Drawing basic shapes | 31

Figure 26: Legacy Rectangles
toolbarNote
If the option When creating or moving objects has been selected in the Constrain
Object section of Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid, the action of the
Shift key reversed. A square is drawn instead of a rectangle. To draw a rectangle,
hold down the Shift key. This reversal of the Shift key action also applies whendrawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and segments.

Ellipses or circles
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an ellipse or circle:– Click on Ellipse in the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle in the Basic Shapes panel on the Shapes deck in
the Sidebar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of ellipse or circle required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle from the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar(Figure 27). To display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View > Toolbars
on the Menu bar and select it.
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the ellipse or circle, then click and drag the cursor
until the required size is drawn.
3) Place the cursor at the starting point for the ellipse or circle, then click and drag the cursor
until the required size is drawn. The ellipse or circle is drawn from the starting point using
the bottom right corner as the anchor point.
4) If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to draw
a circle.
5) If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw anellipse from its center.
6) If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging the cursor
to draw a circle from its center.
7) If a circle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw acircle from its center.

Figure 27: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

Tip
To quickly insert a line, rectangle, ellipse, or text, press and hold down the Ctrl key
and then click on Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, or Text and a standard sized object isdrawn automatically in the Workspace. The size, shape, and color are all standard
values. These attributes can be changed later, if desired. See Chapter 4, Changing
Object Attributes for more information.
32 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 28: Dimension lines on an object

Figure 29: Dimension Line dialog

Dimension lines
Dimension lines display a measurement of an object in the drawing (Figure 28). The dimension
line does not belong to the object itself, but is positioned close to it. An object can have as many
dimension lines as necessary to indicate the size of its sides, edges, and distances.
To format the display of a dimension line components by right-clicking on the dimension line andselecting Dimensions from the context menu to open the Dimension line dialog (Figure 29).

Drawing basic shapes | 33

Inserting dimension lines
1) Use one of the following options to start drawing a dimension line:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectDimension Line from the drop-down list.
– Click on Dimension Line in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar.
2) Place the cursor at the point close to the object to position the start of the dimension line.
3) Click and drag to draw the dimension line. As the dimension line is drawn, the dimension
is displayed and automatically calculated.
4) Select the dimension line, then right-click on the dimension and select Dimensions fromthe context menu to open the Dimension Line dialog.
5) Format the dimension line using the options available the. For more information
dimension line options, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension Line dialog.
7) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the dimension line.

Note
The measurement units used for dimension lines can be changed by going to Tools> Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid on the Menu bar and select a measurement
unit from the available options in the Units of measurement drop-down list.

Arcs and segments
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an arc or segment (partial circles or
ellipses):– Select the type of arc or segment in the Basic Shapes panel on the Shapes deck in
the Sidebar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of arc or segment required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of arc or segment from the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar. To
display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar
and select it.
2) Click at the approximate start point and drag the cursor to start creating an arc or
segment. Release the mouse button when the required object size is reached.
3) Move the cursor to the position where the arc or segment starts and click to start drawing
the arc or segment. The Status Bar indicates the angle in degrees.
4) Move the cursor to the end position of where the arc or segment finishes. The Status Bar
shows the angle in degrees.
5) Click again to complete the arc or segment.

Curves, polygons or freeform lines
Select the required tool for drawing curves, polygons, or freeform lines using one of the following
methods:•

Click on the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar and selectthe type of curve, polygon or freeform line from the drop-down list.

•

Select the type of curve, polygon or freeform line in the Curve and Polygons panel ofthe Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

34 | Draw Guide 7.2

Curves
1) Click to create the starting point of the curve, then drag the cursor from the starting point
to draw a line.
2) Release the mouse button and continue to drag the cursor to bend the line into therequired curve shape.
3) Click to set the end point of the curve and position the curve on the drawing.
4) Continue dragging the cursor to draw straight lines at the end of the curve. Each mouseclick sets a corner point and allows drawing of another straight line from each corner
point.
5) Double-click to end the drawing of a curve and straight lines.

Note
A filled curve automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the object
and fills it with the selected fill. A curve without filling is not closed at the end of thedrawing.

Polygons
1) Click to create the start point, then drag the cursor to draw a line between the first andsecond corner points.
2) Click again to end the drawing between the first and second corner points of the polygon.
3) Move the cursor to draw the next line and click to finish drawing to the next corner point.
Each mouse click sets a corner point and draws another line.
4) Double-click to end the drawing of a polygon.

Note
A filled polygon automatically joins the last corner point to the first corner point toclose off the figure and fills it with the selected fill. A polygon without filling is not
closed at the end of the drawing.

Polygons 45°
Like ordinary polygons, these are formed from lines, but the angles between lines are restricted
to 45 or 90 degrees. If required, hold down the Shift key as the line is drawn so that the line isdrawn at an angle other than 45 or 90 degrees.

Freeform lines
Using freeform line tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper.
1) Click and drag the cursor to the line shape required.
2) Release the mouse button to complete the drawing of the freeform line.
3) If Freeform Line Filled is selected, the end point is joined automatically to the start point
and the object is filled with the selected fill.

Note
The points in curves, polygons and freeform lines can be moved and edited. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques formore information.

Drawing basic shapes | 35

Figure 30: Example of glue points on an
objectFigure 31: Glue Points toolbar

Glue points and connectors
Glue points
All Draw objects have glue points, which are not normally displayed. Glue points become visible
when Connectors is selected on the Drawing toolbar or a connector tool is selected in theConnectors panel on the Shapes deck in the Sidebar.
Most objects have four glue points, as shown in the example in Figure 30. More glue points canbe added and customized using the Glue Points toolbar (Figure 31). Go to View > Toolbars >Glue Points on the Menu bar to open the toolbar.
Glue points are not the same as the selection handles of an object. Selection handles are formoving or changing the shape of an object. Glue points are used to fix or glue a connector to an
object so that when the object moves, the connector stays fixed to the object. For a more detailed
description on the use of glue points, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points andChapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts.

Connectors
Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically snap to a glue point of an object.
Connectors are not the same as lines and arrows. When objects are moved or reordered, theconnectors remain attached to a glue point. Figure 32 shows an example of two objects and aconnector.
Draw offers a range of different connectors and connector functions. On the Drawing toolbar,
click on the triangle ▼ next to Connectors and select a connector type from the drop-down list, or
select a connector from the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck in the Sidebar. For a moredetailed description of the use of connectors, see Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, andOrganization Charts.

36 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 32: Example of connector between two objects

Figure 33: Creating floating toolbar

Drawing geometric shapes
The tools for drawing geometric shapes are located on the Drawing toolbar and on the Shapes
deck in the Sidebar. The use of these tools for geometric shapes is similar to the tools used fordrawing rectangles and squares, or ellipses and circles. For more information, see “Drawing
basic shapes” on page 25.
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool icon on the Drawing toolbar opens a drop-down list
giving access to the toolset for that shape. If necessary, this drop-down list can be “torn off” tocreate a floating sub-toolbar.
•

Click the dotted line at the top of the toolset as shown in Figure 33, drag it across thescreen to the Workspace and release the mouse button to create a floating toolbar•

To close a floating toolbar, click on the X on the right of the toolbar title.

Note
The tool icons on the Drawing toolbar always indicate the last geometric shapedrawn and may not be the same as the tool icons shown on the Drawing toolbar inthis chapter. Indicating the last tool used makes it easier to use the same tool again.

Note
Text can be added to all of these geometric shapes. For more information, see
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Drawing geometric shapes | 37

Basic shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the Basic
Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 34). This sub-toolbar also includes rectangle and ellipse tools thatare identical to the ones already displayed on the Drawing toolbar. Alternatively, select therequired tool in the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 34: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Symbol shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 35). Alternatively, select the required tool in the Symbol
Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 35: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar

Block arrows
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar opens the Block
Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 36). Alternatively, select the required tool in the Block Arrows panelin the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 36: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Flowcharts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar opens the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 37) for symbols. Alternatively, select the required tool in the Flowchart panelin the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. The creation of flowcharts, organization charts, and similar
planning tools are further described in Chapter 8 Connections, Flowcharts and Organization
Charts.

Figure 37: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Callouts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callout on the Drawing toolbar opens the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 38). Alternatively, select the required tool in the Callouts panel on the
Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

38 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 38: Callouts
sub-toolbar

Stars and banners
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar opens theStars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 39). Alternatively, select the required tool in the Stars andBanners panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 39: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

3D Objects
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar opens the
3D-Objects sub-toolbar (Figure 40). Alternatively, select the required tool in the 3D-Objects panelin the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 40: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar

Adding, inserting and formatting text
In Draw text can be added, inserted, and formatted to a drawing, objects, and shapes. For more
information on how to add, insert, and format text in a drawing or drawing objects, see Chapter 9,
Adding and Formatting Text.

Adding, inserting and formatting text | 39

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 3,
Working with Objects

Introduction
This chapter looks at the tools and functions to modify existing drawings. All of the functions
apply to a selected object or a group of selected objects, which can be distinguished by selection
handles on a rectangular frame that is large enough to contain the object. Where several objects
are selected, the frame around the objects corresponds to the smallest rectangle that can containall of the objects. This frame is called the selection rectangle.

Note
The color and shape of the selection handles changes depending on the tool andfunction that has been selected to change the object properties. The color of theselection handles also depends on the computer operating system and how thecomputer has been set up.

Selecting objects
Direct selection
The easiest way to select an object is to click directly on it. For objects that are not filled, click on
the object border to select it. To select more than one object, hold the Shift key down while
clicking on objects. To deselect an object, move the cursor into a blank space on the drawing andclick.

Selection by framing
Several objects can be selected at once by clicking and dragging the cursor around the objects
drawing a selection rectangle around the objects. Only objects that lie entirely within thisselection rectangle are selected. To select multiple objects by framing, Select on the Drawing
toolbar must be active, as shown in Figure 41.

Figure 41: Drawing toolbar

Selecting hidden objects
If objects are located behind others and not visible, they can still be selected. When a hidden
object is selected, its selection handles appear through the objects covering it.
•

Windows, Mac or Linux – press the Tab key to select and cycle through the selection of
objects in a drawing, stopping at the hidden object to select it. To cycle through theobjects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab.

•

Windows or Mac only – select the object in front of a hidden object, then press the Alt
key and click to select the hidden object. If there are several hidden objects, keep holding
down the Alt key and clicking until the object required is reached. To cycle through theobjects in reverse order, hold down the Alt+Shift keys and click.

Arranging objects
In a complex drawing, several objects may be stacked on top of one another. This stacking ordercan be rearranged by moving an object forward or backward using one of the following methods:•

Select an object, go to Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar, or right-click on the object andselect Arrange from the drop down menu, then select one of the following options:
Selecting objects | 41

– Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++)– Bring Forward (Ctrl++ )– Send Backward (Ctrl+-)– Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+-)– In Front of Object– Behind Object•

Select an object, then select one of the Arrange tools at the left end of the Line andFilling toolbar (Figure 42). When the cursor is hovered over a tool, its function isindicated.

Figure 42: Line and Filling toolbar

Note
The Line and Filling toolbar is not visible in the default installation of LibreOffice. To
make this toolbar visible, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on the Menu bar.

Positioning and adjusting objects
Using zoom
To help in the positioning and adjustment of objects, Draw has a zoom function that reduces orenlarges the screen display of the current drawing. For example, zoom in to position objects on a
drawing with greater accuracy; zoom out to see the complete drawing. Zooming is controlledusing the Status Bar, Zoom & View Layout dialog, or Zoom toolbar.

Note
Zooming is handled differently in Linux and Windows operating systems. A drawing
saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor inLinux.

Status bar
The zoom controls are located on the right side of the Status Bar (Figure 43) and these controls
give quick and easy access to zooming.
•

Fit slide to current window – fits the drawing to the open window.

•

Minus sign (-) – reduces the zoom factor•

Plus sign (+) – increases the zoom factor.

•

Click and drag the zoom slider to increase or decrease the zoom factor.

•

Right-click on the zoom percentage number and select a zoom factor from the context
menu that opens.

42 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 43: Zoom controls on
Status Bar

Figure 44: Zoom & View Layout dialog•

Double-click on the zoom percentage number and select a zoom factor from the Zoom &View Layout dialog (Figure 44), or go to View > Zoom > Zoom on the Menu bar to open
the Zoom & View Layout dialog.

Zoom & View Layout dialog
The Zoom & View Layout dialog provides the following options to control how a drawing isviewed on a monitor.
•

Zoom Factor – sets the zoom factor at which to display the current document and all
documents of the same type that are subsequently opened.
– Optimal – resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document.
– Fit width and height – displays the entire page on the screen.
– Fit width – displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom
edges of the page may not be visible.
– 100% – displays the document at its actual size.
– Variable – enter a percentage in the box for the zoom factor to display the document.

•

View Layout – used to set the view layout and is not available for drawings. View layout
is normally used in text documents to see the effects of different layout settings.

Zoom toolbar
Go to View > Toolbars > Zoom on the Menu bar to open the Zoom toolbar (Figure 45). The tools
available on this toolbar, from left to right, are as follows:

Positioning and adjusting objects | 43

Figure 45: Zoom toolbar•

Zoom In – displays the drawing at two times its current size each time the tool isselected.

•

Zoom Out – displays the drawing at half its current size each time the tool is selected.

•

100% – displays the drawing at its actual size.

•

Zoom Previous – returns the display of the drawing to the previous zoom factor applied.

•

Zoom Next – undoes the action of the previous zoom command.

•

Entire Page – displays the whole drawing in the Workspace.

•

Page Width – displays the complete width of the drawing. The top and bottom edges ofthe slide may not be visible.

•

Optimal – resizes the display to include all of the objects on the slide.

•Object Zoom – resizes the display to fit the selected object(s).

•Zoom & Pan – zooms in for each mouse click. Ctrl+click zooms out for each click.
Shift+click allows panning of the drawing.

•

Shift – moves the drawing within the Draw workspace. Place the cursor on the drawing
and drag to move the drawing.

Moving and adjusting object size
When moving an object or changing its size, check the left-hand area of the Status Bar at thebottom of the Workspace (Figure 46). From left to right, this area shows that a shape is selected,
its position on the drawing in X/Y coordinates and dimensions of the object. The measurement
units are those selected in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General.

Moving objects
To move an object (or a group of objects), select it and then click and drag within the object
borders. During movement, a ghost image of the object appears to help with repositioning(Figure 47). When the object reaches its new location, release the mouse button.

Adjusting object size
To change the size of a selected object (or a group of selected objects), move the mouse cursor
to one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape to indicate the direction of movement
for that selection handle. As the object size changes, a ghosted outline of the object appears(Figure 48). When the desired size of the object is reached, release the mouse button.
The results depend on which selection handle is used. To resize an object along one axis, use aside, top, or bottom handle. To resize along both axes, use a corner handle.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key while resizing an object. The change in size is carriedout symmetrically with respect to object width and height so that the aspect ratio of
the object remains the same. This Shift key behavior works on all selection handles.

44 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 46: Left end of Status Bar when working with objects

Figure 47: Moving objects

Figure 48: Adjusting object size

Figure 49: Modifying arcs

Positioning and adjusting objects | 45

Modifying arcs
The size of an arc can be changed by adjusting the positions of the start and end points of anarc. Select an arc, then right click on the arc and select Points from the drop down menu orpress the F8 key. Two handles appear at the start and end of the arc (Figure 49). Click on one ofthese handles and drag it to a new position to change the shape of the arc.

Rotating and slanting objects
Rotating objects
To rotate an object (or a group of objects), select the object, then go to rotation mode using oneof the following methods.
1) Select or click on an object
2) Use one of the following methods to switch to rotation mode. The selection handles
change shape and color and a center of rotation indicator appears in the center of theobject, as shown in Figure 50.
– Click again on a selected object.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar
and select Rotate from the pop up menu.
– Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar to open theTransformations toolbar (Figure 51) and select Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over the handles and the cursor changes shape. The corner handles are
for rotating the object, and the top, bottom and side handles are to shear or slant theobject.

Note
The rotation center is normally located at the center of an object. To change theposition of the rotation center, click on the rotation center and drag until it is at thedesired position. This rotation center can even be outside of the object.

Note
Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because it occurs in a three
dimensional space and not in a single plane. See Chapter 7, Working with 3D
Objects for more information.

Figure 50: Rotating objects

46 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 51: Transformations toolbar

Figure 52: Slanting objects

Slanting objects
To slant an object, select the object and switch on rotation mode (see “Rotating objects” above).
Click on the handles located at the midpoints on the top, bottom and sides of a selected object.
The cursor changes shape when it hovers over one of these midpoint handles indicating thedirection of slanting.
The axis used for slanting an object is the object edge directly opposite the midpoint handle
being used to slant the object. This axis stays fixed in location while the other sides of the object
move in relation to it as the selection is dragged (Figure52). Click and drag the cursor to slant theobject. A ghosted outline of the object being slanted appears and the current angle of slanting isshown in the status bar.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key while rotating or slanting an object, movement isrestricted to 15°. This is the default behavior of the Shift key. However, if Whencreating or moving objects has been selected in Tools > Options > LibreOffice
Draw > Grid, the action of the Shift key is reversed and rotation or slanting is
restricted to 15° of movement unless the Shift key is pressed.

Setting exact position, size, rotation and slant
Using the mouse to position and resize objects is not exact. If greater accuracy is required toposition and size an object, it is recommended to use the Position and Size dialog (Figure 53) orthe Position and Size panel (Figure 54) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
•

To open the Position and Size dialog, select the object and use one of the following
methods:– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

•

To open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select theobject, then click on Properties on the Sidebar and click on the down arrow next to the
Position and Size title bar to open the panel.

Positioning and adjusting objects | 47

Figure 53: Position and Size dialog

Figure 54: Position and Size panel in Properties
deck on Sidebar
48 | Draw Guide 7.2

The options available in the Position and Size dialog and the Position and Size panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar are similar. On the Sidebar, however, the following options are
not available:•

Position and size of an object cannot be protected.

•

Adapt an object to fit any text.

•

Set the base point position for position and size.

Position and Size•

Position – specify the location of the selected object on the page.
– Position X – enter the horizontal distance required to move the object relative to thebase point selected in the grid.
– Position Y – enter the vertical distance required to move the object relative to the basepoint selected in the grid.
– Base point – select a base point in the grid and then enter the amount required to shift
the object relative to the base point that is selected in the Position Y and Position X
boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object. This option
is only available in the Position and Size dialog.

•

Size – specify the amount required to resize the selected object with respect to theselected base point.
– Width – enter a width for the selected object.
– Height – enter a height for the selected object.
– Keep ratio – maintains proportions when resizing the selected object.
– Base point – select a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions
for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. This option is only available in
the Position and Size dialog.

•

Protect – this option is only available in the Position and Size dialog.
– Position – prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
– Size – prevents resizing of the object.

•

Adapt – specifies, if the size of a text box should be adjusted to fit the size of entered
text. This option is only available for text boxes.
– Fit width to text – expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object
is smaller than the text.
– Fit height to text – expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if theobject is smaller than the text.

The units of measurement used for X//Y coordinates and the width and height of the object are
set by going to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General.
The default location of the base points for position and size is the upper left corner of the drawing
area. This base point can be temporarily change to make positioning or dimensioning simpler byclicking on a position corresponding to the location of the base point required. This change inbase point is only valid for single use and the base point is reset to the standard position of top
left corner when the Position and Size dialog is closed.

Positioning and adjusting objects | 49

Figure 55: Position and Size dialog - Rotation page

Rotating objects
To accurately rotate an object, click on the Rotation tab of the Position and Size dialog(Figure 55). The options available allow the rotation angle and the location of the pivot point to be
defined. Alternatively, use the available options for rotation in the Position and Size panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar.
•

Pivot Point – the selected object is rotated around a specified pivot point. The default
pivot point is at the center of the object. If a pivot point is set too far outside of the object
boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. This option is only available in the
Position and Size dialog.
– Position X – enter horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
– Position Y – enter vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
– Default settings – select the position of the pivot point. Default position is the center ofthe object. Changing the rotation pivot point is only valid for single use. The pivot pointis reset to default settings when the Position and Size dialog is closed.

•

Rotation – specify the number of degrees that required to rotate the selected object, or
click in the rotation grid.
– Angle – enter the number of degrees that required to rotate the selected object. This
option is only available in the Position and Size dialog.
– Default settings – click on the indicator to rotate the object. The number of degrees isshown in the Angle box as the indicator is rotated. This option is only available in the
Position and Size dialog.
– Rotation – click on the indicator to rotate the selected object, or set the angle in the
text box, or select a predetermined angle from the drop down list. This option is only
available in the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

50 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 56: Position and Size dialog - Slant & Corner Radius page

Slant and corner radius
To accurately set the corner radius or slant angle of an object, click on the Slant & Corner
Radius tab of the Position and Size dialog (Figure 56). Options for slant and corner radius are
only available in the Position and Size dialog.

Note
To set the Corner Radius, rectangles and squares available on the Legacy
Rectangles have to be used. This toolbar is optional and is opened by going to View
> Toolbars > Legacy Rectangles on the Menu bar.
•Corner Radius – this option is only available for the corners of a rectangular or squareobject that has been created using the Legacy Rectangles toolbar. If this option is grayedout, the corner radius cannot set.
– Radius – enter the radius of the circle that to be used to round the corners. The larger
the value for corner radius set, the rounder corners of a rectangle or square become.

•Slant – slants the selected object along the bottom edge of the object.
– Angle – enter the angle of the slant axis. The slant angle relates to how much an
object inclines or slants from its normal vertical position on a drawing.

•

Control Point 1 and 2 – enter a value to set the X and Y coordinates of the top left
corner of the object. If these options are grayed out, then coordinates cannot be set.

Using grid and snap functions
In Draw, objects can be positioned accurately and consistently using grid points, snap points andlines, object frames, individual points on objects, or page edges. This function is known as snap
and it is easier to use snap functions at the highest practical zoom value for a drawing. Two
different snap functions can be used at the same time. For example, snapping to a guide line andthe page edge. However, it is recommended to activate only those snap functions that are reallyrequired.

Using grid and snap functions | 51

Figure 57: Options LibreOffice Draw Grid dialog

Figure 58: Options toolbar

Configuring grid and snap functions
To configure the grid and snap functions in a drawing, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice
Draw > Grid on the Menu bar to display the Grid dialog (Figure 57). The grid and snap functions
can also be displayed and switched on or off using this dialog, right-clicking on a drawing andusing the options in the context menu, or using the icons in the Options toolbar (Figure 58). If the
Options toolbar is not open, go to View > Toolbars > Options on the Menu bar.
•

Grid – specifies the settings for the configurable grid on document pages. This grid helps
to determine the exact position of objects. Also, this grid can be set in line with themagnetic snap grid. If the snap grid is activated, but want to move or create individual
objects without snap positions, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function.
– Snap to grid – specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only
between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action,
drag an object while holding down the Ctrl key.
– Visible grid – specifies whether to display the grid.

•

Resolution– Horizontal – defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the
X-axis.
– Vertical – defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the
Y-axis.

•Subdivision– Horizontal – specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the
X-axis.
– Vertical – specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the
Y-axis.

•Synchronize axes – specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same.

52 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

Snap
– To snap lines – snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when themouse button is released. This setting can also be defined using Snap to Snap
Guides on the Options toolbar.
– To the page margins – specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object tothe nearest page margin. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must bein the snap range. This function can also be accessed using Snap to Page Margins
in the Options toolbar.
– To object frame – specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to theborder of the nearest graphic object. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics
object must be in the snap range. This function can also be accessed with Snap to
Object Border in the Options toolbar.
– To object points – specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to thepoints of the nearest graphic object. This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of
the graphics object is in the snap range. This function can also be accessed with
Snap to Object Points in the Options toolbar.
– Snap range – defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object
contour. Snaps to a snap point if the cursor is closer than the distance selected.

•

Constrain Objects– When creating or moving objects – specifies that graphic objects are restrictedvertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. This setting
can be temporarily deactivated by pressing the Shift key.
– Extend edges – specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of arectangle when the Shift key is pressed before releasing the mouse button. This also
applies to an ellipse (a circle is created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse).
When Extend edges is not selected, a square or a circle is created based on the
shorter side or diameter.
– When rotating – specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation
angle that is selected. To rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift
key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
– Point reduction – defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons,
this maybe useful in reducing the editing points.

Snap to gridUsing Snap to Grid
Using Snap to Grid moves an object exactly onto a grid point in a drawing. This function can beswitched on and off using one of the following methods:•

Go to View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Snap to Grid from the context menu.

•

Click on Snap to Grid on the Options toolbar.

Using grid and snap functions | 53

Figure 59: Options LibreOffice Application Colors dialog

Displaying grid
Displaying or turning off the grid in a drawing is done using one of the following methods:•

Go to View > Grid and Helplines > Display Grid on the Menu bar.

•

Click on Display Grid on the Options toolbar.

•

Right-click on a drawing and select Grid and Helplines > Display Grid from the context
menu.

•

Select Visible grid in the Options LibreOffice Draw Grid dialog.

Changing color of grid points
By default and depending on the display and computer setup, the grid points are gray and are notalways easy to see. To change the color of the grid points, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice> Application Colors to open the Application Colors dialog (Figure 59). In
Drawing/Presentation, select a more suitable color for the grid from the drop-down list.

Snap points and lines
Unlike the grid, snap lines and snap points can be inserted when to position an object to a
specific position on a drawing. Snap lines can either be horizontally or vertically and appear as
dashed lines. Snap points appear as small crosses with dashed lines. Snap points and snap lines
do not appear in printed output.

54 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 60: New Snap Object dialog

Inserting snap points and snap lines
To insert a snap point or snap line, go to Insert > Snap Guide on the Menu bar to open the New
Snap Object dialog (Figure 60).
•

Position – sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left cornerof the page.
– X axis – enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and theleft edge of the page.
– Y axis – enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the
top edge of the page.

•Type – specifies the type of snap object being inserted.
– Point – inserts a snap point.
– Vertical – inserts a vertical snap line.
– Horizontal – inserts a horizontal snap line.

Displaying snap points and lines
Displaying or turning off snap points and lines in a drawing can be done using one of thesemethods:•

Go to View > Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides on the Menu bar.

•

Click on Display Snap Guides in the Options toolbar.

•

Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides from thecontext menu.

Editing snap points and lines
To edit a snap point, right-click on the snap point and select Edit Snap Point from the context
menu to open the Edit Snap Point dialog (Figure 61). Enter new X and Y coordinate settings forthe snap point and click OK. Alternatively, drag a snap point to a new position on a drawing.
To edit a snap line, right-click on the snap line and select Edit Snap Line from the context menu
to open the Edit Snap Line dialog (Figure 62). Enter a new X coordinate setting for vertical snap
lines or a new Y coordinate setting for horizontal snap lines and click OK. Alternatively, drag asnap line to a new position on a drawing.

Using grid and snap functions | 55

Figure 61: Edit Snap Point dialog

Figure 62: Edit Snap Line dialog

Deleting snap points and lines
To delete a snap point, drag it back to a ruler or right-click on the snap point and select Delete
Snap Point from the context menu. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler or right-click on
the snap line and select Delete Snap Line from the context menu.

Configuring snap range
To configure the snap range of when an object snaps to position
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid on the Menu bar to open the Options
LibreOffice Grid dialog.
2) Enter the number of pixels to set the proximity of when the object will snap into position in
the Snap range box. The default setting is 5 pixels.
3) Click OK to set the new snap range and close the dialog.

Using Helplines
Helplines are a function in Draw to help in positioning of objects. Helplines can be displayed
while the object is being moved. They extend from the edges of the object to the rulers at the top
and left side of a drawing and do not have a snap function (Figure 63).
To use guide lines, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > View on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice Draw View dialog (Figure 64) and select Helplines when moving option or
click Helplines While Moving in the Options toolbar.

56 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 63: Helplines while moving

Figure 64: Options LibreOffice Draw View dialog

Changing object shape
Regular shapes
When drawing certain regular shapes, one or more dots are displayed in a different color to theselection handles when an object is selected. When the cursor hovers over one of these dots, itchanges shape. Clicking and dragging on one of these dots modifies the shape of the object. For
example, increasing the corner radius of a rounded rectangle or square, changes the angles ofan arc, and so on.
These dots perform different functions according to the shape selected. The shapes with formchanging dots and their functions are listed as follows.

Note
Regular shapes can also be changed after conversion to a curve or polygon andediting the points. See “Curves and polygons” on page 60 and “Editing points” onpage 61 for more information.

Changing object shape | 57

Basic shapes
Refer to Figure 65 to identify the following shapes with adjustment dots.

Figure 65: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar•

Rectangle, Rounded – use the dot to change the radius of the curve that replaces theangled corners of a rectangle or square.

•

Square, Rounded – use the dot to change the radius of the curve that replaces theangled corners of a rectangle or square.

•

Parallelogram – use the dot to change the internal angles between the sides.

•

Trapezoid – use the dot to change the internal angles between the sides.

•

Circle Pie – use the dots to change the size of the filled sector.

•

Block Arc – use the dot to change both internal diameter and size of the filled area.

•

Isosceles Triangle – use the dot to modify the shape and type of the triangle.

•

Hexagon – use the dot to change the internal angles between the sides.

•

Octagon – use the dot to change the internal angles between the sides.

•

Cylinder – use the dot to change the perspective.

•

Cube – use the dot to change the perspective.

•

Folded Corner – use the dot to change the size of the folded corner.

•

Cross – use the dot to change the thickness of the four arms of the cross.

•

Frame – use the dot to change the thickness of the frame.

•

Ring – use the dot to change the internal diameter of the ring.

Symbol Shapes
Refer to Figure 66 to identify the following shapes with adjustment dots.

Figure 66: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar•

Smiley Face – use the dot to change the smile on the face.

•

Heart – use the dot to change the shape of the symbol.

•

Sun – use the dot to change the shape of the symbol.

•

Moon – use the dot to change the shape of the symbol.

•

Prohibited – use the dot to change the thickness of the ring and the diagonal bar.

•

Square Bevel – use the dot to change the thickness of the bevel.

•

Octagon Bevel – use the dot to change the thickness of the bevel.

•

Diamond Bevel – use the dot to change the thickness of the bevel.

•

Double Bracket – use the dot to change the curvature of the bracket.

•

Left Bracket – use the dot to change the curvature of the bracket.

•

Right Bracket – use the dot to change the curvature of the bracket.

•

Double Brace – use the dot to change the curvature of the bracket.

58 | Draw Guide 7.2

•Left Brace – use the dots to change the curvature of the brace and the position of thepoint.

•

Right Brace – use the dots to change the curvature of the brace and the position of thepoint.

Block Arrows
Refer to Figure 67 to identify the following shapes with adjustment dots.

Figure 67: Block Arrows sub-toolbar•

Right Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Left Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Down Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Up Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Left and Right Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Up and Down Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Circular Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

4-way Arrow – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•Chevron – use the dot to change the angle between the sides and the shape.

•

Pentagon – use the dot to change the angle between the sides and the shape.

•

Striped Right Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Up, Right and Down Arrow – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of thearrow.

•

Notched Right Arrow – use the dot to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Up and Right Arrow – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the arrow.

•

Right Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the callout.

•

Left Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the callout.

•

Down Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the callout.

•

Up Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the callout.

•

Left and Right Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of thecallout.

•

Up and Down Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of thecallout.

•

4-way Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of the callout.

•

Up and Right Arrow Callout – use the dots to change the shape and thickness of thecallout.

Callouts
For all callouts (Figure 68) use the adjustment dots to change the length, position and angle ofthe pointer.

Changing object shape | 59

Figure 68: Callouts
sub-toolbar

Stars and Banners
Refer to Figure 69 to identify the following shapes with adjustment dots.

Figure 69: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar•

4-Point Star – use the dot to change the thickness and shape of the star points.

•

8-Point Star – use the dot to change the thickness and shape of the star points.

•

24-Point Star – use the dot to change the thickness and shape of the star points.

•

Vertical Scroll – use the dot to change the width and shape of the scroll.

•

Horizontal Scroll – use the dot to change the width and shape of the scroll.

•

Doorplate – use the dot to change the inward curvature of the corners.

Curves and polygons
Bézier curves
The editing of curves and polygons depends on the mathematics of Bézier curves1. Explaining
Bézier curves goes beyond this scope of this chapter. See Chapter 11, Advanced Draw
Techniques for more information on drawing and manipulating Bézier curves.
The editing a Bézier curve consists in principle of moving points or tangents passing throughthese points. Each tangent has one control point at each end and a junction point where it meetsthe curve. The relative angle and distance between the control points determine the shape of thecurve. Figure 70 shows what happens to a basic square and changing only one point on thesquare.

Converting objects to curve or polygon
When changing the shape of an object and before modifying the points on an object, it must be
converted to a curve or a polygon. Depending on what kind of shape and effect required to
produce using one of the following methods to create a curve or a polygon:

1•

After selecting an object, go to Shape > Convert on the Menu bar and select either To
Curve or To Polygon.

•

Right click on an object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon from the context
menu.

Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, who developed the technique in the 1960s and was anengineer working with the Renault car manufacturer. The technology was intended to make modelingthe surface of vehicles easier.

60 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 70: Creating different shapes by changing thetangent

Figure 71: Edit Points toolbar

Editing points
Many different shapes can be created by moving either the point itself, or one or both of theround handle points at either end of the tangent, as shown in Figure 70. Points can be added,
deleted, or points type changed using tools available on the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 71).
After converting a shape to a curve or polygon, object points are edited as follows:1)

Select the object and switch to points editing mode using one of the following methods.
– Go to Edit > Points on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Points tool on the Standard toolbar.
– Right click on the converted object and select Points from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.

Note
After switching to points editing mode, the selection handles become points. The
number of points may increase or reduce in number. This change in number
depends on the shape of the object and is normal behavior.
2) Click on an object point to change the object shape. The Edits Points toolbar opens andthe tools become active when a point is selected. Tangents also appear attached to theselected point.
3) Use the various tools on the Edit Points toolbar to add, delete, or change the point type.
4) Click on and drag the point to move the point and change the object shape.
5) If the selected object is a curve, click on and drag the round points at the end of a tangent
to make further changes to the object shape.
6) When satisfied with the shape, click outside of the object to cancel points editing modeand close the Edit Points toolbar.

Changing object shape | 61

Point types
The available tools on the Edit Points toolbar depend on the object and type of object point thathas been selected.
•

Move Points – activates a mode allowing movement of points. Click and drag theselected point to another location. The object border follows the movement on both sidesof the selected point to the next point on each side of the selected point.

•

Insert Points – activates the insert mode and allows points to be inserted. Points canalso be moved. A point is inserted onto the selected object each time the mouse button isclicked and the object changes shape to include the new point into the border of theobject. The inserted point is a smooth point.

•

Delete Points – used to delete points from the selected object. Select Delete Points andthen click on a point to delete it. To delete several points, hold down the Shift key as eachpoint is selected for deletion, then click on Delete Points.

•

Convert To Curve – converts a curve into a straight line or a straight line into a curve. If
a single point is selected, the curve before the point will be converted. If two points are
selected, the curve between both points will be converted. If more than two points are
selected and each time this icon is clicked, a different portion of the curve will be
converted. If necessary, round points are converted into corner points and corner points
are converted into round points.
If a section of the curve is a straight line, the end points of the line have a maximum of
one control point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line isconverted back to a curve.

•

Close Bézier – closes a line or a curve. A line is closed by connecting the last point withthe first point, indicated by an enlarged square.

•

Split Curve – select the point or points where the curve will be split, then click on Split
Curve.

•

Corner Point – converts the selected point or points into corner points. Corner points
have two movable control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line,
therefore, does not go straight through a corner point, but forms a corner.
To create a corner point, a smooth or a symmetrical point must be inserted first and thenconverted to a corner point by clicking on Corner Point.

•

Smooth Transition-- converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point.
Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel, and can only be moved
simultaneously. The control points may differentiate in length, allowing variation in the
degree of curvature.

•

Symmetric Transition – converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetricalpoint. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the samelength. They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same
in both directions.

•Eliminate Points – marks selected points for deletion. This happens if the point islocated on a straight line. If converting a curve or a polygon using Convert to Curve intoa straight line or alter a curve using the cursor so that a point lies on the straight line, theselected point is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place is
15° by default.

62 | Draw Guide 7.2

Tangents
Before using tangents on an object, the object must be converted to a curve. Tangents are onlyused on curves. If an object has been converted to a polygon and a tangent is added, the object
is automatically converted to a curve.

Note
The angle that a tangent relates to an object shape can be changed by clicking on
one of the tangent control points at the end of a tangent and moving it with the
cursor. As the tangent angle is changed, the shape of the object changes in
response.

Symmetric transition
Symmetric transition converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. The
tangents have the same length and are aligned in a straight line, as shown in Figure 72. The
tangents can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both
directions.

Figure 72: Symmetric transition
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Symmetric Transition in the Edit Points toolbar. The straight line on each sideof the symmetric transition point is converted to a curve.
5) Click and drag one of the tangent control handles to change the curvature and shape ofthe object. Any change to one tangent is carried over symmetrically to the other tangent.

Smooth transition
Smooth transition converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point. The tangentsare aligned in a straight line and can only be moved simultaneously. The tangents can havedifferent lengths with the curvature controlled by the longest tangent being the largest curvature,
as shown in Figure 73.

Changing object shape | 63

Figure 73: Smooth transition
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Smooth Transition on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag one of the tangent control handles to change the shape of the object. This
creates an asymmetric tangent with the largest curvature on the longest side of thetangent.

Corner point
Converts a selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control
points, which are independent from each other. It is possible to independently change the angle
on each side of a tangent using the central point of the tangent as a corner point, as shown in
Figure 74.

Figure 74: Corner point
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Corner Point on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag the end of one of the tangents to change its angle. Each tangent can be
moved independently to create spikes and troughs in an object shape.

PointsMoving points
When moving points, the object border on both sides of the point follows the movement of thepoint changing the object shape.

64 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 75: Moving points
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Move Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Place the cursor on the selected point, then click and drag the point to create a newshape. Figure 75 illustrates how a different shape can be created from a circle bydragging the left hand side point to the left.

Inserting points
A point is inserted onto the selected object each time the mouse button is clicked. Clicking inside
the border of the object, the object changes shape to include the new point into the border of theobject, as shown in Figure 76. The inserted point is a smooth point.
Points can also be moved in insert point mode. Hover the cursor over the point until it changes
shape, then click and drag the point to change the object shape.

Figure 76: Inserting points
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Click on Insert Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) Click on the object border to insert a point at the required position on the border.
5) Alternatively, click inside the object border to insert a point. The object automaticallychanges shape to include the new point into the object border.

Deleting points
Figure 77 shows what happens when three points on the left were deleted from a circle. The left
image is a the full circle and the right image is where three points have been deleted creating a
new shape.

Changing object shape | 65

Figure 77: Deleting points
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) To delete a single point, proceed as followsa) Select the point for deletion.
b) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) To delete several points at the same time, proceed as follows:a) Hold down the Shift key.
b) Select all the points for deletion.
c) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.

Eliminating points
The Eliminate Points tool on the Edit Points toolbar only functions on lines with multiple points.
These lines are created when a curve is converted to a line using the Convert to Curve tool. An
example of creating a straight line and eliminating points is shown in Figure 78.

Figure 78: Converting curve to line andeliminating points
1) Convert the curve to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the curve into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the curve with multiple points and convert to a line, see “Converting curves orlines” below.
4) Select the point or points on the line for elimination. The selected point is emphasized.
5) Select the Eliminate Points tool on the Edit Points toolbar.

66 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Accurately position the cursor over the selected point, then click and drag the selected
point. As the cursor is dragged, a dotted line forms between the neighboring points.
7) When this dotted line appears to be a straight line between the neighboring points,
release the mouse button. The selected point is eliminated and a straight line now exists
between the neighboring points.

Converting curves or lines
Curves and lines are easily converted using the Convert to Curve tool on the Edit Points toolbar.
When a curve is converted to a line, a straight line is created between selected points on a curve.
When a line is converted to a curve, a curve is created between selected points on a line. An
example of converting a curve to a line is shown in Figure 78.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the points for converting from curve to line or from line to curve.
4) Click on Convert to Curve on the Edit Points toolbar. Between the selected points, acurve is converted into a line or a line is converted into a curve.

Splitting objects
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point or points on the object where it is to be split. Keep the Shift key pressed
down when selecting more than one point.
4) Click on Split Curve on the Edit Points toolbar to split or cut the object border at the
selected point. If the object is filled, it will be emptied because the object border is nolonger closed, as shown in Figure 79.
5) Deselect the object, then drag the cut segment and move it away from the original object.

Figure 79: Splitting objects

Note
The point where the object was split is now larger than the remaining points visibleon the object.

Closing objects
1) Select an open object (Figure 80).
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.

Changing object shape | 67

3) Select a point where the object has been split. Note that the start point of an object islarger than the other points visible on the object.
4) Click on Close Bézier in the Edit Points toolbar to close the object. If the open object was
originally a closed and filled object, then the original color fills the object when it is closed.

Figure 80: Closing objects

Distorting objects
1) Select the object and switch into editing points mode to display the points on the object.
This also opens the Edit Points toolbar.
2) Select one of the points on the object and drag it to a new position to distort the object(Figure 81).

Figure 81: Distorting objects

68 | Draw Guide 7.2

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes

Formatting lines
In LibreOffice the term Line indicates a freestanding segment (line), the outer edge of a shape(border), or an arrow. In most cases, the properties of the line that can be modified are its style(solid, dashed, invisible, and so on), its width, its color and the type of arrowhead.

Tip
Hovering the cursor over a tool icon on a toolbar or in the Sidebar, a pop up displays
the name of the tool.

Note
For more information on using color when formatting lines, line styles, arrows, andarrow styles, see “Working with area fills” on page 81.

Line and Filling toolbar
Format a line using the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 82) as follows:
1) Make sure the line is selected in a drawing.
2) Select the line style required from the Line Style drop-down list.
3) Either type the line width in the Line Width text box, or use the up and down arrows tochange the line width.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of theavailable color palettes.
5) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Style and select a line style from one of theoptions in the drop-down list.
6) If necessary, select from the Arrow Style drop-down list the type of arrowhead for eachend of the line and change the line into an arrow. The left drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the beginning of the line. The right drop-down list adds an arrow head to the endof the line.
7) If necessary, click on Shadow to add a shadow to the line. The shadow applied uses thesettings set in the Line dialog (Figure 87 on page 73).
8) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.

SidebarFormat a line using the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 83) as follows:
1) Make sure the line is selected in a drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Line to open the Line panel.

Figure 82: Line and Filling toolbar
70 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 83: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar4) In Line, select from the Arrow Style drop-down lists the type of arrowhead for each endof the line and change the line into an arrow. The left drop-down list adds an arrowhead tothe beginning of the line. The right drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the end of theline.
5) In Line, select the type of line required from the Line Style drop-down list.
6) In Width, select the line width from the Width drop-down list or enter a width in the
Custom Line Width text box.
7) In Color, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of
the available color palettes.
8) In Transparency, enter a percentage for the amount of transparency for the line.
9) In Corner style, select a corner style from the drop-down list.
10) In Cap style, select a cap style from the drop-down list.
11) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.
12) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar and open the Line dialog
for more control over formatting lines.

Line dialog
To fully change the appearance of a line, use the Line dialog.
1) Make sure a line is selected on a slide.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 84) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Line panel title on the Sidebar.

Formatting lines | 71

Figure 84: Line dialog - Line page3) Use the options available in the pages of the Line dialog to format the line. The pages are
Line, Shadow, Line Styles and Arrow Styles and the options available are explained in
the following sections. The preview box at the bottom of the dialog shows the effect of thechanges on a line.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Line properties
The Line page in the Line dialog is where the basic parameters of the line are set. It is divided
into three sections as follows.
•Line properties – this section sets the following parameters:– Style – select a line style from the drop-down list.
– Color – select a predefined color from one of the available color palettes.
– Width – specifies the thickness of the line.
– Transparency – sets the transparency of a line. Figure 85 shows the effects ofdifferent percentages in transparency levels to lines when placed over an object.

Figure 85: Line transparency(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%)
72 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 86: Default arrow top; centered
arrow bottom•

Arrow Styles – this section is only applicable to individual lines and is not used for linesthat form the borders of an object.
– Start style and End style – select from the drop-down list an arrow style or arrowhead
for the start and end of a line.
– Width – specifies the thickness of the arrow endings– Center – moves the center of the arrow endings to the end point of the line. Figure 86
shows the effects of selecting this option.
– Synchronize ends – makes the two line ends identical.

•

Corner and Cap Styles – determines how the connection between two segments of aline looks. To appreciate the difference between these styles, choose a thick line styleand observe how the preview changes.
– Corner style – select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. For a small angle
between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
– Cap style – select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes
as well.

Line shadows
The Shadow page (Figure 87) of the Line dialog provides the options to add and format a
shadow to a selected line. The settings on this dialog page are the same as those for shadows
applied to other objects, described in “Working with shadows” on page 96.
To quickly apply a shadow to a line, click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. Using the
Shadow tool creates a shadow using the settings from the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

Figure 87: Line dialog - Shadow page

Formatting lines | 73

Figure 88: Line dialog - Line Styles pageLine styles
Line styles are useful in a drawing when adding several lines of similar types. This reduces theneed to format individual lines. LibreOffice provides standard line styles that can be used in a
drawing. Also, line styles can be created, saved, and deleted.
The Line Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 88) provides the options to use predefined line
styles and to create or change line styles.

Creating line styles
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Object and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on the Line Styles tab to open the Line Styles page.
4) In the Line style drop-down list, select a pre-defined line style similar to the style to becreated. An example of the line style selected is displayed at the bottom of the dialog
page. This example changes as changes are made to the line style.
5) In the Type drop-down menus, select either Dots or Dash. To use only one type for theline, select the same type in both Type boxes. To alternate the two line types within asingle line, select different types in the two Type boxes.
6) In the Number boxes, specify the number of each line type selected in Type. For different
sized groups of dots or dashes, set a different quantity in each Number box.
7) In the Length boxes, specify the Dash length as a percentage of the line. The Length
option is not available for Dots.
8) In the Spacing box, specify the spacing between the dashes and/or dots as a percentageof the line. The Spacing option is not available when the option Fit to line width isselected.
74 | Draw Guide 7.2

9) If necessary, select Fit to line width so that the new style fits the line width when that line
is created in a drawing.
10) For the current document only, create a new line style, or modify a line style as follows. To
use the new or modified line style in other drawings, the line style must be saved using
Save Line Styles. See "Saving line styles" below for more information.
a) Click on Add or Modify to open the Name dialog.
b) Enter a unique name for the new or modified line style.
c) Click on OK to save the new or modified line style and close the Name dialog.
11) Click on OK to close the Line dialog and the new line style is ready for use in the current
drawing only.

Note
When creating or modifying a line style, it is recommended to use a unique name forthe line style. This prevents one of the standard line styles in LibreOffice from being
overwritten and causing formatting problems in other drawings or documents that
use the standard line styles.

Saving line styles
Saving a line style allows for a newly created line style to be used in other LibreOffice drawings.
1) Create a new line style, described in “Creating line styles” above, but do not close theLine dialog.
2) Click on Save Line Styles at the bottom right of the Line Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for line styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the extension .sod for the line style in the Name box.
4) Click on Save to save the line style and close the file browser window. The new line style
is now available for use in new drawings and documents.

Loading line styles
Standard line styles are provided when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. However,compatible line styles can loaded and used in LibreOffice. Any line styles loaded into LibreOfficemust use the file extension .sod.
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog and click on the Line Styles tab to open the Line Styles page.
3) Click on Load Line Styles at the bottom right of the Line Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for line styles.
4) Select a style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window. The file extension
for line styles is .sod.
5) Click Open to load the line style into LibreOffice. The line style becomes available forother LibreOffice drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting line styles
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Line Styles tab to open the Line Styles page.
2) Select the line style for deletion from the Line style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog.
4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.
Formatting lines | 75

Note
When deleting line styles, make sure that the line style is not used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete line styles that have been created andnot to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined line styles. This prevents any
formatting problems in other documents where the line style has been used.

Figure 89: Line dialog - Arrow Styles page

Arrow styles
Use the Arrow Styles page (Figure 89) in the Line dialog to create new arrow styles, modify
existing arrow styles, or load previously saved arrow styles.

Creating arrow styles
Any shape can be used as an arrowhead, but the shape must be convertible to a curve. A curve
is something drawn without lifting a pencil. For example, a star can be converted to a curve, but asmiley face cannot.

Note
The part of the shape being used as the point of the arrowhead must be at the top of
the shape when creating a new arrowhead. If necessary, rotate the shape until the
point is at the top of the shape.
1) Select a shape, or create a shape that can be converted to a curve for use as a newarrowhead. The part of the shape that is going to be point of the arrowhead must face
upward. An example of a new arrowhead is shown in Figure 90.

76 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 90: Example
shape being used foran arrowhead
2) Select the shape and convert to a curve using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the shape and select Convert > To Curve from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve on the Menu bar.
3) With the shape selected, open the Arrow Styles page in the Line dialog.
4) Click on Add and type a unique name for the new arrow style in the Name dialog that
opens, then click OK.The new arrowhead style is displayed in the preview box of the Linedialog and at the bottom of the Arrow style drop-down list.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog. The new arrow style is available
only in the current document.

Note
Some shapes cannot be used as an arrowhead. This is indicated by rectangular
blocks appearing at each end of the line in the preview box on the Line Styles pagein the Line dialog.

Note
When creating an arrow style, it is recommended to use a unique name for the arrowstyle. This prevents one of the standard arrow styles in LibreOffice from being
overwritten and causing formatting problems in other drawings that use the standard
arrow styles.

Note
The new arrow style created is available only for use in the current drawing. To use
the new arrow style in other drawings, the arrow style must be saved using the Save
Arrow Styles option.

Saving arrow styles
Saving an arrow style allows for the newly created style to be used in other LibreOffice
documents.
1) Create a new arrow style as described in “Creating arrow styles” above, but do not closethe Line dialog.

Formatting lines | 77

2) Click on the Save arrow styles icon at the bottom right of the Arrow Styles page toopen a file browser window at the correct location for arrow styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the extension .soe for the arrow style.
4) Click on Save to save the arrow style and close the file browser window. The new arrowstyle is now available for use in new documents.

Loading arrow styles
LibreOffice provides standard arrow styles when installed on a computer. However, compatiblearrow styles can be loaded and used in LibreOffice. Any arrow styles loaded into LibreOffice must
use the file extension .soe.
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Arrow Styles tab to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Click on the Load arrow styles icon at the bottom right of the Arrow Styles page toopen a file browser window at the correct location for arrow styles.
3) Select an arrow style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window
4) Click Open to load the arrow style into the drawing. The arrow style also becomes
available for other LibreOffice documents.
5) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting arrow styles
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Arrow Styles tab to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Select the arrow style for deletion from the Arrow style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog that
opens.
4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Note
When deleting arrow styles, make sure that the arrow style is not used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete arrow styles that have been created andnot to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined arrow styles. This prevents any
formatting problems in other documents where the arrow style has been used.

Formatting area fills
Area fill refers to the inside of an object that has an unbroken border, for example a rectangle,
circle, star, pentagon and so on. An area fill can be none, a uniform color, gradient, hatching,bitmap or pattern, as shown in Figure 91. Also, an area fill can be made partly or whollytransparent and can throw a shadow.

Line and Filling toolbar
Tools on the Line and Filling toolbar provide a range of default fills readily available to quickly
format graphic objects. If this toolbar is not showing, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Fillingon the Menu bar. To format the area of an object:
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Click on Area Style/Filling on the Line and Filling toolbar and select the type of fillrequired from the drop-down list.
– None – select this option if an area fill for an object is not required.
– Color (Figure 92) – select a color palette from the available options in the drop-down
list, then select a color by clicking on the color.
78 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Gradient (Figure 93) – select the required gradient from the drop-down list.
– Hatching (Figure 94) – select the required hatching from the drop-down list.
– Bitmap (Figure 95) – select the required bitmap from the drop-down list.
– Pattern (Figure 96) – select the required pattern from the drop-down list.
3) Deselect the object to save the changes to the object.

Figure 91: Examples of area fill types

Figure 92: Color area fills

Figure 93: Gradient area fills

Formatting area fills | 79

Figure 94: Hatching area fills

Figure 96: Pattern area fills

Figure 95: Bitmap area fills

Figure 97: Area panel in Properties deck on
SidebarSidebarFormat the area of an object using the Sidebar (Figure 97) as follows:
1) Make sure an object with an area fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar, then click on the down arrowhead ˅ on the left of the
Area titlebar to open the Area panel.
3) Use the options in the Fill and Transparency drop-down lists to format the area of an
object.
4) Deselect the object to save the changes.

80 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 98: Area dialog - Area Color page

Area dialog
Format area fills with greater control using the Area dialog (Figure 98) as follows:
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Click on Area in the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area section title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on the Area tab to open the Area page.
4) Select the type of area fill from the available options (None, Color, Gradient, Bitmap,
Pattern, or Hatch)
5) Select the style of area fill from the options that become available for each type of area fillselected.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Working with area fills
Color fills
Selecting color fill
The following procedure to select a color for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the tools on
the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is asimilar procedure, but the available options are reduced. All color fills are solid colors.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Color to open the options available
for a color fill.
Working with area fills | 81

Figure 99: Pick A Color dialog
3) In Colors, select the required palette from the available options in the Palette drop-down
list.
4) Click on the color required. All color fills available are solid colors.
– Active preview box – shows the present color fill of a selected object. After selecting acolor, a preview of the selected color appears in the New preview box.
– Alternatively, enter the RGB or Hex values of a color in the appropriate text box.
– Alternatively, click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 99). Select a color
from the color box or enter the RGB, Hex, HSB or CMYK values for the color required.
– If a color has been used before, then select the required color from those available in
Recent Colors.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original color, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The color area fill is thenchanged in the selected object.

Creating custom colors using Area dialog
1) Select a filled object to create a color.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill.
3) Specify the values of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) on a 0 to 255 scale, or thepercentages of Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K) to create a new color.

82 | Draw Guide 7.2

4) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
5) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new custom color appears
as a fill in the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Creating custom colors using Pick a Color dialog
1) Select a filled object to create a color.
2) Open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 99) using one of the following methods:– Click on Pick on the Colors page of the Area dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color on the Line and Filling toolbar and selectCustom Color.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color in the Area section of the Properties deck on
the Sidebar and select Custom Color.
3) Create a custom color using one of the following methods. A preview of the color createdis shown in the colored box below the original color on the left side of the dialog.
– Select a color range from the colored bar, then, using the mouse, move the target in
the colored box until the cursor is on the color required.
– Enter values for Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) in the RGB text boxes.
– Enter values for Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Key (K) (black) in the CMYK
text boxes.
– Enter values for Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Brightness (B) in the HSB text boxes.
HSB values do not change the color, but how a color looks.
– If known, enter the Hex# number in the text box. For example, Hex numbers arenormally used when a specific color has been created for a company logo or company
name.

Note
Changing one set of color values also changes the color values in the other sets.
4) Click OK to close the Pick a Color dialog and save the changes.
5) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
6) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fillin the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Deleting custom colors
Only custom colors that are available in the custom palette can be deleted using the Area dialog.
Colors that are available in the color palettes provided by LibreOffice cannot be deleted.
1) Select a filled object that uses the color fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area section title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Area, then click on Colors to open the Colors page.

Working with area fills | 83

4) In Colors, select Custom from the Palette drop-down list.
5) Select the color for deletion and click on Delete. There is no confirmation given whendeleting a color.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Gradient fills
Several predefined gradients are included when LibreOffice is installed. It is recommended tocreate custom gradients that match the requirements rather than modifying the installed
predefined gradients. Predefined gradients may have been used in other objects in a drawing orother documents.
Custom gradients are saved with a unique name allowing the custom gradient to be used in otherdrawings or documents. Custom gradients are placed at the end of the gradients displayed in theGradient box on the Gradient page of the Area dialog (Figure 100).

Selecting gradient fills
The following procedure to select a gradient for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the toolson the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is asimilar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object to be filled is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.

Figure 100: Area dialog – Area Gradient page84 | Draw Guide 7.2

3) In Gradient, select the required gradient from the list of available gradients and thegradient appears in Preview.
4) To override the default gradient transition of a selection, deselect Automatic in Options
and then enter the values for Type, Increment, Center, Angle, Border, From Color and To
Color to modify the gradient to the requirements. As changes are made, the gradientdisplayed in Preview also changes to indicate how the gradient will look. For more
information on gradient options, see “Table 3: Gradient options” below.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The gradient area fill thenappears in the selected object.

Note
Selecting and modifying a gradient using the above method only allows the gradient
to be used in the drawing being created. If a modified gradient is to be used in otherdrawings or documents, then create a custom gradient and save it with a unique
name. See “Creating custom gradients” below.
Table 3: Gradient options
Gradient property

Meaning

Linear gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a straightline.

Axial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject center to the object edges in two opposite directions.

Radial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in a circularpattern.

Ellipsoid gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in an elliptical
pattern.

Quadratic gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject edges to the object center in four directions.

Square gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject edges to the object center in a square pattern.

Increment

Enter the number of steps for blending the two colors of the gradient. By
default this is set to Automatic.

Center X

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify thesevalues to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify thesevalues to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

For all gradient types, modifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further away from the borderof the shape.

From Color

The start color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of thecolor: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

To Color

The end color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of thecolor: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

Creating custom gradients
To use a modified gradient in other drawings or documents, a custom gradient has to be savedwith a unique name.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
Working with area fills | 85

2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a gradient and modify it using the options given in “Table 3: Gradient options”
above. As changes are made, the gradient displayed in Preview also changes to give an
indication of how the modified gradient will look.
4) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
5) Enter a unique name for the new gradient, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom gradient is placed at the end of the gradients displayed in Gradient and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Modifying custom gradients
Using the Modify option on the Gradient page in the Area dialog permanently changes a
gradient and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom gradients and not thepredefined gradients that were installed with LibreOffice.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a custom gradient in Gradient. Custom gradients appear below the predefined
gradients in Gradient.
4) Enter the new values for the gradient options that need to be changed. See Table 3 formore information on gradient options. Depending on the type of gradient selected, some
options may not be available.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original gradient, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom gradient. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom gradient.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming gradients
1) Select the object that uses the gradient that is going to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Right-click on the gradient and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom gradients
1) Select an object that uses a gradient fill.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) In the Gradient box, select the custom gradient for deletion.
4) Right click on the gradient and select Delete from the context menu. Click on Yes toconfirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

86 | Draw Guide 7.2

Note
It is recommended to only delete or rename custom gradients that have beencreated. Deleting or renaming one of the predefined gradients that are installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in drawings and documents that use one of thegradients.

Advanced gradient controls
LibreOffice provides advanced controls for gradients on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 101).
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar or click on theTransformations tool on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Transformations toolbar.
4) Click on Interactive gradient tool in the Transformations toolbar. This displays a dashedline connecting two colored squares (Figure 102). The colors show the From Color and To
Color that are used for the selected gradient.
5) Select the type of gradient required for the object from the options in the Type drop-downlist. Properties available for adjustment depend on the gradient type selected, as
explained below. Moving the squares has different effects depending on the type of
gradient.
– Linear – move the square corresponding to the From Color to change where thegradient starts (border value). Move the square corresponding to the To Color tochange the orientation (angle value).
– Axial – move the To Color to change both the angle and border properties of thegradient. Only the square corresponding to the To Color can be moved.
– Radial – move the From Color to modify the border property to set the width of thegradient circle. Move the To Color to change the point where the gradient ends
(Center X and Center Y values).
– Ellipsoid – move the From Color to modify the border property to set the size of thegradient ellipsoid. Move the To Color to change the angle of the ellipsoid axis and theaxis itself.

Figure 101: Transformations
toolbarFigure 102: Example of using Interactive
Gradient tool

Working with area fills | 87

– Quadratic – move the From Color to modify the border property to set the size of thegradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color
to change the center of the gradient.
– Square – move the From Color to modify the border property to set the size of thegradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color
to change the center of the gradient.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Moving the squares creates different effects depending on the type of gradient. For
example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient are always
situated either side of the center point of the object.

Bitmap fills
Several predefined bitmaps are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. The
content of the supplied bitmaps cannot be edited, but the display settings can be changed. Also,
bitmaps can be imported from other sources. A GIF is an example of a graphics image file thathas a bitmap.

Selecting bitmaps
The following procedure to select a bitmap for an area fill uses the Bitmap page of the Area
dialog (Figure 103). Using the tools on the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar is a similar procedure, but the available options are reduced.

Figure 103: Area dialog – Area Bitmap page88 | Draw Guide 7.2

1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Bitmap to
open the options available for a bitmap fill (Figure 103).
3) In Bitmap, select the required bitmap from the list of available bitmaps and it appears inPreview. Alternatively, click on Add/Import to open a file browser window, then select afile to use as a bitmap fill.
4) If necessary, change the values in Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset
to modify the bitmap to the requirements. For more information on bitmap options, see“Table 4” below.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original bitmap, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The bitmap fill then appears inthe selected object.
Table 4: Bitmap options
Bitmap option

Meaning

Style – Custom
position/size

When this option is selected, the position of the bitmap in the object
and the size of the bitmap can be specified.

Style – Tiled

When this option is selected, the bitmap is tiled to fill the area. The sizeof the bitmap used for the tiling is determined by the Size settings

Style – Stretched

When this option is selected, a bitmap is stretched to fill the object
area.

Size – Width

Sets the width of the bitmap. For example, 100% means that thebitmap is resized to occupy the whole fill area width, 50% means thatthe width of the bitmap is half that of the fill area.

Size – Height

Sets the height of the bitmap. For example, 100% means that thebitmap is resized to occupy the whole fill area height, 50% means thatthe height of the bitmap is half that of the fill area.

Size – Scale

When selected, bitmap size is given as a percentage for Width andHeight. When deselected, the actual size of the bitmap is given for
Width and Height.

Position

Specifies the anchoring point of the bitmap.

Tiling Position – X-Offset

Sets the offset for the width of the bitmap in percentage values. 50%
offset means that Draw will place the middle part of the bitmap width at
the anchor point and start tiling from there.

Tiling Position – Y-Offset

Sets the offset for the height of the bitmap in percentage values. 50%
offset means that Draw will place the middle part of the bitmap heightat the anchor point and start tiling from there.

Tiling Offset

Offsets the columns of tiled bitmaps by the percentage entered in thebox so that two subsequent columns of bitmaps are not aligned.

Editing bitmaps
1) Select an object for editing that contains a bitmap as a fill, or insert a bitmap into aselected object
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Bitmap to
open the options available for a bitmap fill.
3) Select a bitmap from the options available in Bitmap to use and edit as a fill. Note that
any imported bitmaps are also available. The selected bitmap appears in Preview. Notethat any imported bitmaps are also available.
Working with area fills | 89

Figure 104: Examples of bitmap fills
4) Change the values for Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset to therequirements. For more information on bitmap options, see “Table 4” above. Examples ofbitmap fills and the properties used are shown in Figure 104.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original bitmap, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Supplied bitmaps cannot be edited, but the display settings for placement and tilingcan be changed.

Importing bitmaps
1) Select an object to import a bitmap into the object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Bitmap to
open the options available for a bitmap fill.
3) Click on Add/Import and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the directory containing the bitmap file, then select the file and click Open.
5) Enter a unique name for the new bitmap in the Name dialog that opens, then click OK toclose the Name dialog. The imported bitmap appears at the bottom of the bitmaps
displayed in Bitmap.
6) Select the imported bitmap in Bitmap.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The imported bitmap fill appears
in the selected object.

Renaming bitmaps
1) Select an object that uses a bitmap.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Bitmap to
open the options available for a bitmap fill.
3) Right-click on the bitmap selected for renaming and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a new name for the bitmap in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the change and close the Name dialog.
90 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete bitmaps that have been created orimported. Renaming or deleting bitmaps that are installed with LibreOffice may cause
problems in documents that use one of these bitmaps.

Deleting bitmaps
1) Make sure the object containing a bitmap fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Bitmap.
3) Right click on the bitmap being deleted and select Delete from the context menu. Click on
Yes to confirm the deletion.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Pattern fills
Several predefined pattern fills are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. Custom
patterns can also be created and modified in LibreOffice.

Selecting pattern fills
The following procedure to select a pattern for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the toolson the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is asimilar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill (Figure 105).
3) In Pattern, select the required pattern and the selected pattern appears in Preview.
4) If necessary, change the foreground and background colors, or the pattern itself, as
described in “Creating custom patterns” below. As changes are made, the patterndisplayed in Preview also changes to indicate how the pattern will look. Any changes willaffect only the object being filled.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The pattern fill then appears inthe selected object.

Creating custom patterns
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page.
3) Select the required pattern in Pattern to use as a starting point and the selected pattern
appears in Preview.
4) In Options, select a color from the available color palettes for the Foreground Color andBackground Color. The pattern remains the same, but the colors change.
5) In Pattern Editor, click on individual squares to change the color from Foreground Color to
Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color to create a newpattern.
6) In Preview, check the pattern being created to see if the desired effect is being achieved.
7) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.

Working with area fills | 91

Figure 105: Area dialog – Area Pattern page8) Enter a unique name for the new pattern, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom pattern is placed at the end of the patterns displayed in Pattern and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
9) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
10) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
To use a modified pattern in other drawings or documents, the custom pattern has tobe saved with a unique name.

Modifying custom patterns
Using the Modify option on the Pattern page in the Area dialog permanently changes a patternand cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom patterns and not the predefinedpatterns that were installed with LibreOffice.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern.
3) Select a custom pattern from the patterns displayed in Pattern and the selected pattern
appears in Preview. Custom patterns are located below the predefined patterns in the
Pattern.

92 | Draw Guide 7.2

4) In Pattern Editor, click on each square to change the color from Foreground Color to
Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color to modify the selected
pattern.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom pattern. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom pattern.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for renaming in Preview and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name for the pattern in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for deletion in the Preview box and select Delete from thecontext menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, delete or rename custom patterns that have beencreated. Deleting or renaming one of the predefined patterns that are installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in drawings and documents that use one of thegradients.

Hatching fills
Hatchings fills are similar to pattern fills, but use lines instead of squares. Several predefined
hatching fills are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. Custom hatching fills canalso be created and modified.

Selecting hatching fills
The following procedure to select a hatching for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the toolson the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is asimilar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.

Working with area fills | 93

Figure 106: Area dialog – Area Hatch page2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill (Figure 106).
3) Select a hatch from the options shown in Hatch and the selected hatch appears in thePreview.
4) If necessary, change the colors or other options, as described in “Creating custom
hatching” below. As changes are made, the hatching displayed in Preview also changes.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original hatching, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The hatching fill then appears inthe selected object.

Creating custom hatching1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Select the required hatching in Hatch as a starting point and the selected hatchingappears in Preview.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to edit
the hatching to the requirements. For more information on hatching options, see “Table 5”
below.
5) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.

94 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Enter a unique name for the new hatching, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom hatching is placed at the end of the hatchings displayed in Hatch and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new hatch fill appears in theselected object.
Table 5: Hatching options
Hatching option

Meaning

Spacing

Determines the spacing between two lines of the hatching fill. As the value
is changed, the preview window is updated.

Angle

Use the mini map below the numerical value to quickly set the angle
formed by the line to multiples of 45 degrees. If the required angle is not a
multiple of 45 degrees, enter the desired value in the edit box.

Line typeSet single, double, or triple line for the style of the hatching.

Line color

Use the list to select the color of the lines that will form the hatching.

Background color

When selected, adds a color fill behind the lines used for the hatching.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete hatch fills that have beencreated. Modifying, renaming or deleting hatch fills that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these hatch fills.

Modifying custom hatchings
Using the Modify option on the Hatch page in the Area dialog permanently changes a hatching
and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom hatchings and not thepredefined hatchings that were installed with LibreOffice.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Select a custom hatching in Hatch and the selected hatching appears in Preview.
Custom hatchings are located below the predefined hatchings in Hatch.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to edit
the hatching. For more information on hatching options, see “Table 5” above.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original hatching, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom hatching. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom hatching.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming hatch fills
1) Select the object that contains the hatch fill that is to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Right-click on the hatch fill displayed in Hatch and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name for the hatch fill in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name dialog.
Working with area fills | 95

6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom hatching1) Select an object that uses the hatching fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Hatch.
3) In the Hatch box, select the custom hatching for deletion.
4) Right-click on the hatching and select Delete from the context menu. Click on Yes toconfirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Working with shadows
Shadows can be applied to objects such as lines, shapes and text. The options available forshadows are as follows:•

Position – select one of nine points determining the direction in which the shadow is
cast.

•

Distance or Angle – determines the offset distance between the object and the shadow.

•

Color – sets the color used for the shadow.

•

Blur – sets how much the edges of a shadow are blurred or softened.

•

Transparency – determines the amount of transparency for the shadow: 0% opaqueshadow, 100% transparent shadow.

Default shadows
To quickly apply a shadow to an object, select the object and click on Shadow in the Line andFilling toolbar. The shadow applied to an object using this method is set to the default settings in
LibreOffice.

Note
For more control when applying shadows, use the Shadow page in Area or Linedialogs. The following information describes the use of the Shadow page in the Area
dialog (Figure 107), but can also be applied to the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

Figure 107: Area dialog - Shadow page
96 | Draw Guide 7.2

Formatting shadows
For a more control when adding shadows to an object, use the Shadow page on the Area dialog
as follows:
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Shadow to open the Shadow page.
3) Select Use shadow in Properties and the shadow options become active.
4) Select from one of nine points the direction in which the shadow is going to be cast in
relation to the object.
5) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and thenselect the color required for the shadow.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
8) In Transparency, enter a percentage for the shadow transparency.
9) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Sidebar shadow formatting1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow panel (Figure 108) in the Properties deck.
4) Select Enable and the shadow options become active.
5) In Angle, select from one of the options available from the drop-down list to set thedirection of where the shadow is going to be cast in relation to the object.

Figure 108: Shadow panel in Properties on
sidebarWorking with shadows | 97

6) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and thenselect the color required for the shadow.
7) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
8) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
9) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadowtransparency.
10) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

Working with transparencies
Transparencies can be applied to objects and to any shadow that has been applied to an object.
In Draw two types of transparencies can be applied to an object – uniform transparency andgradient transparency. For more information on gradient transparencies, including an example ofcombining a color gradient with a gradient transparency, see “Gradient fills” on page 84.
Transparencies can be applied to area fills as well as shadows and lines.
•

To use transparencies on lines, refer to “Formatting lines” on page 70 for more
information.

•

To use transparencies on shadows, refer to “Working with shadows” on page 96 for more
information.

The following procedure applies a transparency to an object area fill using the Area dialog(Figure 109):
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog, then click on Transparency to the open the Transparency page
and access the available options.
3) To create a uniform transparency, select Transparency and enter a percentage in the text
box.

Figure 109: Area dialog - Transparency page

98 | Draw Guide 7.2

4) To create a gradient transparency so that the area becomes gradually transparent, selectGradient and select the type of gradient transparency from the drop-down list: Linear,
Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square. See “Table 3” on page 85 for more
information on gradient types.
5) Set the parameters for the type of the gradient transparency selected above. Refer to“Table 6” below for a description of the properties. The parameters available depends on
the type of gradient transparency selected above.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.
Table 6: Transparency parameters
Transparency parameters

Meaning

Centre X

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The values to
set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The values to
set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

For Linear, Axial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients.
Specifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further away from theborder of the object.

Start value

Value for the starting transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
100% means fully transparent.

End value

Value for the ending transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
100% means fully transparent.

Drawing styles
Suppose that the same area fill, line thickness, and border is to be applied to a set of objects.
This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the use of styles. Styles allow a format to be
defined and then applied to multiple objects. For more information on styles, see the Writer
Guide.

Note
The drawing styles included with LibreOffice Draw cannot be deleted or renamed.
However, all drawing styles can be modified to the drawing requirements. Also,
drawing styles can be hidden when not required, except for any drawing styles thathave been used in a drawing.

Style categories•

All Styles – displays all the drawing styles available for use in Draw.

•

Applied Styles – displays the drawing styles that have been used in the selecteddrawing.

•

Hierarchical Styles – displays the drawing styles in a hierarchical list (also known as alinked or parent/child styles). To view the styles in a sub-level, click on the triangle ► next
to the style name to list the styles available in the sub-level, as shown in Figure 110.

•

Custom Styles – displays all the user created drawing styles that are available for use in
Draw.

•

Hidden Styles – displays all the drawing styles that a user has hidden when not required
for use in Draw.

Drawing styles | 99

Figure 110: Styles deck on Sidebar

Note
Hierarchical styles are used with multiple objects differ, for example, in color, but areotherwise identically formatted. Create a parent style for the objects including
borders, area fill, font, and so on. Then create a hierarchical or child styles, which
differ only in the fill color attribute. If the font size or the thickness of a border needs
to be changed, it is sufficient to change the parent style and all the child styles arechanged accordingly.

Tip
At the bottom of the Styles deck on the Sidebar there is a drop-down list allowing
selection of the style category. The style categories available are Hierarchical, All
Styles, Hidden Styles, Applied Styles, and Custom Styles.

Note
When an object is placed into a drawing, the Default Drawing Style is automaticallyapplied.

100 | Draw Guide 7.2

Selecting styles
Styles can only be selected and applied to objects using the Styles deck on the Sidebar(Figure 110).
1) Select the object for style application.
2) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, then click on Styles at the right side of the
Sidebar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Go to View > Styles on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11.
3) Select a style category from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck.
4) In the Styles deck, double-click on the style required for the selected object.
5) If necessary, create a new (custom) style or modify the selected style to the requirements,
as described below.

Note
It is recommended to create new (custom) styles rather than modify the drawing
styles installed with LibreOffice. Modifying drawing styles installed with LibreOffice
may cause problems if the style has been used in other drawings.

Creating new or custom styles
After creating a new or custom style, it is placed in All Styles and Custom Styles categories in
the Styles deck of the Sidebar. When the custom style is applied to an object, the custom stylealso appears in Applied Styles.

Using Styles deck1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
2) Right click on the style required as a starting point to create a custom style and selectNew from the context menu to open the Graphic Styles dialog (Figure 111).
3) Click on the Organizer tab to open the Organizer page in the Graphic Styles dialog.
4) In the Name text box, enter a unique style name.
5) In Inherit from text box, select None from the drop-down list if the new drawing style is
NOT going to be linked. When the object was created, it was allocated the Default
Drawing Style and this new drawing style linked by default to the Default Drawing Style.
6) If the new style is to inherit settings from an existing style, select a style from the Inherit
from: drop-down list.
7) Use the options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to format andcategorize a new style.
– Organizer – contains a summary of the style and its hierarchical position.
– Font, Font Effects, Indents & Spacing, Alignment, and Tabs – sets the attributes of
the text inserted into a text box or graphic object.
– Dimensioning – sets the style of dimension lines when used on an object.
– Text, Text Animation, Connector, Line, Area, Shadowing, Highlighting andTransparency – sets the attributes for the object format..
8) Click OK when finished to save the new style and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Drawing styles | 101

Figure 111: Graphic Styles dialog - Organizer page

Figure 112: New style from Selection dialog

Note
Any new drawing style created is automatically placed in the Custom Styles
category.

Using New Style from Selection
Using New Style from Selection allows all formatting to be made to an object first and thencreate a drawing style from that object.
1) Select an object to create a new style from, or create a new object in a drawing.

102 | Draw Guide 7.2

2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area dialog,
Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.
3) Create the new style using one of the following methods:– Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on New Style from Selection at the
top right of the deck.
– Go to Format > Styles > New Style from Selection on the Menu bar.
4) In the New Style from Selection dialog (Figure 112), type a unique name for the newstyle. This dialog also shows existing custom styles.
5) Click OK to save the new style and close the New Style from Selection dialog.

Modifying styles
It is recommended to only modify custom styles that have been created. Modifying styles that are
installed with LibreOffice may cause problems in other documents that use one of these styles.
1) Select an object in a drawing.
2) Click on Styles on the left of the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
3) Open the Graphic Styles dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Edit Style from the context menu.
– Right-click on the style that is highlighted in the Styles deck on the Sidebar and selectModify from the context menu.
4) Use the options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to modify the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Editing hierarchical or parent styles
If an object in a drawing uses a style that is linked to a hierarchical or parent style, then it ispossible to edit the hierarchical or parent style.
1) Select an object in a drawing that uses a linked style.
2) Open the Graphic Styles dialog and click on Organizer to open the Organizer page in
the Graphic Styles dialog.
3) Check that the style name in the Inherit from text box is the hierarchical or parent style forediting, then use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to edit thestyle.
4) If the hierarchical or parent style is NOT the one required:a) Click on Edit Style to the right of the Inherit from text box until the name of the style
is displayed.
b) Use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to edit the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Note
It is recommended to create custom hierarchical styles rather than modify theexisting hierarchical styles available in LibreOffice. Modifying hierarchical styles
installed with LibreOffice may cause problems if the style has been used in otherdrawings.

Drawing styles | 103

Updating styles
Using Update Style allows all the formatting to an object to be made first and then update thedrawing style used by the object.
1) Select the object to modify the drawing style the object uses.
2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area dialog,
Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.
3) Update the drawing style using one of the following methods. There is no confirmation
when updating a drawing style.
– Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Update Style at the top right.
– Go to Format > Styles > Update Selected Style on the Menu bar

Note
Make sure to only update custom styles that have been created. Updating styles thatare part of the default installation of LibreOffice could cause problems in otherdocuments that use LibreOffice drawing styles.

Applying styles
Drawing styles are applied to an object using the Styles deck on the Sidebar as follows:
1) Select the object to apply a drawing style.
2) Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar, or click on Styles on the Sidebar.
3) Double click on the style name to apply the drawing style to the selected object.

Deleting styles
Predefined styles in LibreOffice cannot be deleted, even if they are not being used. Only custom
styles can be deleted. However, before deleting a custom style, it is recommended to make surethe drawing style is not in use by checking the list of drawing styles in the Applied Styles
category.
1) To open a list of styles, use one of the following methods:– Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar.
2) Select Applied Styles from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.
3) Right click on the style name in the styles list and select Delete from the context menu.
4) If the style is used on an object, a warning message will appear stating that the selected
object will revert back to the default drawing style. Select Yes to confirm deletion of thestyle.
5) If the style is not in use, select Yes to confirm deletion of the style and there is no
confirmation message.

Special effects
As well as the basic actions of moving and resizing an object, a number of special effects canalso be applied to objects in Draw. Several of these effects are readily available in theTransformations toolbar. If the Transformations toolbar (Figure 101 on page 87) is not showing,
select it from View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar.

104 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 113: Manually rotating objects
The tools on the Transformations toolbar are described in the following sections with the
exception of the In 3-D Rotation Object tool, which is described in Chapter 7, Working with 3D
Objects.

Rotating objects
Manual rotation
1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to switch the selected object into rotation mode,. The
selection handles change shape and color when in rotation mode (Figure 113).
– Click again on the selected object.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling andselect Rotate from the context menu.
– If the Transformations toolbar is displayed, click on Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over one of the corner handles and the cursor changes shape.
4) Click and drag the object in the rotation direction. Only the corner selection handles areactive for rotation.
5) To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, press and hold the Shift key
while rotating the object. This is very handy for rotating objects through 90 deg, forexample from portrait to landscape.
6) When satisfied with the rotation, release the mouse button.
7) By default, the rotation pivot point is a small circle in the center of the selected object. Tochange the center of object rotation, click and drag the rotation pivot point to a newposition. This position for the rotation pivot point can be outside of the selected object.

Sidebar rotation
1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 114).
3) Rotate the object using one of the following options:– Click on and drag the Rotation Angle indicator in Rotation.
– Enter a rotation angle in the Select the angle for rotation text box.
4) When satisfied, click outside the object to deselect the object and deselect rotation mode.

Special effects | 105

Figure 114: Position and Size panel in
Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 115: Position and Size dialog - Rotation page106 | Draw Guide 7.2

Position and Size dialog
1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 115) using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Select Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.
3) Click Rotation to open the Rotation page.
4) If required, in Pivot Point enter a value for Position X and Position Y to move the positionof the pivot point. The default position of the pivot point is the center of the object.
Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
5) In Rotation Angle, rotate the object using one of the following methods:– In the Angle text box, enter the degrees of rotation required.
– Click on and drag the rotation indicator in Default settings.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Position and Size dialog.

Flipping objects
Quick flipping
1) Select the object for flipping so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to flip the object vertically or horizontally:– Right click on the object and select Flip > Horizontally or Flip > Vertically from thecontext menu.
– In the Position and Size section of the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on Flip
Vertically or Flip Horizontally.
– In the Line and Filling toolbar, click on Vertically or Horizontally.
– Go to Shape > Flip > Vertically or Horizontally on the Menu bar.

Flip tool
Using the Flip tool on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 101 on page 87), the position andangle that the object flips over can be changed, as shown in Figure 116.
1) Select the object for flipping so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Click on Flip on the Transformations toolbar and the symmetry axis appears as a dashedline through the middle of the object. The object will be flipped about this symmetry axis.

Figure 116: Example of using Flip toolSpecial effects | 107

3) Click and drag one or both ends of the symmetry axis to set the orientation of the axis.
4) Place the cursor over one of the object selection handles until it changes shape.
5) Click and drag the object across to the other side of the symmetry axis until the object
appears flipped over. The angle and position of the flip depends on the angle and positionof the symmetry axis.
6) Release the mouse button and the object is flipped.

Note
Pressing and holding the Shift key while moving the symmetry axis allows rotation in
45 degree increments.

Mirror copies
At the moment there is no mirror command existing in Draw. However, mirroring an object can beemulated by copying and flipping the object as follows:
1) Select the object to make a mirror copy of and copy the object to the clipboard.
2) Flip the object using the procedures in “Flipping objects” above.
3) Click in an empty area on the drawing to deselect the object.
4) Paste the copy of the original object back into its original location, creating a mirror copy.
5) If necessary, select both objects and align them using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Align on the Menu bar and use one of the alignment options.
– Right-click the selected objects and select Align from the context menu, then selectone of the alignment options.

Distorting images
Three tools on the Transformations toolbar allow an object to be distorted.
•

Distort – distorts an object in perspective.

•

Set to circle (slant) and Set in Circle (perspective) – both create a pseudo 3D effect.

Before distorting an object, the object must be converted to a circle. Clicking on and dragging
one of the object handles produces the desired effect. Examples of distortion are shown in thefollowing figures.

Note
Transforming an object into a curve is a safe operation, but cannot be reversed otherthan by clicking Format > Undo on the Menu bar.

Set in circle (perspective)
An example of distorting an object with the Set in Circle (perspective) tool is shown in
Figure 117.
1) Select an object and click on the Set in Circle (perspective) in the Transformations
toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

108 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 117: Example of using Set in Circle (perspective)
distortion

Figure 118: Example of using Set to Circle (slant)
distortion

Set to circle (slant)
An example of distorting an object with the Set to circle (slant) tool is shown in Figure 118.
1) Select an object and click on the Set to circle (slant) in the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

DistortExamples of distorting an object with the Distort tool are shown in Figure 119.
1) Select an object and click on Distort on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag a corner selection handle to distort the object using the opposite corner
selection handle as an anchor point for the distortion.
4) Click and drag the vertical selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
vertical side as an anchor point for the distortion.
5) Click and drag the horizontal selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
horizontal side as an anchor point for the distortion.

Figure 119: Examples of object distortion
Special effects | 109

Figure 120: Example of dynamic gradient

Dynamic gradients
Transparency gradients are controlled in the same manner as color gradients and both types ofgradient can be used together. With a transparency gradient, the direction and degree of object
fill color changes from opaque to transparent. In a color gradient, the fill changes from one color
to another, but the degree of transparency remains the same.
Two icons on the Transformations toolbar dynamically control transparency and color gradients.
Even if an object with a color fill is not assigned transparency, the transparency can be controlled
by clicking on Interactive transparency tool. This defines a transparency gradient and a dashedline connecting two squares appears on the object. Move the two squares to modify the gradient.
Define the direction of the gradient (vertical, horizontal, or at any angle) and the spot at which thetransparency begins.
A regular color gradient is defined in the same manner. Select an object, then select a gradientarea fill (see “Gradient fills” on page 84 for more information). The Interactive gradient tool is
now active on the Transformations toolbar. When clicking on Interactive gradient tool, a dashedline connecting two squares appears on the object, just as it does for a transparency gradient.
In both transparency gradient and gradient fill, click outside the object to set the gradient.
In the example shown in Figure 120 there is a single color object and a transparency gradient,
covering part of the underlying object. This gradient transparency can be dynamically adjusted.
Direction of transparency is changed by moving the white square and the distance over which itis applied by moving the green square.

Note
Moving the squares has different effects, depending on the type of gradient. For
example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient will always
be situated to either side of the center point of the object.

110 | Draw Guide 7.2

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 5,
Combining Multiple Objects

Grouping objects
Grouping of objects is similar to putting objects into a container. Objects within a group are
moved together as one object and any changes made are applied globally to the objects within
the group. A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be
manipulated separately.

Temporary grouping
A temporary grouping is when several objects are selected. Any changes to object parameters
are applied to all of the objects within the temporary group. For example, a temporary group of
objects can be rotated in its entirety.
A temporary group is created using one of the following methods:•

Click and drag the cursor over several objects surrounding the objects with a selection
rectangle (this selection rectangle is also known as a marquee). Release the mousebutton when all the objects required for a temporary group are selected.

•

Click the first object, then hold down the Shift key and click on the remaining objects forthe temporary group.

To cancel a temporary group of objects, simply click outside of the selection handles displayedaround the objects.

Grouping
When objects are grouped, any editing operations carried out on the group are applied to all
objects within the group. Click on one object in a group, and the whole group is selected.
The objects within a group retain their own individual properties and can be edited independently.
See “Editing individual group objects” on page 113 for more information.
1) Select the objects for a group using one of the following methods. Selection handles
appear around all the objects selected for the group (Figure 121).
– Click on each object in turn while holding down the Shift key.
– Make sure Select on the Drawing toolbar is selected and draw a selection rectangle
around the objects required for the group using the cursor.
– To select all the objects in a drawing, go to Edit > Select All on the Menu bar or use
the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A.
2) Create the group of selected objects using one of the following methods:– Right-click on an object within the selected group and select Group from the context
menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+G.

Ungrouping
1) Select the group of objects and selection handles appear around the objects within thegroup (Figure 121).
2) Ungroup the group of objects using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the selected group and select Ungroup from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Ungroup on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G.

112 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 121: Example of grouping objects

Figure 122: Example of editing objects within agroup

Editing individual group objects
An object within a group can be edited individually without ungrouping the objects.
1) Select a group, then enter the group using one of the following methods. After entering agroup, objects outside the group cannot be selected for editing.
– Right-click on the group and select Enter Group from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Enter Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F3.
– Double-click on the selected group.
2) Once inside the group, click on any object to select and individually edit it (Figure 122).
3) After making changes to an individual object, exit the group using one of the following
methods:– Right-click on the group and select Exit Group from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Exit Group on the Menu bar– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+F3.
– Double-click outside the group.
Grouping objects | 113

Nesting groups
A group of groups can be created and this is commonly known as nesting groups. When nested
groups are created, Draw retains the individual group hierarchy and remembers the order inwhich groups were selected. That is, the last individual group selected will be on top of all theother groups within a nested group. Ungrouping and entering a nested group works in exactly thesame way as for individual groups.

Tip
If group and ungroup commands are regularly used, or any other command, tools
can be added to a toolbar so that they are readily available. See the Getting Started
Guide for more information on customizing the user interface.

Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting
Combining objects
Combining objects is a permanent merging of objects creating a new object. The original objects
are no longer available as individual objects and cannot be edited as individual objects.
1) Select several objects for combining.
2) Combine the selected objects into a single object using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the selection and select Shapes > Combine from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Combine on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+Shift+K.
At first glance, the results can seem rather surprising, but the following explains how combining
objects works.
•

The attributes (for example, area fill) of the resulting object are those of the object
furthest back. In Figure 123, it is the ellipse and Figure 124 it is the yellow rectangle.

•

Where the objects overlap, the overlapping zone is either filled or empty depending onwhether the overlap is even numbered or odd numbered. Figure 124 shows that where
the overlap number is even, an empty space is created and where the overlap number isodd, a filled area is created.

Figure 123: Combining objects

114 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 124: Example of area fill when combining overlapping objects

Figure 125: Example of splitting a combined object

Splitting combined objects
An object which has been combined from several objects can be split into individual objects.
However, the original objects retain the formatting of the combined object and do not revert backto their original formatting.
Select the combined object and use one of the following methods to split the combined object:•

Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.

•

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K.

In Figure 125, the left graphic is the original example of overlapping area fills before combining.
The right graphic is the result of splitting the combined object. The individual overlapping objects
have taken the formatting of the object (Rectangle 1) at the back of the overlapping objects.

Breaking objects
An object that consists of more than one part can be broken into its individual parts as follows.
For example, a star is broken into separate lines and the area fill is lost, as shown by the center
graphic in Figure 126.
1) Select an object that consists of more than one part.
2) Convert the object to a curve or polygon using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on thecontext menu.

Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting | 115

Figure 126: Example of breaking objects
3) Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar and the object is broken into individual parts.
4) Move, format or delete the individual parts as necessary, as shown by the right object inFigure 126.

Connecting lines
The individual parts of an object or more than one line can be connected together as follows:
1) Select all the objects that are going to be connected.
2) Go to Shape > Connect on the Menu bar. Individual lines or lines in a border are
converted to curves and the end points of each line connected.

Note
The shape created when connecting individual parts or lines is not a closed shape.
The new shape has to be closed using “Closing objects” to create an area fill.

Closing objects
Closing objects creates an object that can use an area fill.
1) Select an object that has a gap in its border.
2) Right-click on the selected object and select Close Object from the context menu toclose the gap.
3) Format the area fill created to requirements. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes
for more information on working with area fills.

Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects
After selecting more than one object, the merge, subtract, and intersect functions become
available. This allows creation of a new object with a new shape.

Merge
When merging objects, a new object is created with a shape that follows the shape of the merged
objects. The area fill of the merged object is determined by the area fill of the object that is at therear of all the other objects, as shown in Figure 127.
After selecting several objects, use one of the following methods to merge the objects:•

Go to Shape > Merge on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Merge from the context menu.

116 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 127: Merging objects

Subtract
When subtracting objects, the objects at the front are subtracted from the object behind. This
leaves a blank space that the subtracted objects occupied creating a new shape, as shown in
Figure 128. After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use one of the following
methods to subtract objects:•

Go to Shape > Subtract on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Subtract from the context menu.

Figure 128: Subtracting objects

Intersect
When intersecting objects, the front objects and the exposed area of the object at the rear are
removed. This creates a new object from the area of the object at the rear that was covered by
the objects at the front, as shown in Figure 129.
After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use one of the following methods tointersect objects:•

Go to Shape > Intersect on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Intersect from the context
menu.

Figure 129: Intersecting objects

Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects | 117

Practical example
The following example shows how to use the merge, subtract, and intersect functions to create aknife with a wooden handle.
Draw an ellipse and then a rectangle
overlapping half of its width.

Select both shapes, right-click, and selectShapes > Subtract from the context menu.

Draw another rectangle and put it over the top
half of the ellipse.

Select both shapes, right-click, and selectShapes > Subtract from the context menu.
Draw a small ellipse covering just the lower
right corner.
Select both shapes, right-click, and selectShapes > Subtract from the context menu.
The knife blade shape is now complete.
To make the handle, draw a rectangle and an
ellipse.
Merge the shapes together.
Position the handle on the blade. Select thehandle and blade, then group together tocreate a drawing of the knife.

Duplication and cross-fading
Duplication
Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes (such as color or rotation)
to the duplicates.
1) Select an object or group of objects, then use one of the following methods to open the
Duplicate dialog (Figure 130):– Go to Edit > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Go to Shape > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+F3.
2) Select the number of copies, placement, enlargement, and the start and end colors for
duplicate copies.

118 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 130: Duplicate dialog

Figure 131: Duplication example
3) Click OK and duplicate copies are created. An example of a duplication is shown in
Figure 131. Each duplicate object is a separate object.
4) To group the duplicate objects into one group, see “Grouping objects” on page 112.
5) To combine the duplicate objects into one object, see “Combining, splitting, breaking, andconnecting” on page 114.

Duplication and cross-fading | 119

The following options are available when using the Duplicate dialog:•

Number of copies – enter the number of copies required.

•Placement – sets the position and rotation of duplicated objects in relation to the original
object.
– X axis-- enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object andthe duplicate objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right andnegative values shift the duplicate object to the left.
– Y axis – enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the
duplicate objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values
shift the duplicate object up.
– Angle – enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) required for rotating the duplicate object.
Positive values rotate the duplicate objects in a clockwise direction and negativevalues in a counterclockwise direction.

•

Enlargement – sets the size of the duplicate objects.
– Width – enter the amount to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate objects.
– Height – enter the amount to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate objects.

•

Colors – sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate objects. For more than
one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient.
– Start – select a color for the selected object.
– End – select a color for the duplicate object. If making more than one copy, this color
is applied to the last copy.

Cross-fading
Cross-fading transforms one object shape into another object shape. The result is a new group ofindividual objects that includes the start and end objects. The intermediate steps show thetransformation from one object shape to another object shape. The cross-fading is carried out
from the first object selected to the second object selected.
1) Select two objects and go to Shape > Cross-fading on the Menu bar to open the
Cross-fading dialog (Figure 132).
2) Select the number of Increments for the transformation.
3) If necessary, select Cross-fade attributes and Same orientation.
4) Click OK to cross-fade the selected objects and close the Cross-fading dialog. An
example of cross-fading is shown in Figure 133 with Same orientation deselected. The
object created is a group of objects.

Figure 132: Cross-fading dialog

120 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 133: Cross-fading example
5) To ungroup this group of objects and use the individual objects, see “Ungrouping” onpage 112.
The following options are available in the Cross-fading dialog:•

Increments – enter the number of steps to be created between the selected objects.

•

Cross-fade attributes – applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected
objects. For example, if the selected objects are filled with different colors, a colortransition between the two colors is applied.

•Same orientation – applies a smooth transition between the selected objects.

Positioning objects
Arranging objects
When combining, merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects, the end result varies dependingon which object is at the front and which object is at the back. Each new object placed on a
drawing automatically becomes the front object and all the other objects move backwards inpositioning order. Arranging objects changes the order in of a group of objects.
To change the arrangement position of an object, select one or more objects and then use one of
the following methods•

Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Arrange from the context menu and oneof the available options.

•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Arrange on the Standard toolbar to open the
Position toolbar (Figure 134) and select one of the available tools.

•

Click one of the arrangement tools on the Line and Filling toolbar.

•

Click on Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar and select an arrangement option.

•

Use the Arrange tools in Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

•

Use a keyboard shortcut given below.

Figure 134: Position toolbar

Positioning objects | 121

The arrangement options available are as follows:•

Bring to Front (Shift+Ctrl++) – brings the selected object to the front of a group of
objects.

•

Bring Forward (Ctrl++) – brings the selected object forward one step.

•

Send Backward (Ctrl+–) – sends the selected object one step backward.

•

Send to Back (Shift+Ctrl+–) – sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects.

•

In Front of Object – moves the selected object in front of another selected object.

•

Behind Object – moves the selected object behind another selected object.

•

Reverse – reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one
object is selected.

Note
The positioning tools can be turned into a floating toolbar by clicking at the top of the
pop-up on the Standard toolbar and dragging it to a new position on a drawing, asshown in Figure 134.

Aligning objects
To make a drawing look more professional, objects can be aligned with each other. Select one ormore objects and use one of the following methods to align objects:•

Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Align Objects from the context menu
and one of the available options.

•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Align on the Standard or Line and Filling toolbars toopen a pop-up toolbar (Figure 135).

•

Go to Shape > Align on the Menu bar and select the alignment required.

•

Use the Align tools in the Position and Size section in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.

Figure 135: Align Objects
toolbar
The alignment tools available are as follows:•

Left – aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the leftedge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.

•Centered – horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, thecenter of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.

•

Right – aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, theright edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.

•

Top – vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object isselected, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.

•Center – vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the centerof the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.

•

Bottom – vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object isselected, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.

122 | Draw Guide 7.2

Note
The alignment tools can be turned into a floating toolbar by clicking at the top of the
pop-up toolbar and dragging it to a new position on a drawing workspace, as shownin Figure 135.

Distributing objects
Distributing objects allows three or more objects to be evenly spaced along a horizontal axis orvertical axis. Objects are distributed using the outermost selected objects as base points for
spacing.
Select at least three objects, then use one of the following methods to distribute the objects:•

Right-click on the selected objects, then select Distribute Selection from the context
menu and one of the available options.

•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Distribute Selection on the Standard toolbar toopen a pop-up toolbar (Figure 136).

•

Go to Shape > Distribute Selection on the Menu bar and select a distribution option.

•

Right-click on the selected objects and select Distribute Selection from the context
menu, then select a distribution option.

Figure 136: Distribute Selection
toolbar
The distribution options available are as follow:•

Horizontal Left – distributes the selected objects so that the left edges of the objects areevenly spaced from one another.

•

Horizontal Center – distributes the selected objects so that the horizontal centers of theobjects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Horizontal Spacing – distributes the selected objects horizontally so that the objects areevenly spaced from one another.

•

Horizontal Right – distributes the selected objects so that the right edges of the objects
are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Vertical Top – distributes the selected objects so that the top edges of the objects areevenly spaced from one another.

•

Vertical Center – distributes the selected objects so that the vertical centers of theobjects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Vertical Spacing – distributes the selected objects vertically so that the objects areevenly spaced from one another.

•

Vertical Bottom – distributes the selected objects so that the bottom edges of theobjects are evenly spaced from one another.

Note
The distribution tools can be turned into a floating toolbar by clicking at the top of the
pop-up toolbar and dragging it to a new position on a drawing workspace, as shownin Figure 136.

Positioning objects | 123

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 6,
Editing Images
Raster Graphics

Introduction
Previous chapters in this Draw Guide have dealt only with vector graphics and the most common
types of vector graphics in use are as follows:•

SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) – an Extensible Markup Language (XML) based vector
image format for two-dimensional graphics with support for interactivity and animation.

•

EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) – a PostScript document format usable as a graphics fileformat. EPS files are more-or-less self-contained, reasonably predictable PostScript
documents that describe an image or drawing and can be placed within another
PostScript document.

•

AI (Adobe Illustrator) – a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems forrepresenting single-page vector-based drawings in either the EPS or PDF formats.

However, Draw also contains a number of functions for handling raster graphics (bitmaps) suchas photographs and scanned pictures, including import, export, and conversion from one format
to another.
Draw can read all the majority of graphic file formats. It has a subset of capabilities similar toraster graphics programs like Adobe Photoshop or Gimp. Raster graphics are generally images
or pictures that use one of the following formats, which are the most common formats in use:•

JPG/JPEG – acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group which created the format. It
is the most common image format on websites and most digital cameras produce JPEG
images as default.

•

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) – GIF is a bitmap image format that is popular
because of its wide support and portability.

•

PNG (Portable Network Graphics) – PNG is a raster image format which supports
lossless data compression and also background transparency.

•

TIF/TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) – TIFF is flexible, adaptable, and capable of storing
image data in a lossless format.

•

BMP (BitMaP) – it is also known as bitmap image file, which is a dot matrix data
structure.

Importing images
Inserting
To import image files into a drawing, go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar or click on Insert
Image on the Standard toolbar to open the Insert Image dialog (Figure 137).
Draw contains import filters for the majority of graphic formats. If the file being imported has agraphic format not covered by the import filters, then it is recommended to use one of the many
free graphic conversion programs to convert the file into a format that Draw recognizes.
If Preview is selected in the Insert Image dialog, a preview of the file is shown in the box on theright-hand side. This makes it easier to select the file required and also checks that Draw canimport the file format used.

Embedding
Embedding a graphic into a drawing makes the image a permanent part of the drawing. Anychanges made to an embedded graphic only appear in the drawing where the graphic wasembedded. The original graphic file is not affected.

Importing images | 125

Figure 137: Insert Image dialog
Embedding happens when a graphic is imported into a drawing using one of the following
methods:•

Insert Image dialog.

•

Copying and pasting.

•

Scanning a graphic.

•

Dragging and dropping between open files.

The main advantage of embedding graphics into a drawing is that the graphic is always available
no matter what computer is used to open the drawing.
The main disadvantage of embedding graphics is that it creates large file sizes, which may not bedesirable if there is limited capacity for storing computer files. Also, if the original graphic is
altered, then the embedded graphic is not updated each time the drawing is opened.

Note
When a graphic is to be embedded into a LibreOffice drawing, make sure that theInsert as Link option is not selected in the Insert Image dialog.

Linking
Linking to the original graphic does not insert the graphic into a drawing, but creates a link towhere the original graphic file is located on the computer. Each time the drawing is opened, anylinked graphics are displayed in the drawing.
The main advantage of linking a graphic file when placed in a drawing is that if the originalgraphic file is altered or replaced with a graphic using the same filename, the version of thegraphic in the drawing is always up to date. The next time the drawing is opened, the latest
version of the graphic is also opened in the drawing. Also the file size of the drawing is muchsmaller and the original graphic can easily be edited with specialized external applications.

126 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 138: Confirm Linked Graphic dialog
The main disadvantage of linking graphics is that the link must be maintained between thedrawing and the embedded graphic file for linking to work correctly. If the drawing or originalgraphic file is moved to another computer location, then any links must be updated to include the
new location.
1) Open the Insert Image dialog.
2) Select Insert as Link in the Insert Image dialog.
3) Select the required graphic file and click on Open to open the Confirm Linked Graphic
dialog (Figure 138).
4) Click on Keep Link to link the file and close the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.
5) If necessary, click on Embed Graphic to embed the file if it is not to be linked. This also
closes the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.

Note
When a graphic file is linked to a LibreOffice drawing, the format of the linked graphic
is not changed.

Editing links
Links can be updated, modified, or broken as follows:
1) Go to Edit > Links to External File on the Menu bar to open the Edit Links dialog(Figure 139).
2) Select the link to be edited.
3) Click on Modify, Break Link, or Update as appropriate.
– Modify – changes the graphic file in the drawing to the graphic file that uses theselected link.
– Break Link – breaks the link between the selected file and the current document. The
version of the graphic file in the drawing becomes embedded into the drawing. A
confirmation dialog opens asking if the link is to be broken. Click on Yes to confirm thebreaking of the link.
– Update – updates the selected link so that the most recent version of the linked file isdisplayed in the drawing.
4) Click on Close to save the changes to the link and close the Edit Links dialog.

Importing images | 127

Figure 139: Edit Links dialog

Scanning
With most scanners a scanned image can be inserted into a drawing or document. Scanned
images are embedded using PNG format. Make sure the scanner is configured for the computerand supported by the SANE system for a Linux operating system, or TWAIN for a Windows or
Mac operating system.
1) Place a document, drawing, or photograph in the scanner and make sure that thescanner is switched on and ready.
2) If this is the first time the scanner has been used with LibreOffice, go to Insert > Media >Scan > Select Source on the Menu bar to select the scanner. If the scanner has beenused before, go to Insert > Image > Scan > Request on the Menu bar.
3) The rest of the procedure depends on the scanner driver, interface, and computer
operating system. Normally, scanning options need to be specified such as resolution,scan window, and so on. Consult the documentation that came with the scanner for more
information.
4) When the image has been scanned, Draw places it in the drawing. At this point it can beedited like any other graphic.

Note
If more than one scanning device is connected to the computer, the device isselected when the source is selected. This selection becomes the default source
when using scan requests until another device is selected and used as the scanningsource.

128 | Draw Guide 7.2

Copying and pasting
Copying and pasting a graphic into a drawing is another way of embedding graphics. The copiedgraphic can be an image already embedded in another document or drawing, or it can be agraphic file such as a drawing, document, or photograph.
After copying, select the format for pasting a graphic into Draw using Edit > Paste Special >Paste Special on the Menu bar to open the Paste Special dialog. Available formats for pasting
depend on the type of image copied onto the clipboard.

Note
When copying and pasting images into a drawing, please respect the copyright andlicense of the image being copied.

Dragging and dropping
Dragging and dropping is another method of embedding graphics into a drawing and can be usedon graphics that have been embedded or linked. The way that dragging and dropping works isdetermined by the computer operating system. Behavior of dragging and dropping is normallycontrolled using the Ctrl or Ctrl+Shift keys in combination with the mouse.
Objects and images which are used frequently can be stored in the Draw Gallery. From theGallery, a copy of the object or image can be simply dragged onto the drawing. Working with theGallery is dealt with in Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Exporting graphics
Exporting files
By default Draw saves drawings in the *.ODG format and some software programs cannot open
these files. To make drawings available for other programs, the file can be exported in various
formats. The export procedure used depends on the computer setup and computer operating
system being used. The following procedure is an example export procedure.
1) Open the ODG file being exported.
2) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar and open the Export dialog. An example of anexport dialog is shown in Figure 140.
3) Enter a new filename for the exported file and navigate to the folder where the exported
file is to be saved.
4) Select the required file format from the options in the drop-down list.
5) Click Export and the file is exported as a new file in the selected file format.
6) Depending on the file format selected, another dialog may open allowing options to be
selected for the export format.
7) Depending on the additional dialog that may open, click on Export, Create, or OK and
the file is exported as a new file in its new format.

Exporting objects
Exporting individual objects, or a group of objects, from a drawing file is similar to “Exporting files”
above. Open a drawing file and then select the object or objects for export. Make sure to choose
the Selection option in the export dialog, as shown in Figure 140.
Using this method, an imported image can be modified, annotations added to it, and make anyother changes, then select it and export for use in another drawing or document.

Exporting graphics | 129

Figure 140: Example export dialog

Formatting images (raster objects)
Images (raster graphics) can be edited and formatted using one of the following methods to add
or change filters and adjust the properties of color, lines, areas, and shadows:•

Go to Format > Image on the Menu bar and use one of the tools in the sub-menu that
opens.

•

Use the tools on the Image toolbar. See “Image toolbar” on below for more information.

•

Use the tools available in the Shadow and Image panels on the Properties deck of the
Sidebar (Figure 142 on page 132).

•

Some raster graphics may have a text element. For more information on formatting text,
see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.

Raster graphics included in a group behave like other objects when the properties of the groupare edited and formatted.

Note
Any formatting changes made to a graphic using the tools in LibreOffice only appear
in the drawing where the graphic was modified. The original graphic file is notaffected.

130 | Draw Guide 7.2

Naming images
Draw names objects, including inserted images, Shape 1, Shape 2, and so on, in the order of
insertion into a drawing. It is recommended to rename objects, including images in a drawing,with a unique name. Names make images and other objects easily identifiable in the LibreOffice
Navigator.
1) Select an image, then use one of the following methods to open the Name dialog andcreate a unique name for the selected image:– Go to Format > Name on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Name from the context menu.
2) Enter a name in the Name box and click OK.

Image toolbar
The Image toolbar (Figure 141) normally appears when an image or picture that is a rastergraphic is selected. The Image toolbar can be fixed at the top of a drawing or as a floating
toolbar. The default set of tools on the Image toolbar are as follows. For more information on the
Image toolbar and the available tools, see Appendix B, Toolbars.

Figure 141: Image toolbar•

Position and Size (F4) – opens the Position and Size dialog. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information.

•

Align Objects – opens a sub-toolbar giving access to alignment tools for aligningselected objects in relation to each other. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects formore information.

•

Bring to Front (Shift+Ctrl++) – brings the selected object to the front of a group of
objects.

•

Bring Forward (Ctrl++) – brings the selected object forward one step.

•

Send Backward (Ctrl+–) – sends the selected object one step backward.

•

Send to Back (Shift+Ctrl+–) – sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects.

•

In Front of Object – moves the selected object in front of another selected object.

•

Behind Object – moves the selected object behind another selected object.

•

Reverse – reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one
object is selected.

•

Line Style – opens a drop-down list with different line styles used for the outline of theborder. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.

•Line Width – used to change the width of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.

•Line Color – used to change the color of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.

•

Area Style/Filling – used to change the type of filling used in a shape. See Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes for more information.

Formatting images (raster objects) | 131

•Shadow – sets the default shadow effect around the picture. The shadow attributes areadjusted using the Shadow panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 142).
See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.

•

Filter – opens the Image Filter toolbar which is described in “Image filters” on page 137.

•

Image Mode – changes the display of the graphic from color to grayscale, black andwhite, or a watermark. This setting affects only the display and printing of the picture; theoriginal picture file remains unchanged. The image mode setting can also be changed
using Color mode in the Image panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 142).
– Default – the graphic is displayed unaltered in color.
– Grayscale – the graphic is displayed in 256 shades of gray.
– Black/White – the graphic is displayed in black and white.
– Watermark – the color, brightness, contrast, and gamma settings are reduced so thatthe graphic can be used as a watermark (background). The default settings for
Watermark can be adjusted using the Color toolbar (Figure 143).

Figure 142: Shadow and Image panels in
Properties deck on Sidebar

132 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 143: Color toolbar•

Crop Image – crops or trims a picture. When using this tool, crop marks appear aroundthe picture. Drag one or more of these marks to crop the picture to the desired size. For
more information on cropping, see “Cropping images” on page 133.

•

Vertically – flips the selected object vertically. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes
for more information.

•

Horizontally – flips the selected object horizontally. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.

•

Transformations – opens the Transformations toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.

•

Transparency – adjusts the degree of transparency of the picture between 0% (opaque)and 100% (fully transparent). The transparency setting can also be adjusted using theImage section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

•

Color – opens the Color toolbar (Figure 143) to adjust the values of the RGB colors,brightness, contrast, and Gamma. These adjustments do not affect the original picture,
but the values are stored in Draw as a separate formatting set. The color settings canalso be adjusted using the Image section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Red, Green, Blue – select values between –100% (no color) to +100% (full intensity);
0% represents the original color value of the graphic.
– Brightness – select a value between –100% (totally black) and +100% (totally white).
– Contrast – select a value between –100% (minimum) and +100% (maximum).
– Gamma – this affects the brightness of the middle color tones. Select a value between
0.10 (minimum) to 10 (maximum) Try adjusting this value if changing brightness orcontrast does not give the required result.

Cropping images
Cropping is a method of hiding unwanted areas of an image or changing the size of an image ina drawing. Changes made when cropping an image only change the display of the graphic in a
drawing and not the original graphic file.

Cropping images | 133

Figure 144: Example image ready for cropping with selection
handles

Quick cropping
After selecting a graphic, it can be cropped quickly using one of the following methods:•

Click on Crop Image on the Standard or Image toolbar.

•

Go to Format > Image > Crop on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu.

Selection handles appear around the selected image (Figure 144) and the image is cropped asfollows:•

Top, bottom, left, and right selection handles crop the image in one direction only.

•

Corner selection handles crop the image vertically and horizontally in two directions.

•

To maintain the ratio between vertical and horizontal dimensions, hold down the Shift key
while moving a selection handle.

Crop dialog
For more control and accuracy over the cropping functions, it is recommended to use the Cropdialog (Figure 145). After selecting an image, go to Format > Image > Crop Dialog on the Menu
bar to open the Crop dialog.
•

Crop – use this section to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white spacearound the graphic.
– Keep scale – maintains the original scale of the graphic when cropping so that only
the size of the graphic changes.
– Keep image size – maintains the original size of the graphic when cropping so that
only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select thisoption and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of thegraphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.

134 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 145: Crop dialog– Left and Right – if Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left or
right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left or rightof the graphic. If Keep image size is selected, enter a positive amount to increase thehorizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scaleof the graphic.
– Top and Bottom – if Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top or
bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above or below thegraphic. If Keep image size is selected, enter a positive amount to increase thevertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of thegraphic.
•

Scale – this section is used to change the scale of the selected graphic as it appears in a
drawing.
– Width – enter a percentage value to change the width of a selected graphic.
– Height – enter a percentage value to change the height of a selected graphic.

•

Image Size – this section is used to change the size of the selected graphic.
– Width – enter a value for the width of the selected graphic.
– Height – enter a value for the height of the selected graphic.

•

Original Size – the original size of the graphic is displayed above the option. Clicking on
this option and then clicking OK resets the selected graphic to its original size.

Cropping images | 135

Note
In the Crop dialog, the Width and Height are treated as independent values.
Changing one without the other can result in significant distortion of the image andthis may not be what is required.

Exporting cropped graphics
If a cropped graphic is to be used in another drawing, use one of the following methods after
selecting the cropped graphic:•

Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open the Export dialog. Navigate to thedestination folder, then enter a filename, choose the Selection option, and click on
Export. See “Exporting graphics” on page 129 for more information.

•

Go to Format > Image > Save on the Menu bar or right click on the cropped graphic andselect Save from the context menu. Click on Yes to save the modified image and open
an Image Export dialog. Select the file format required, navigate to the destination folder,then enter a filename and click on Save.

Compressing images
If a large image is inserted into a drawing and resized to fit into the layout of the drawing, thecomplete full-size original image is stored in the drawing file. This preserves its content, possibly
resulting in a large file to store or send by mail.
If some loss of image quality can be accepted, the image can be compressed reducing its data
volume while preserving its display in the page layout;
1) Open the Compress Image dialog (Figure 146) using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the image and select Compress from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Image > Compress on the Menu bar.

Figure 146: Compress Image dialog
136 | Draw Guide 7.2

2) Select the type of compression and the resolution required.
3) Click on Calculate New Size to update the image information when the Compression
and Resolution settings are changed.
4) When satisfied with the new settings, click OK to apply the settings.
5) If the resulting image is not acceptable, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Z to undo thechanges and select another compression setting.

Image filters
Draw offers eleven filter effects that work on a selected graphic and they can be combined.
Filters always apply to the entire graphic and it is not possible to use filters to edit only a part of
the graphic.
1) Select a raster graphic to open the Image toolbar.
2) Apply an image filter using one of the following methods:– Click on Filter to open the Image Filter toolbar (Figure 147), then select an image filter
to apply.
– Go to Format > Image > Filter on the Menu bar and select an image filter from thecontext menu.

Note
If a graphic is embedded into a drawing, any image filters are applied directly to aselected graphic and the original graphic file is not changed. Save the drawing toretain any filter effects applied to the graphic in a drawing.

Figure 147: Image Filter toolbar

Note
After a drawing is saved and closed, the effects of image filters become permanent.
If image filter effects are not satisfactory, use Edit > Undo on the Menu bar to cancel
the filter effects before saving the drawing.
The image filters available for application to a raster graphic are as follows:•

Invert – inverts or reverses the color values of a color image (similar to a color negative),or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert to theoriginal graphic (Figure 148).

Figure 148: Invert image filter

Image filters | 137

•Smooth – softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter. This reduces thecontrast between neighboring pixels and produces a lack of sharpness making the image
appear smoother (Figure 149). The effect of the smooth filter can be very subtle.
However, the following example shows the Smooth image filter applied at a Smoothradius setting of 50 making the image smooth, but blurred.
Selecting this filter opens the Smooth dialog (Figure 150) where the smooth radiusparameter is set.

Figure 149: Smooth image filter

Figure 150: Smooth dialog•

Sharpen – sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter, adjusting the contrast
between neighboring pixels. The effect increases if the filter is applied several times
making the colors appear faded, as shown by the example in Figure 151.

Figure 151: Sharpen image filter•

Remove Noise – removes noise by applying a median filter comparing every pixel with
its neighbor. It then replaces any pixel with extreme values that deviate in color by a large
amount from the mean value with a pixel that has a mean color value. The amount ofpicture information does not increase each time the filter is applied. However, there arefewer contrast changes resulting in an image that looks smoother and the effect is very
subtle (Figure 152).

138 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 152: Remove Noise image
filter•Solarization – solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there
is too much light during photo development and the colors have become partly inverted.
Dark areas appear light or light areas appear dark. In the digital world of photography,
solarization creates a change or reversal of color (Figure 153), similar to the effect of the
Invert image filter.
Selecting Solarization opens the Solarization dialog (Figure 154), where the degree ofsolarization (Threshold value) can be specified. Entering a value above 70% reverses theinversion effect on colors. Selecting Invert reverses the effect of the Solarization image
filter.

Figure 153: Solarization image filter

Figure 154: Solarization dialog•

Aging – aging creates a look that resembles photographs developed in the early days ofphotography (Figure 155). All pixels are set to their gray values and then the green andblue color channels are reduced by the amount specified in Aging degree in the Aging
dialog. Red color channel is not changed.
Selecting the Aging filter opens the Aging dialog (Figure 156), where the Aging degree
can be defined and create an old look for the image.

Image filters | 139

Figure 155: Aging image filter

Figure 156: Aging dialog•

Posterize – posterizing reduces the number of colors in an image. For example, aphotograph will probably look like a painting when the number of colors is reduced(Figure 157).
Selecting Posterize opens the Posterize dialog (Figure 158), where the number of poster
colors can be defined to produce the effect required.

Figure 157: Posterize image filter

Figure 158: Posterize dialog
140 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

Pop Art – changes the colors of an image converting it to a pop-art format (Figure 159).

Figure 159: Pop Art image filter•

Charcoal Sketch – displays an image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image
are drawn in black and the original colors are suppressed (Figure 160).

Figure 160: Charcoal Sketch image
filter•Relief – calculates the edges of an image in relief as if the image is illuminated by a lightsource (Figure 161). Selecting Relief opens the Emboss dialog (Figure 162) where theposition of the Light source is selected producing shadows that differ in direction andmagnitude.

Figure 161: Relief image filter

Figure 162: Emboss dialog
Image filters | 141•Mosaic – this image filter joins groups of pixels and converts them into rectangles of asingle color creating an image that appears to be a mosaic (Figure 163). The larger theindividual rectangles created, the fewer details in the mosaic graphic.
Selecting this image filter opens the Mosaic dialog (Figure 164), where the number ofpixels for Width and Height of the tiles is set. Selecting Enhanced edges enhances theedges of each tile, creating a sharper definition.

Figure 163: Mosaic image filter

Figure 164: Mosaic dialog

Replacing colors
The Color Replacer tool only allows replacement or changing a color in an embedded graphic
for another color or set a color as transparent. Up to four colors can be replaced at once. An areaof the graphic cannot be selected for editing as this tool only works on the entire graphic.
The selection of replacement colors can only be from one of the available palettes in LibreOffice.
New colors cannot be defined here, but custom colors can be created before using the Color
Replacer tool. For more information on creating colors, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw
Techniques.

Note
The Color Replacer can only be used on embedded graphics. If the Color Replacer
is used on a linked graphic, the following error message appears “This image islinked to a document. Do you want to unlink the image in order to edit it?”. Click on
Yes to unlink and embed the graphic.

142 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 165: Color Replacer dialog

Color Replacer dialog•

Pipette – switches color selection on when selected.

•

Replace – replaces the selected source colors in the selected image with the colors
specified in the Replace with boxes.

•

Colors – lists the source colors and the replacement colors.
– Source color checkbox – select this checkbox to replace the current Source color withthe color that specified in the Replace with box.
– Tolerance – set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To
replace colors that are similar to the color selected, enter a low value. To replace awider range of colors, enter a higher value.
– Replace with – lists the available color palettes and replacement colors.

•

Transparency – replaces transparent areas in the selected image with the color
selected.

Replacing colors
1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog(Figure 165).
3) Click on Pipette at the top of the Color Replacer dialog to activate the color selectionmode.
4) Move the cursor over the color to be replaced in the selected image and a preview of thecolor appears in the box next to Pipette.
5) Click on the color. The selected color appears in the first Source color preview box and acheck mark appears next to it

Replacing colors | 143

Figure 166: Example of using color replacer
6) To select another color, place a check mark next to the second Source color preview box
and click on another color in the selected image. A maximum of four colors can beselected in the Color Replacer dialog.
7) Enter the amount of tolerance required for replacing each selected color in the Toleranceboxes. The default selection is 10% tolerance.
8) In Replace with, select a color palette from the drop-down list, then select the required
color from the color palette. Transparent is the default selection.
9) After selecting up to four colors for replacement, click Replace to replace the colors in theselected graphic. An example of color replacement is shown in Figure 166.
10) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not satisfactory, select Edit > Undo >Color Replacer in the Menu bar and repeat the color replacement.

Note
Using the Color Replacer replaces all occurrences of the Source color that are in theselected image.

Note
The default selection of Transparent in the Replace with boxes removes the selectedcolor from the image and creates transparent areas in the selected image.

Replacing transparent areas
To replace any transparent areas in an image with a color use the following procedure:
1) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
2) Select an image with transparent areas.
3) Select Transparency in the Color Replacer dialog so that a check mark appears next toTransparency.
4) Select a color palette from the drop-down list next to Transparency, then select a color
from the selected palette.
5) Click on Replace and the transparent areas are filled with the selected color.
6) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is incorrect, select Edit > Undo > Image
Color Replacer in the Menu bar.

144 | Draw Guide 7.2

Conversion
Contour conversion
Contour conversion converts a selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons, with four
corner points. If an image was converted to a contour, then the converted image is set as a
background graphic. If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, contour
conversion of a text object), then enter the polygon group before selecting an individual polygon
within the group. For more information on working with groups, see Chapter 5, Combining
Multiple Objects.
After an object is converted to a contour, the object can no longer be edited normally. Instead, thecontour converted object is edited using Edit > Points on the Menu bar to adjust its shape. For
more information on editing points, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects.

Note
Any editing to an object must be completed before carrying out a contour conversion
because any further editing is not possible on the converted object.
1) Carry out all necessary editing on the object before converting to a contour.
2) Make sure the object is selected.
3) Convert the object to a contour using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Convert > To Contour on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Convert > To Contour from the context
menu.

Note
No confirmation dialog is provided for a contour conversion.

Polygon conversion
Polygon conversion is used to convert a selected image into a group of polygons filled with color.
The image is also converted to a vector graphic and can be resized with no loss of image quality
or distortion of any text.
After conversion, the graphic can be broken into groups of polygons and then split into individual
polygons. Breaking and splitting allows editing or deletion of individual colors within the graphic.

Conversion options and controls•

Number of colors – enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image.
LibreOffice generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. The range
for the number of colors is between 8 and 32.

•

Point reduction – removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value entered.
The range for point reduction is between 0 and 32 pixels.

•

Fill holes – fills the blank areas in the graphic that can be created when applying a point
reduction.

•

Tile size – enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. The range of tile sizes is
between 8 and 128 pixels.

•

Source image – preview of the original image.

•

Vectorized image – preview of the converted image.

Conversion | 145

Figure 167: Convert to Polygon dialog•

Preview – creates a preview of the converted image in Vectorized image without
applying any changes.

•

OK – converts the image to a vector graphic consisting of polygons. The result is ametafile in SVM format (StarView Metafile) used by LibreOffice and allows transfer of theconverted image to other LibreOffice documents.

Converting
1) Select an image in a drawing.
2) Convert the image into a polygon using one of the following methods and open theConvert to Polygon dialog (Figure 167):– Go to Shape > Convert > To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Convert > To Polygon from the context menu.
3) Select Number of colors and Point reduction to be used in the conversion.
4) Select Fill holes to prevent any blank areas appearing in the converted image.
5) Enter the number of pixels to use for Tile size.
6) Click Preview to check how the converted graphic will look.
7) Make any necessary changes to the settings and check the preview again.
8) If the converted image meets the expected requirements, click OK to convert the image
to a polygon and close the Convert to Polygon dialog.

146 | Draw Guide 7.2

Note
No confirmation dialog is provided for a polygon conversion.

Breaking
After converting an image to polygons, the vectorized image can be broken into groups ofpolygons. Each group of polygons consists of one color and becomes an object that can be usedin another drawing.
1) Convert an image to polygons, see “Converting” above.
2) Make sure the converted image is selected, then use one of the following methods tobreak the image into groups of polygons:– Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Break from the context menu.
3) Click on a color in the image and drag the group of polygons filled with that color out of
the image to create a new image.
4) Alternatively, press Delete and delete the color from the image.

SplittingAfter converting an image to polygons and breaking the image into groups of polygons, thesepolygon groups can be split into individual polygons.
1) Convert an image to polygons, see “Converting” above.
2) Break the image into groups of polygons, see “Breaking” above.
3) Select the image, then use one of the following methods to split the groups of polygons
into individual polygons:– Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Shapes > Split from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K.
4) Select an individual polygon (or several polygons) in the image and drag the polygon fromthe image to create a new image in the drawing.
5) Alternatively, press Delete to delete the selected polygon(s) from the image.

Bitmap conversion
All drawing objects placed into a LibreOffice drawing are vector graphics and these vector
graphics can be converted to a bitmap (raster graphic) in PNG format. Any transparency effects
in the original vector graphic are lost during conversion even though the PNG format used by
LibreOffice Draw supports transparencies.
Use one of the following methods to convert a vector graphic to a bitmap:•

Go to Shape > Convert > To Bitmap on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the graphic and select Convert > To Bitmap from the context menu.

Note
No confirmation dialog is provided for a bitmap conversion.

Conversion | 147

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 7,
Working with 3D Objects

Introduction
Although Draw does not match the functionality of leading drawing or image editing programs, it
is capable of producing and editing 3D drawings. In Draw, two types of 3D objects are available:
3D scenes and extruded 3D shapes. The Status Bar indicates when a 3D scene has been
selected (Figure 168), but only indicates a shape has been selected (Figure 169) when an
extruded 3D shape is selected.
Depending on which type is selected, there are different possibilities for further editing of theobject (rotation, illumination, perspective, and so on). Extruded 3D shapes are simpler to set up
and edit, but 3D scenes allow for greater customization.
3D objects are created using one of the following methods:•

3D Objects – these are ready made 3D objects and are also 3D scenes. They are
selected using one of the following methods:– Click on 3D Objects in the Drawing toolbar (Figure 170).
– Select a 3D object in the 3D Objects panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar(Figure 171).

•

Convert a 2D object into a 3D object use one of the following tools. These tools are either
available on the Drawing toolbar or by right-clicking on the object and selecting from thecontext menu.:– To 3D – creates a 3D scene containing an extrusion object.
– To 3D Rotation Object – creates a 3D scene into a rotation object using a default
rotation axis.
– In 3D Rotation Object – creates a 3D scene into a rotation object using a user
defined rotation axis.
– Toggle Extrusion – creates a 3D shape by extruding a 2D object into 3D. Only 3D
shapes that have been extruded can be converted back to a 2D object.

Note
Before creating 3D objects in a drawing, it is recommended that the 3D tools areadded to the Drawing toolbar (Figure 170) using Visible Buttons or the Customize
dialog. For information on using Visible Buttons and the Customize dialog, see
Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.
After installing 3D tools onto the Drawing toolbar, these tools only become available
when a 2D object is selected in a drawing.

Figure 168: Status Bar showing 3D scene selected
Figure 169: Status Bar showing shape selected

Figure 170: Drawing toolbar with 3D tools added

Introduction | 149

Figure 171: Shapes deck on Sidebar

3D object types
3D scenes
3D scenes are created from objects with dimensions using x, y, and z coordinates and cancontain object types, such as cube, sphere, extrusion object or rotation object. These object
types do not exist outside a 3D scene.
The Status Bar displays 3D scene selected when a 3D object is selected that has been createdfrom a 2D object using body rotation or conversion, or it is a ready-made 3D object that has been
inserted into a drawing.
A 3D scene acts similar to a group. Just like a group, a 3D scene can be entered for editing an
individual object in the 3D scene and then exit after editing is completed. See Chapter 5,
Combining Multiple Objects for more information on entering, editing and exiting groups.
When a 3D scene is created from a selection of more than one 2D object, a group is
automatically created as a single 3D scene. This 3D scene can be entered so that individual
objects within the 3D scene can be changed, edited and rotated.

Note
Individual objects cannot be ungrouped when a 3D scene has been created from aselection of 2D objects.

150 | Draw Guide 7.2

3D shapes
2D shapes are flat with only width and height dimensions, but 3D shapes are solid objects thathave three dimensions: depth, width, and height.
A 3D shape is created when a 2D shape or an object from the Fontwork Gallery is turned into 3D
using Toggle Extrusion. The Status Bar displays Shape selected when this type of 3D object isselected.
A 3D shape can be viewed and edited in 3D or 2D mode. To edit in 2D mode, switch off
extrusion, make the editing changes, and switch back to 3D mode using Toggle Extrusion.

Note
Toggle Extrusion can only be used when a 2D shape, a 3D object that has been
extruded from a 2D shape, or an object from the Fontwork Gallery is selected in a
drawing. It is not available for text, lines, arrows, curves, and polygons.

Creating 3D objects
3D ready made objects
3D ready made objects are 3D scenes and are inserted into a drawing using one of the following
methods. The selection and drawing of 3D objects is the same for all methods of inserting a 3D
ready made object.
•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar and select a 3D
object from the sub-toolbar. The 3D Objects icon displayed on the Drawing toolbar
depends on the 3D object that had been previously selected and used.

•

Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Objects toolbar(Figure 172).

•

Go to Shapes > Insert > 3D Objects on the Menu bar and select a 3D object from the
sub-menu.

•

Go to the 3D Objects panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar and select a 3D object.

Figure 172: 3D Objects toolbar

Note
Ready made 3D objects can be repositioned, resized, and edited in the same way as
2D objects. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information.

Extrusion
Extrusion converts a 2D object into a 3D scene by extruding the 2D object toward the observer.
The scene is rotated by 20 degrees around the horizontal axis to make the 3D effect more
visible. Examples of 3D conversion using extrusion are shown in Figure 173. After selecting a 2D
object, convert it to a 3D scene using one of the following methods:

Creating 3D objects | 151

Figure 173: Example of using extrusion for 3D conversion•

Right-click on the 2D object and select Convert > To 3D from the context menu.

•

Click on To 3D in the Drawing toolbar.

•

Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D on the Menu bar.

•

Click on Convert to 3D in the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 179 on page 156).

Rotation
To 3D Rotation Object and Convert to Rotation Object
To 3D Rotation Object or Convert to Rotation Object converts a 2D object into a 3D scene byrotating the object using the left edge of the bounding box around the object as the axis ofrotation. Examples of 3D conversion using either of these rotation tools are shown in Figure 174.
The actual 3D scene created depends on the angle and shape of the object being rotated.
After selecting a 2D object in a drawing, convert it to a 3D scene using rotation with one of thefollowing methods:•

Right-click on a 2D object and select Convert > To 3D Rotation Object from the context
menu.

•

Click on To 3D Rotation Object in the Drawing toolbar.

•

Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.

•

Click on Convert To Rotation Object in the 3D Effects dialog.

Figure 174: Examples of using rotation for 3D
conversion

152 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 175: Example of moving rotation axis using In 3D
Rotation Object

In 3D Rotation Object
In 3D Rotation Object converts a 2D object into a 3D scene by rotating the object through a
movable axis of rotation. An example of moving the rotation axis and changing the rotation angle
is shown in Figure 175. The actual 3D scene created also depends on the angle and shape ofthe object being rotated.
1) Select a 2D object in a drawing.
2) Click on In 3D Rotation Object in the Drawing toolbar.
3) Adjust the position and angle of the rotation axis. This is shown as a dashed line withrotation points at each end.
4) Click anywhere outside the 2D object and it is converted into a 3D scene, as shown in
Figure 175.

Toggle Extrusion
Extrusion is where parallel surfaces are moved to create a 3D shape. In Draw, the 2D surface is
moved forwards out of the drawing level. At the same time the object is slightly tilted and central
projection turned on, creating the impression of a 3D shape. Draw uses a default value for thisextrusion (body depth) based on the size of the 2D object. The value can be changed after the
extrusion, see “Editing 3D objects” below.
Extrusion conversion is carried out using Toggle Extrusion. Extrusion only works on basic
shapes, symbol shapes, block arrows, flowcharts, callouts, and stars and banners that areincluded as a part of the default set of tools on the Drawing toolbar or in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar. Extrusion can also be used on any objects created using Fontwork. Examples of toggle
extrusion are shown in Figure 176.
1) Select a 2D object in a drawing that has been created from basic shapes, symbol shapes,
block arrows, flowcharts, callouts, or stars and banners.

Creating 3D objects | 153

Figure 176: Examples of toggle extrusion
2) Click on Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar to convert the 2D object into a 3D
shape.
3) To convert a 3D conversion back into a 2D object, select the 3D object and click on
Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar.

Note
Extrusion cannot be used on text objects created using Insert Text Box or Insert
Vertical Text.

Editing 3D objects
Note
Where 3D scenes have been created from more than one 2D object, a 3D scene
group is automatically created. This 3D scene group cannot be ungrouped and any
editing carried out will affect all 3D objects within the group. To edit an individual 3D
object within this 3D scene group, enter the group. See Chapter 5, Combining
Multiple Objects more information on working with groups.

Position, Size and Rotation
Editing the position, size and rotation of 3D objects is similar to 2D objects. See Chapter 3,
Working with Objects for more information.

3D settings
To open the 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 177), go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Settings on the Menu
bar. The 3D-Settings toolbar only becomes active when a 3D shape is selected that has beencreated from a 2D object using “Toggle Extrusion” above.
The tools available for editing 3D shapes are as follows. The result of any changes made using
these editing tools is applied to the selected 3D shape immediately displaying the effect of the 3D
setting applied. Figure 178 shows an example of tilting left, increasing extrusion depth, andchanging 3D color using the 3D-Settings toolbar.
•

Tilt Down – tilts the selected object downward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees
each time the icon is used.

•

Tilt Up – tilts the selected object upward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees each timethe icon is used.

154 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 177: 3D Settings toolbar

Figure 178: Example of changing 3D settings•

Tilt Left – tilts the selected object left (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time theicon is used.

•

Tilt Right – tilts the selected object right (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each timethe icon is used.

•

Depth – opens a pop-up menu where where the extrusion depth can be set from an
object by a fixed or custom amount.

•Direction – opens a pop-up menu where the view direction can be set to create an
extrusion in either a perspective or parallel projection.

•

Lighting – opens a pop-up menu where the direction and intensity of the lighting can be
set when creating an extrusion.

•

Surface – opens a pop-up menu where the surface of the extrusion can be set as matt,or wireframe display.

•

3D Color – opens a pop-up menu where the color used for the extrusion can be set. This
color does not have to be the same as the color used for the original 2D object.

Note
The 3D Effects dialog cannot be used on 3D shapes created using Toggle Extrusion
because the correct formatting results will not be achieved. If the 3D Effects dialog isused in error, remove any incorrect formatting by going to Format > Default
Formatting on the Menu bar.

3D effects
The 3D Effects dialog (Figure 179) offers a wide range of possible settings for editing 3D readymade objects or 3D scenes. This dialog can also be used to convert a 2D object to 3D using thetools in the bottom left corner of the dialog. To open the 3D Effects dialog, click on 3D Effects on
the Line and Filling toolbar, or go to Format > 3D-Effects on the Menu bar.
Any 3D effects applied to a 3D scene are not carried out until Assign is clicked in the top right ofthe 3D Effects dialog. This allows for all 3D effect changes to be carried out before applying them
to a 3D scene.

Editing 3D objects | 155

Figure 179: 3D Effects dialog - Geometry pageNote
Any options on the pages in the 3D Effects dialog that are grayed out cannot be used
for the selected object.

3D conversion
In the bottom left corner of the 3D Effects dialog are tools for converting a 2D object into a 3D
scene and changing the projection used in a 3D scene.
•

Convert to 3D – converts the selected object into a 3D scene. This tool works in thesame way as using “Extrusion” on page 151.

•

Convert to Rotation Object – converts a 2D object into a 3D scene using body rotation.
This tool works in the same way as using “Rotation” on page 152.

•

Perspective On/Off – switches perspective projection on or off for a 3D scene.
Perspective projection is a technique to create a linear illusion of depth. As objects get
further away from the viewer, a perspective drawing decreases in size at a constant rate.

156 | Draw Guide 7.2

3D Effects – Geometry
Click on Geometry in the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 179) to open the Geometry page and use theoptions available to change the geometry of a 3D object.
•

Geometry – defines the properties of an object in a 3D scene.
– Rounded edges – enter the amount required to round the corners of a 3D shape asshown by the example in Figure 180. The default setting for rounded edges is 10%.
– Scaled depth – enter the amount required to increase or decrease the frontal area of a
selected 3D object. Figure 181 shows an example where the scaled depth has been
increased to 150% and then decreased to 50%. The default setting for scaled depth is100%.

Figure 180: Example of rounded edges

Figure 181: Example of changing scaled depth

Figure 182: Example of changing rotation angle

Editing 3D objects | 157

Figure 183: Example of increasing depth– Rotation angle – enter the angle in degrees to rotate a 2D object that has been
converted to 3D using To 3D Rotation Object. Figure 182 shows an example of a 2D
circle where the rotation angle is changed to 150 degrees.
– Depth – enter the extrusion depth for the selected 2D object that has been converted
to 3D using To 3D. Figure 183 shows an example of a 2D circle converted to a 3D
cylinder with the extrusion depth increased to 3 cm.
•

Segments – changes the number of segments that Draw uses to draw a 3D rotation
object. The higher the number of segments, the smoother the object surface will be.
However, a high segment number may increase the time it takes to generate the 3D
object on a display. Figure 184 shows the difference on a 3D sphere when the segments
have been increased from 10 to 30 segments horizontally and vertically.
– Horizontal – enter the number of horizontal segments used in the selected 3D rotation
object.
– Vertical – enter the number of vertical segments used in the selected 3D rotation
object.

•Normals – modifies the rendering style of the 3D surface (Figure 185 and Figure 186).
– Object-Specific – renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For
example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
– Flat – renders the 3D surface as polygons.
– Spherical – renders a smooth 3D surface regardless of the shape of the object.
– Invert Normals – an inverted normal is a normal that is pointing in the wrong direction.
This tells a computer that an outside face is actually an inside face when it is not. If
there is a hollow design, an inverted normal can be indicated because both surfaces
facing are in and out in the same model.

Figure 184: Example of segments

158 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 185: Examples of object specific, flat and spherical effects

Figure 186: Examples of invert normals and double sided
illumination– Double-Sided Illumination – lights the outside and the inside of the object. This has
only an effect, if the inside is drawn at all, see Double-Sided. This is a setting for thewhole of the 3D scene and not for a single object within the scene.

Note
Figure 186 demonstrates the 3D effect of using Invert Normals in conjunction withusing the 3D effect Double-Sided Illumination.
– Double-Sided – a 3D object has outside (front) and inside (back) faces. With DoubleSided switched off, only the outside face of the object is rendered. The effect, whenlooking from outside, is that the object is solid, but, when looking from inside, the front
face is transparent. If there is no view to the inside face, normal for an extruded 3D
object with solid texture, Double-Sided should be switched off to improve performance
during rendering. Any 3D object created using rotation often allows an inside view and
it is recommended that Double-Sided is switched on.

3D Effects – Shading
On the Shading page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 187) provides options to set the shading,shadow, and camera effects on a selected 3D object.
•

Shading – specifies the mode of shading applied to a 3D object (Figure 188).
– Gouraud – this shading mode is a method used in computer graphics to simulate thediffering effects of light and color across the surface of an object. In practice, it is used
to achieve smooth lighting on low-polygon surfaces without the heavy computational
requirements of calculating lighting for each pixel.

Editing 3D objects | 159

– Phong – this shading mode is an interpolation technique for surface shading
calculating the normal of a point in the polygon by interpolating the normals of thevertices. The angle between normal and lighting direction determines how much of thelighting is used to color the pixel.
– Flat – this shading mode refers to the depiction of depth perception in 3D models or
illustrations by varying the level of darkness. It assigns a single color of shading to asingle segment on the surface of the object.

Figure 187: 3D Effects dialog - Shading page

Figure 188: Examples of shading mode

160 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 189: Examples of shadow surface angle

Figure 190: Example of changing camera settings•

Shadow – adds or removes a shadow from a selected 3D object (Figure 189). A shadow
is generated only from the first light source. Enter a Surface Angle from the light source
to the surface between 0 to 90 degrees to cast a shadow.

•

Camera – sets the camera options for a selected 3D scene as if a camera is being used
to take a photograph (Figure 190). The settings affect only central perspective and notparallel projection.
– Distance – enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of theselected 3D scene. The default setting for distance is 2.6cm.
– Focal length – enter the focal length of the camera lens, where a small value
corresponds to a fish-eye lens and a large value to a telephoto lens. The default
setting for focal length is 10cm.

3D Effects – Illumination
The Illumination page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 191) defines how a 3D scene is lit and thesettings apply to all 3D objects in a scene. The direction of the light source, color of the lightsource, and the ambient light can be specified for the 3D scene.
By default, one light source is already selected when the Illumination page is opened. More lightsources can be selected for illumination. A maximum of eight sources can be used and each lightsource can use a different color. Figure 191 shows three light sources selected with each lightsource having a different color.
1) Select a Light source to turn the light source on. The icon changes to an illuminated bulb.
2) Click again on the selected light source to adjust the color for the light source.

Editing 3D objects | 161

Figure 191: 3D Effects dialog - Illumination page3) Select a color for the light from one of the color palettes in the Light source drop-downlist. A different color can be used for each light source selected.
4) Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Ambient light drop-down list to set thecolor of the surrounding light.
5) To deselect a light source, select a light source already selected and click on it again.
The light source location and color are shown in the lower right corner of the Illumination page.
The vertical slider bar adjusts the lighting angle and the horizontal slider bar rotates the lightabout the object. Alternatively, click on the light point and drag the light source to the required
position.
To change the preview from a sphere to a cube, click on the small square to the right of thehorizontal slider bar and below the vertical slider bar.
Each light source selected is shown as a small colored sphere in the color specified for it. The
larger colored sphere indicates the active light source.

162 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 192: 3D Effects dialog- Textures page

3D Effects – Textures
On the Textures page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 192) the properties of the surface texture
can be set for a selected 3D object. Textures is only available after the area fill of a 3D object is
set to Gradient, Hatching, or Bitmap. For more information on changing area fill, see Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes.
•

Type – sets the color properties of the texture.
– Black & White – converts the texture to black and white.
– Color – converts the texture to color.

•

Mode – shows or hides shading.
– Only Texture – applies the texture without shading.
– Texture and Shading – applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options
for the texture, see “3D Effects – Shading” above.
– Texture, Shadow and Color – applies the texture with a shadow and color. To define
the shading options for the texture, see “3D Effects – Shading” above.

•

Projection X – sets the options for displaying the texture along the X axis. Only one of
the three following options can be selected.
Editing 3D objects | 163

– Object-Specific – automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape andsize of the object. This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.
– Parallel – applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis and is mirrored on the rearside of the object. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
– Circular – wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around an object.
•

Projection Y – sets the options for displaying the texture along the Y axis. Only one of
the three following options can be selected.
– Object-Specific – automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape andsize of the object. This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.
– Parallel – applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis and is mirrored on the rearside of the object. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
– Circular – wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around an object.

•

Filtering – filters out noise that can occur when a texture is applied to a 3D object.
– Filtering On/Off – applies a soft focus filter blurring the texture slightly to remove
unwanted speckles.

3D Effects – Material
On the Materials page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 193) the appearance of a 3D object canbe changed to represent different materials. Materials and textures can be combined with eachother and it is a matter of trial and error to achieve the desired result.
•

Material – assigns a color from a color palette. For custom colors, see Chapter 11,
Advanced Draw Techniques for more information on creating custom colors.
– Favorites – select a material type for the selected object from the Favorites drop-downlist.
– Object color – select a color from one of the color palettes in the Object color dropdown list.
– Illumination color – select a color from one of the color palettes in the Illumination
color drop-down list. This illuminates the object and brightens parts of the object whichlie in shadow making the object seem more illuminated.

•

Specular – sets the light reflection properties for the selected object simulating thereflecting capacity of the surface. The position of the illuminated point is determined by
the setting of the first light source.
– Color – select a color to be reflected from the object from one of the color palettes in
the Color drop-down list.
– Intensity – enter the intensity of the specular effect as a percentage.

•

Colors Dialog – opens the Pick a Color dialog where custom colors are defined using
the two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart. Any colors created are stored
in the custom palette. See Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more information
on creating custom colors.

Note
Metallic and glass surfaces do not simulate well because the appearance of thesematerials is produced using reflection.

164 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 193: 3D Effects dialog - Material page

Tip
Do not use a very high brightness value for individual colors. Colors are additive andit is easy to end up with a colored area that is white.

Combining objects
Multiple 3D objects cannot be combined using Shape > Combine on the Menu bar or the
keyboard shortcut Shift+Ctrl+K. Multiple 2D objects have to be created first, then a single 3D
object created as follows (see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information on
combining objects):
1) Create multiple 2D objects and carry out all the necessary editing changes.
2) Make sure that all 2D objects are selected to create a single 3D object.
3) Create a single 3D object combining the multiple 2D objects using one of the following
methods (example conversions are shown in Figure 194):– Click on To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Drawing toolbar.

Combining objects | 165

Figure 194: Example of creating single 3D object from multiple 2D objects– Right-click on the selected multiple 2D objects and select Convert > To 3D or To 3D
Rotation Object from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.

Assembling 3D objects
3D objects that each form a separate 3D scene can be combined or assembled into a single 3D
scene. An example procedure for assembling 3D objects is as follows and shown in Figure 195:
1) Select a 3D object (for example, a cube) from 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar or
Shapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in a drawing.
2) Select a second 3D object (for example, a sphere) from 3D Objects on the Drawing
toolbar or Shapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in the drawing.
3) If necessary, set the area fill to None and the lines to Continuous to create wire frame
objects. This makes it easier to position both objects in the assembled 3D scene.
4) Select the second 3D object (sphere) and go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar or right-clickon the object and select Cut from the context menu.
5) Double-click the first 3D object (cube) to enter the group or go Shape > Group > Enter
Group on the Menu bar.
6) Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar or right-click on the first 3D object and select Pastefrom the context menu. The sphere now appears inside the cube and is now part of thesame group.
7) If required, edit the individual objects or change their position within the group.
8) Double-click outside the 3D assembled scene to exit the group, or go to Shape > Group> Exit Group on the Menu bar.

Note
The second object also reappears in its original position when Paste is carried out.
This object is NOT part of the assembled 3D scene and can be deleted if necessary.

166 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 195: Example of assembling 3D objects

Assembling 3D objects | 167

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 8,
Connections, Flowcharts, andOrganization Charts

Connectors and glue points
Connectors and glue points were briefly introduced in Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes. Thissection describes them in more detail and how to use them.
Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to a connection or glue point on
the border of an object. Connectors are useful in drawings because connecting lines between
objects remain connected to objects, even when objects are moved or rearranged. Also, when an
object with a connector attached is moved or resized, the connector automatically adjusts its
shape to accommodate the changes.
For example, when creating flowcharts, organization chart, schematics, or diagrams, it is highly
recommended to use connectors instead of simple lines. Using connectors removes the need to
redraw lines between objects,
When a connector is drawn or selected, Draw displays selection handles that are different to theselection handles for normal lines or objects. The termination points of a connector are round at
the start and end points of a connector, and square in the center of the lines that make up aconnector, as shown by the example in Figure 196. The square selection handles on a connector
are used to change the routing of a connector where applicable.

Figure 196: Example of connectors between objects

Connectors
Draw has a comprehensive selection of connectors to connect objects together, for example, in a
flowchart or organization chart. The default set of connectors can be accessed using one of thefollowing methods:•

Click the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open a pop-up
toolbar. The Connectors icon changes shape depending on the last connector used.

•

Select a connector from the options available in the Connectors section in the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar.

If necessary, the pop-up toolbar connectors can be displayed as a Connectors sub-toolbar as
follows:
1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Click on the line at the top of the pop-up toolbar and drag it on to the Workspace.
3) Release the mouse button and the pop-up toolbar becomes the Connectors sub-toolbar(Figure 197).

Figure 197: Connectors sub-toolbar

Connectors and glue points | 169

Connector types
The full range of predefined connectors can be accessed by clicking on the triangle ▼ on theright of the titlebar for the Connectors sub-toolbar and selecting Visible Buttons from the context
menu. Depending on the computer system being used, the connectors already installed on the
sub-toolbar are indicated either by a check mark against the name, or the connector icon ishighlighted.
Connector type groups• Standard – connector name starts with Connector. Line segments run vertically andhorizontally. Creates a connector with one or more 90 degree angle bends. Click on an
object glue point, then drag the cursor to a glue point on another object to create astandard connector.
•

Line – connector name starts with Line. Consists of a line segment with two smaller
segments at the ends and draws a connector that bends near a glue point. Click on an
object glue point, then drag to a glue point on another object to create a line connector.
To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a glue point, click on
the connector and drag the bend point.

•

Straight – connector name starts with Straight. Consists of a single line and draws astraight line connector. Click on an object glue point, then drag the cursor to a glue pointon another object to create a straight connector.

•

Curved – connector name starts with Curved. Based on Bézier curves, a curved
connector bends around objects. Draws a curved line connector. Click on an object glue
point, then drag the cursor to a glue point on another object to create a curved connector.

Connector types
1) Connector Ends with Arrow
2) Straight Connector Ends with Arrow
3) Curved Connector Ends with Arrow
4) Line Connector Ends with Arrow
5) Connector
6) Straight Connector
7) Curved Connector8) Line Connector
9) Connector with Arrows
10) Straight Connector with Arrows
11) Curved Connector with Arrows12) Line Connector with Arrows13) Connector Starts with Arrow
14) Straight Connector Starts with Arrow

15) Curved Connector Starts with Arrow
16) Line Connector Starts with Arrow
17) Connector Ends with Circle
18) Straight Connector Ends with Circle
19) Curved Connector Ends with Circle
20) Line Connector Ends with Circle21) Connector Starts with Circle
22) Straight Connector Starts with Circle
23) Curved Connector Starts with Circle
24) Line Connector Starts with Circle25) Connector with Circles
26) Straight Connector with Circles27) Curved Connector with Circles
28) Line Connector with Circles

Adding connectors to objects
1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open theoptions available for selecting connectors.
2) Select the type of connector required. See “Connector types” above for more informationon connector types.
3) Move the cursor over one of the objects to be connected and small crosses appear
around the object edges, normally in the same position as object selection handles.
These crosses are the glue points to which a connector can be attached (Figure 198).
See “Glue points” on page 172 for more information on glue points.
4) Click on the required glue point to attach the start point of the connector, then click anddrag the cursor to draw a connector to another object.
5) When the cursor is over a glue point of the target object release the mouse button andthe connector is drawn. The connector end point is attached to the glue point.

170 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 198: Example of object
glue points
6) The square selection handles that appear on the connector are used to adjust the path ofthe connector so that it does not cover any other object in its path. See “Modifying
connectors” below on how to change the connector route to avoid any objects theconnector crosses over.

Note
The end point of a connector can be positioned in an empty part of a document.
When the mouse button is released, the unattached end point of the connector islocked into place until it is moved to a different location.

Note
The start and end points of a connector cannot be swapped, that is the start point
becomes the end point and the end point becomes the start point. To swap the end
points of a connector, a new connector has to be drawn in the opposite direction.

Modifying connectors
To detach or reposition a connector, click and drag either round end point of a connector line to adifferent location. See the example in Figure 196 on page 169 for an example of round end
points.
To change the connector route between objects so that the connector does not overlap any
objects on the route, click on a square control point on the connector line and drag it to a newposition. See the example in Figure 196 on page 169 for an example of square control points.
To modify a connector, right-click on the connector and select Connector from the context menu
to open the Connector dialog (Figure 199). Use this dialog to change connector type and its
properties.
•

Type – select the connector type from the drop-down list. See “Connector types” onpage 170 for more information.

•Line skew – defines the skew of a connector line. The dialog preview displays the resultof any changes.

•

Line spacing – sets the spacing around a connector.
– Begin horizontal – enter the amount of horizontal space required at the beginning of aconnector.
– Begin vertical – enter the amount of vertical space required at the beginning of aconnector.

Connectors and glue points | 171

Figure 199: Connector dialog– End horizontal – enter the amount of horizontal space required at the end of aconnector.
– End vertical – enter the amount of vertical space required at the end of a connector•

Preview box – displays a preview of objects and connectors being used. A left clickzooms in on the preview and a right-click zooms out.

Glue points
Glue points are not the same as object selection handles. The selection handles are for moving
or changing the shape of an object (see Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information).
Glue points are used to fix or glue a connector to an object so that when the object moves, theconnector stays fixed to that object.
All objects have glue points and Figure 198 on page 171 shows an example of glue points visible
on an object after a connector has been selected. Glue points are not normally displayed on an
object and only become visible when one of the following methods is used..
•

Connectors is selected on the Drawing toolbar. The Connectors icon displayed on the
Drawing toolbar is the connector type that had been previously used.

•

A connector type is selected in the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

To add, customize or delete glue points to an object, go to View > Toolbars > Glue Points on
the Menu bar to activate the Glue Points toolbar (Figure 200). This toolbar only becomes visible
after using one of the following methods:•

Click on Show Glue Point Functions on the Standard or Drawing toolbars.

•

Select Edit > Glue Points on the Menu bar.

Figure 200: Glue Points toolbar

172 | Draw Guide 7.2

NoteShow Glue Point Functions on the Drawing toolbar is not part of the default set oftools for the Drawing toolbar. To add this tool, right-click in an empty area on the
Drawing toolbar and select Visible Buttons > Glue Points from the context menu.

Glue point types
When the Glue Points toolbar opens, only the five tools on the left of Glue Point Relative are
active. The remaining six tools on the right of the toolbar only become active when Glue Point
Relative is deselected.
•

Insert Glue Point – inserts a glue point at the cursor position in an object when themouse button is clicked.

•

Exit Direction Left – connector attaches to the left edge of the selected glue point.

•

Exit Direction Top – connector attaches to the top edge of the selected glue point.

•

Exit Direction Right – connector attaches to the right edge of the selected glue point.

•

Exit Direction Bottom – connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected glue
point.

•

Glue Point Relative – when selected, the glue point moves when the object is resized
maintaining its position relative to the object borders. When deselected, a glue point canbe repositioned after the object is resized. This tool is selected by default when the Glue
Point toolbar opens.

The following six tools only become active when Glue Point Relative is deselected.
•

Glue Point Horizontal Left – when the object is resized, the selected glue point remains
fixed at the left edge of the object.

•

Glue Point Horizontal Center – when the object is resized, the selected glue point
remains fixed at the center of the object.

•

Glue Point Horizontal Right – when the object is resized, the selected glue point
remains fixed at the right edge of the object.

•

Glue Point Vertical Top – when the object is resized, the selected glue point remains
fixed at the top edge of the object.

•

Glue Point Vertical Center – when the object is resized, the selected glue point remains
fixed at the vertical center of the object.

•

Glue Point Vertical Bottom – when the object is resized, the selected glue point
remains fixed at the bottom edge of the object.

Note
Each glue point added to an object can have only one horizontal position and one
vertical position. Only one of the horizontal position tools and one of the vertical
position tools can be selected and used at any one time.

Adding glue points
By default, most objects normally have four glue points as shown in the example in Figure 198 on
page 171. Add additional glue points to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Glue Points on the Menu bar to activate the Glue Points
toolbar.
2) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Glue Points toolbar:
Connectors and glue points | 173

– Click on Show Glue Point Functions on the Standard or Drawing toolbars.
– Select Edit > Glue Points on the Menu bar.
3) Select the object, then click on Insert Glue Point on the Glue Points toolbar.
4) Move the cursor to the required position on the selected object and the cursor changes
shape to a cross (depending on the computer setup).
5) Click once to add a glue point. To add more glue points, move the cursor to a newposition and click.
6) When finished adding glue points, move the cursor off the selected object and click in an
empty space to deselect the object.
7) Alternatively, right-click on a glue point previously added to the object and select Insert
Glue Point from the context menu, then click and drag the new glue point to the required
position.
8) Select the type of glue point required from the options available on the Glue Points
toolbar. See “Glue point types” above for more information.

Note
When an object has no fill, a glue point can only be added to the border of an empty
object.

Tip
When adding, moving or customizing glue points, it is recommended to use thezoom function to make it easier to work with glue points. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information. Also, glue points snap to the grid making it easier
to position a glue point.

Customizing glue points
Only glue points that have been added to an object can be customized. The default glue points
included with an object cannot be customized.
Customize the exit direction for a glue point that has been added to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Glue Points on the Menu bar to activate the Glue Points
toolbar.
2) Open the Glue Points toolbar:3) Double-click on a glue point that has been added to an object to select the glue point forcustomization.
4) Select the exit direction required for the connector to be attached to the glue point using
one of the following methods:– Click on the exit direction in the Glue Points toolbar.
– Right-click on the glue point and select the exit direction from the context menu.
Customize the horizontal and vertical positioning for a glue point that has been added to an
object as follow:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Glue Points on the Menu bar to activate the Glue Points
toolbar.
2) Open the Glue Points toolbar:3) Double-click on a glue point that has been added to an object to select the glue point forcustomization.

174 | Draw Guide 7.2

4) Click on Glue Point Relative on the Glue Points toolbar to deselect this tool, or right-clickon the glue point and select Glue Point Relative from the context menu to deselect thetool.
5) Select the horizontal and vertical positioning tools required for the glue point using one of
the following methods Only one horizontal positioning tool and one vertical positioning
tool can be used at any one time:– Click on the horizontal and vertical positioning required in the Glue Points toolbar.
– Right-click on the glue point and select the horizontal and vertical positioning required
from the context menu.

Deleting glue points
Only glue points that have been added to an object can be deleted. The default glue points
included with an object cannot be deleted.
1) Select a glue point for deletion that has previously been added to the object.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key, or go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar.

Connector text
Text can be easily added to connectors, then formatted, for example, to make a flowchart ororganization chart easier to follow. See Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text for more
information on working with and formatting text.

Adding text1) Select a connector and the control points become active.
2) Enter text mode using one of the following methods:– Click on Insert Text Box or Insert Vertical Text (if added) on the Standard toolbar(Figure 201).
– Click on Insert Text Box or Insert Vertical Text (if added) on the Drawing toolbar(Figure 202).
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2 to create horizontal text on the selected connector.
A flashing text cursor appears close to the connector and the Text Formatting toolbar(Figure 203) opens.
3) Type the required text for the connector.
4) If necessary, format the connector text. See “Formatting and editing text” below for more
information on formatting and editing text text.
5) When adding and formatting text is complete, move the cursor away from the text andconnector, then click to end text mode. This also closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Figure 201: Standard toolbar with Insert Vertical Text added

Connectors and glue points | 175

Figure 202: Drawing toolbar with Insert Vertical Text added

Note
In the default installation of LibreOffice, the Insert Vertical Text tool is not included
on the Standard or Drawing toolbars. To add Insert Vertical Text to the toolbar, rightclick in an empty area in either toolbar, go to Visible Buttons and select Vertical
Text from the context menu.

Figure 203: Text Formatting toolbar

Formatting and editing text1) Select a connector with text added and activate the control points to enter text mode. See“Adding text” above for more information on adding text to a connector.
2) Use the tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar or the options available in Format> Text on the Menu bar to format the text.
3) Right-click on the connector text and select Text from the context menu to open the Text
dialog (Figure 204) and change how the text appears next to the connector. The options
available are as follows:– Drawing Object Text – Fit to frame – resizes the text to fit the entire area of aconnector rectangle or frame.
– Drawing Object Text – Adjust to contour – adapts the text flow so that it matches thecontours of the selected connector.
– Spacing to Borders – specify the amount of space to leave between the connector
and the borders of the text.
– Text Anchor – select one of nine positions to anchor the text within the connector
rectangle.
– Full width – anchors the text to the full width of the connector rectangle. Whenselected, the top, middle and bottom center positions can be used for to anchor thetext.
4) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page (Figure 205) andaccess options to animate the text. However, this is not recommended unless the drawing
is going to be displayed as part of a presentation. See the Impress Guide for more
information on text animation.
5) Click OK to save the changes to text attributes and close the Text dialog.

176 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Move the cursor away from text and connector, then click to end the text mode. This also
closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Figure 204: Text dialog

Figure 205: Text dialog - Text Animation page

Connectors and glue points | 177

Flowcharts
For drawing flowcharts (also known as flow diagrams), Draw has a floating Flowchart sub-toolbar(Figure 206) that includes a large selection of flowchart tools to create a flowchart.
1) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar to open a
Flowchart pop-up menu. Note that the Flowchart icon changes shape depending on thelast flowchart tool used.
2) Click at the top of the Flowchart pop-up menu and drag it into the Workspace.
3) Release the mouse button and the pop-up menu becomes a floating Flowchart
sub-toolbar.

Figure 206: Flowchart sub-toolbar
Available flowchart shapes, left to right1) Flowchart: Process2) Flowchart: Alternate Process3) Flowchart: Decision4) Flowchart: Data
5) Flowchart: Predefined Process6) Flowchart: Internal Storage
7) Flowchart: Document
8) Flowchart: Multidocument
9) Flowchart: Terminator10) Flowchart: Preparation
11) Flowchart: Manual Input
12) Flowchart: Manual Operation
13) Flowchart: Connector
14) Flowchart: Off-page Connector

15) Flowchart: Card
16) Flowchart`: Punched Type17) Flowchart: Summing Junction18) Flowchart: Or
19) Flowchart: Collate20) Flowchart: Sort
21) Flowchart: Extract
22) Flowchart: Merge
23) Flowchart: Stored Data
24) Flowchart: Delay
25) Flowchart: Sequential Access
26) Flowchart: Magnetic Disc27) Flowchart: Direct Access Storage28) Flowchart: Display

An example flowchart is shown in Figure 207 and the recommended basic steps when creating a
flowchart are as follows:•

When adding objects or flowchart shapes to a flowchart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic
Shapes for information on how to draw and resize object shapes.

•

Add text to each flowchart shape to make it easily identified in the flowchart. See Chapter
2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more
information.

•

Use connector lines in a flowchart. This allows repositioning of an object in a flowchart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the flowchart. See “Connectors
and glue points” on page 169 for more information.

•

Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a flowchart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.

•

Use the alignment and distribution functions to give a flowchart a more professional look.
See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

•

Duplicate objects when more than one of the same shape and size is required. See
Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

178 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 207: Example flowchart

Figure 208: Example of an organization chart

Organization charts
Draw does not have a toolbar for organization charts, but these charts are easily created using
basic shapes, flowchart shapes, and connectors. Hierarchy in an organization is easily indicatedusing shading and/or color. When using shading and color in an organization chart, make surethe selection provides a good contrast between the text and the shading or color. This makes thechart easy to read on a computer display or in a printed document.
An example of an organization chart is shown in Figure 208. This was drawn using the rectangle
basic shape and connectors.
•

When adding objects to a chart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes for information on
how to draw and resize object shapes.

•

Add text to each object in the organization chart to make it easily identified in the chart.
See Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques formore information.

Organization charts | 179•Use connectors in an organization chart. This allows repositioning of an object in a chart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the chart. See “Connectors andglue points” on page 169 for more information.

•

Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a chart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.

•

Use the alignment and distribution functions to give an organization chart a more
professional look. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

•

Duplicate objects when more than one of the same shape and size is required. See
Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

180 | Draw Guide 7.2

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 9,
Adding and Formatting Text

Introduction
When text is used in drawings, it is placed inside an object or inside a text box. This chapter
describes how to create, format, use, and delete text. It also discusses the various types of textthat can be inserted into a drawing. Finally, it provides information on how to insert special formsof text such as numbered or bulleted lists, tables, fields, hyperlinks, and Fontwork.

Text mode
Before any text can be typed in a drawing, text mode has to be activated using one of thefollowing methods. The Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens when in text mode replacing
the Line and Filling toolbar.
•

For horizontal text only, go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.

•

For horizontal text only, use the keyboard shortcut F2.

•

Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on theStandard toolbar (Figure 209) or Drawing toolbar (Figure 210).

If Insert Vertical Text is not visible on the Standard or Drawing toolbars, it can be added to thetoolbar as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages on the Menu bar to open the
Languages page in the Options dialog.
2) In Default Languages for Documents, select the option Asian. Accept the default
settings for this option.
3) Click OK to close the Options dialog and save the changes.
4) Right-click in an empty area on the Standard or Drawing toolbar and select Visible
Buttons from the context menu.
5) Select Vertical Text from the drop-down list of options to add Insert Vertical Text to theStandard or Drawing toolbar.

Figure 209: Standard toolbar with Insert Vertical Text added

Figure 210: Drawing toolbar with Insert Vertical Text added

182 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 211: Text information in Status Bar

Text boxes
Creating text boxes
When text is added to a drawing, a text box is automatically created to contain the text. By
default, the text box expands horizontally to accommodate a single line of horizontal text, or
expands vertically to accommodate a single line of vertical text.
1) Activate text mode, see “Text mode” above.
2) Click at the approximate position in the drawing where the text box is to be placed. A text
box is created containing a flashing text cursor.
3) Type or paste the text into the text box and the text box expands either horizontally or
vertically to accommodate a single line of text. Also, the left corner of the Status Bar
indicates text edit mode and the position of the text cursor (Figure 211).
4) To create multiple lines in the text box, use one of the following methods:– Use the Enter key to create single line paragraphs inside the text box. The text box
expands to accommodate more lines of text.
– Before typing text, click and drag the text cursor creating a text box with theapproximate dimensions required. As the limits of the text box are reached, the text
automatically word wraps inside the text box and the text box expands as it fills.
5) Move, resize, rotate or format the text box as required. For more information, see thefollowing sections and Chapter 3, Working with Objects.
6) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, the various panelsin the Properties deck on the Sidebar, or the various options in Format on the Menu bar.
For more information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 191.
7) When text insertion and formatting is complete, click outside the text box to save thechanges and deselect the text box.

Note
Text boxes cannot contain illustrations, inline pictures, formulas, tables or shapes.

Moving text boxes1) Click on the text in a text box to activate the text mode and the text box border isdisplayed.
2) Move the cursor over the border. The cursor changes shape to the move symbol for thecomputer setup (for example, a clenched hand).

Text boxes | 183

Figure 212: Moving a text box

Figure 213: Resizing a text box3) Click on the border and drag the text box to a new position in the drawing. A ghosted
outline of the text box shows where it will be placed (Figure 212).
4) Release the mouse button when the text box is in the required position.
5) To accurately position a text box, use the Position and Size dialog or the Position andSize panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects
for more information.
6) When the text box is in the required position, click outside the text box to save thechanges and deselect the text box.

Resizing text boxes1) Click on the text in a text box to activate text mode and a text box border is displayed.
2) Move the cursor over one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape to theresizing symbol for the computer setup (for example, a double-headed arrow). The
selection handles are used to resize the text box as follows:– Corner handles change the width and height of the text box simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of the text box.
– Right and left selection handles change the width of the text box.
3) Click and drag the border to a new position to resize the text box. A ghosted outline of thetext box shows is displayed as the text box is resized (Figure 213).
4) Release the mouse button when the text box reaches the desired size.
5) To accurately resize a text box, use the Position and Size dialog or the Position and Sizepanel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects formore information.
6) When the text is at the required size, click outside the text box to save the changes anddeselect the text box.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key to maintain text box proportions, then click and drag aselection handle to resize. Release the mouse button before releasing the Shift key.
184 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 214: Rotating text box

Rotating text boxes1) Click on the text in a text box to activate text mode and a text box border is displayed.
2) Click on the text box border so that the selection handles are visible indicating that the
text box is now in edit mode.
3) Click again on the text border and the selection handles change shape and color.
4) Click on a corner selection handle and drag to rotate the text box. A ghosted outline of thetext box being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is shown in the status bar(Figure 214).
5) Release the mouse button when the text box is at the desired rotation angle.
6) To accurately rotate a text box, use the Rotation page in Position and Size dialog or the
Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information.

Note
When in rotation mode, the top, bottom, and side selection handles, though visible,
are not available for use for rotating a text box. Also, text boxes cannot be sheared,slanted, flipped vertically, or flipped horizontally.

Formatting text boxes
Text boxes can be treated just like other basic shapes in a drawing when formatting the area fillor borders of a box. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information on formatting thearea fill or borders of a text box.
After formatting text to match the drawing requirements, format a text box as follows so that text
appears correctly inside a text box:
1) Select a text box and use one of the following methods to open the Text dialog(Figure 215).
– Right-click on the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Text Attributes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Text in the Text dialog to open the Text page and access to the formatting
options:– Drawing Object Text – Fit width to text – expands the width of the text box to thelength of the text, if the text box is smaller than the text.
– Drawing Object Text – Fit height to text – expands the height of the text box to theheight of the text, if the text box is smaller than the text.

Text boxes | 185

Figure 215: Text dialog for text boxes - Text page

Figure 216: Text dialog for text boxes - Text Animation page
– Drawing Object Text – Fit to frame – resizes (distorts) the text to fit the entire area ofthe text box. This option is not available if Fit width to text and/or Fit height to text
options are selected.
– Spacing to Borders – specify the amount of space to leave between the text and theborders of the text box.
186 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 217: Text dialog for text boxes - Text Columns page
– Text Anchor – select one of nine positions to anchor the text within the text box.
– Full width – anchors the text to the full width of the text box. When selected, the top,
middle or bottom center positions in Text Anchor are used to anchor the text.
3) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page (Figure 216) toaccess options for animating the text. However, this is not recommended unless thedrawing is going to be displayed as part of a presentation. See the Impress Guide formore information on text animation.
4) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page (Figure 217) to accessthe options for creating columns in a text box as follows. For more information on text
columns, see “Text columns” on page 207.
a) Enter the number of columns required in the Number of columns box.
b) Enter the required spacing between columns in the Spacing box.
5) Click OK to save the changes to text attributes and close the Text dialog.
6) Move the cursor away from the text box, then click to end the text mode.

Deleting text boxes1) Click on the text box so that the selection handles are visible indicating that the text box isin edit mode.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key. The text box is deleted without any warning.

Text in Draw objects
Text can be added to most Draw objects. The exceptions are control elements, for example
buttons, polygons, curves, or 3D objects.
By default, an object is not dynamic when it is first created in Draw and does not behave like atext box. By default, text does not word wrap inside an object. To keep text within the borders ofan object, use word wrap, paragraphs, line breaks, smaller text size, increasing object size, or a
combination of all methods.
An example of adding text into a Draw object is shown in Figure 218. The left object does nothave the word wrap option applied and the right object has the word wrap option applied.
1) Create an object in a drawing and make sure the object is selected with the selection
handles displayed.
2) Enter text mode on the selected object using one of the following methods:– Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on
the Standard or Drawing toolbar.
– For horizontal text, double-click on the selected object.
– For vertical text, double-click on the selected object and click on Insert Vertical Text
on the Standard or Drawing toolbar.
Text in Draw objects | 187

Figure 218: Example of using word wrap

Figure 219: Text dialog for text in objects – Text page3) Type or paste text into the selected object.
4) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, the panels in theProperties deck on the Sidebar, or the options in Format on the Menu bar. For more
information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 191.
5) If the text goes outside the object borders, click on Text in the Text dialog to open the
Text page (Figure 219) and access to the formatting options:– Custom Shape Text – Word wrap text in shape – wraps the text so that it fits inside
the object.
– Custom Shape Text – Resize shape to fit text – resizes the object to fit the text that isbeing entered into the object.
– Spacing to Borders – specify the amount of space to leave between the text and theborders of the object.

188 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 220: Text dialog for objects - Text Animation page

Figure 221: Text dialog for objects - Text Columns page
– Text Anchor – select one of nine positions to anchor the text within the object.
– Full width – anchors the text to the full width of the object. When selected, the top,
middle or bottom center positions in Text Anchor are used to anchor the text.
6) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page (Figure 220) toaccess options for animating the text. However, this is not recommended unless thedrawing is going to be displayed as part of a presentation. See the Impress Guide formore information on text animation.
7) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page (Figure 221) to accessthe options for creating columns in a text box as follows:a) Enter the number of columns required in the Number of columns box.
b) Enter the required spacing between columns in the Spacing box.
8) Click OK to save the changes to text attributes in the object and close the Text dialog.
9) Move the cursor away from the object, then click to end the text mode.

Text in Draw objects | 189

Pasting text
Text may be inserted into a text box or object by copying text from another document and pasting
into a drawing. However, pasted text retains the formatting from the source document and may
not match the formatting of the text that has already been used on a drawing. This may matchthe text format in a drawing on some occasions, but, in most cases, it is better to make sure thattext format is consistent throughout a drawing.

Note
When using Format > Paste on the Menu bar, or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V, topaste copied text directly into a drawing and not into an object, the text is pasted as
an OLE object and not as a Draw object. It is recommended to paste text into Draw
as unformatted text to create a text object in Draw.
It is good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later so it matches the
text already in a drawing.
1) Copy the text and paste it as unformatted text into a drawing using one of the following
methods:– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Unformatted Text on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Special on the Menu bar and the Paste Special
dialog (Figure 222) opens. Select the option Unformatted text and click OK to closethe dialog.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Control+Shift+V and the Paste Special dialog opens. Selectthe option Unformatted text and click OK to close the dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Paste on the Standard toolbar and selectUnformatted text from the context menu.
2) The unformatted text is pasted into a text box at the cursor position or inside a selected
object and formatted to the default drawing style. Format the pasted text to the drawing
requirements or apply a drawing style. For more information, see “Formatting text” below.

Figure 222: Paste Special dialog

190 | Draw Guide 7.2

Formatting text
Text formatting can give a drawing a more consistent and professional look without any
distracting elements. Text formatting tools are available on the Text Formatting toolbar anddrop-down menus in Format on the Menu bar. For more information on text formatting, see theWriter Guide.
If there are several text boxes and/or objects in a drawing that require the same text formatting, it
is recommended to use drawing styles. For more information on using and creating styles, see
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes.

Quick font resizing
After selecting text, the font size can be quickly increased or decreased using the tools Increase
Font Size (Ctrl+]) and Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) on the Text Formatting toolbar. The amountby which the font size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use.

Selecting text
Text must be selected before it can be formatted using one of the following methods. Any
formatting changes apply only to the selected text.
•

To format all the text in a text box or object, click once on the border of the text box orobject to display the selection handles. Any formatting changes then apply to all text inthe text box or object.

•

To format only part of the text, select text using one of the following methods:– Click in the text and drag the cursor over the text to highlight the text.
– Double-click on text to select a complete word or triple-click to select a wholeparagraph.
– Click in the text, then press and hold the Shift key and use the keyboard arrow keys toselect text.

Text formatting
Text formatting can be applied directly to characters, words, sentences, and paragraphs. Direct
formatting to text overrides any formatting that has been applied using styles.
1) Select the text for formatting.
2) Format the selected text using one of the following methods:– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the drop-downmenu. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context menu or a dialog providing
further formatting options to apply to the selected text.
– Use the options in the Paragraph and Character dialogs.
– Use the options in the Paragraph and Character panels in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.
3) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Paragraph dialog
The Paragraph dialog (Figure 223) is used to format paragraphs of text.
1) Click anywhere in the paragraph that is to be formatted.

Formatting text | 191

Figure 223: Paragraph dialog - Indents & Spacing page2) Use one of the following methods to open the Paragraph dialog.
– Right-click on the selected text and select Paragraph from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options on the tabbed pages of the Paragraph dialog to format the text.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Paragraph dialog.
5) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Indents and spacing options
The Indents & Spacing page (Figure 223) in the Paragraph dialog has three main sections:•

Indent – specifies the amount of space to leave between the left and the right pagemargins and the paragraph.
– Before text – enter the amount of space required to indent the paragraph from thepage margin. If the paragraph extends into the page margin, enter a negative number.
– After text – enter the amount of space required to indent the paragraph from the pagemargin. If the paragraph is to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number.
– First line – indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount entered. To create anegative hanging indent enter a positive value for Before text and a negative value forFirst line. To create a positive hanging indent enter a positive value for Before text anda larger positive value for First line.
– Automatic – when selected, automatically indents a paragraph according to the fontsize and the line spacing. The setting value for First line is ignored.

•

Spacing – specifies the amount of space to leave between paragraphs.
– Above paragraph – enter the amount of space required above a paragraph.

192 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Below paragraph – enter the amount of space required below a paragraph.
– Do not add space between paragraphs of the same style – when selected, only thespacing below a paragraph is applied when the preceding and following paragraphs
are of the same paragraph style.
•Line spacing – specifies the amount of space to leave between lines of text in aparagraph. The options available from the drop-down list are as follows:– Single – applies single line spacing to a paragraph. This is the default setting.
– 1.15 Lines – sets the line spacing to 1.15 lines.
– 1.5 Lines – sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines.
– Double – sets the line spacing to two lines.
– Proportional – select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where
100% corresponds to single line spacing.
– At Least – sets the minimum line spacing to the value entered in the box. If different
font sizes are used within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to
the largest font size. If identical spacing is required for all lines, specify a value that
corresponds to the largest font size.
– Leading – sets the vertical space height that is inserted between two lines.
– Fixed – enter a fixed value to be used for line spacing.

Tip
Setting the line spacing to less than 100% is a good method to place a lot of text into
a text box or object when space is limited. However, care must be taken as too small
a value will make the text hard to read.

Tip
Change the default unit of measurement in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress> General on the Menu bar.

Asian Typography options
The Asian Typography page (Figure 224) is only available when Asian options are enabled inTools > Options > Language Settings > Languages on the Menu bar. The Line Change
options are as follows:•

Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of lines – prevents thecharacters in the list from starting or ending a line. Characters are relocated to either theprevious line or the next line. To edit restricted characters that start or end a line, go toTools > Options > LibreOffice > Language Settings > Asian Layout on the Menu bar.

Figure 224: Paragraph dialog - Asian Typography page

Formatting text | 193

•Allow hanging punctuation – prevents commas and periods from breaking the line.
Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.

•

Apply spacing between Asian and non-Asian text – inserts a space between Asian and
non-Asian characters.

Tab options
Use the Tabs page (Figure 225) to create, edit, or delete the tab stops in a text box or object.
The options are as follow:•

Position – enter a measurement in the text box to set the position of a tab in a text box.
Any tabs already created are listed in the preview box below the measurement setting.

•Type – determines the type of tab used.
– Left – aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. If
Asian language support is enabled in LibreOffice Preferences, this tab stop is called
Left/Top.
– Right – aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the leftof the tab stop. If Asian language support is enabled in LibreOffice Preferences, thistab stop is called Right/Bottom.
– Centered – aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
– Decimal – aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop. The
numbers to the left of the decimal point are aligned to the left of the tab. The numbers
to the right of the decimal point are aligned to the right of the tab.
– Character – enter a character to use as a decimal separator when using decimal tabs.

•

Fill character – specifies the type of character inserted between the tab insertion point
and the tab stop.
– None – no fill characters are inserted between the tab insertion point and the tab stop.
It also removes any existing fill characters between the tab insertion point and the tabstop.
– Dots...... – inserts dots between the tab insertion point and the tab stop.
– Dashes----- – inserts dashes between the tab insertion point and the tab stop.
– Line______ – draws a line between the tab insertion point and the tab stop.
– Character – specify a character for insertion between the tab insertion point and thetab stop.

Figure 225: Paragraph dialog - Tabs page194 | Draw Guide 7.2

Creating tabs
1) Select the text box so that the selection handles on the text box border or object are
displayed.
2) Right-click on the selected text box or object and select Paragraph from the context
menu or go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar to open the Paragraph dialog.
3) Click on Tabs to open the Tabs page in the Paragraph dialog.
4) Enter the position measurement for the tab stop in the Position text box.
5) Select the type of tab from the options in Type.

Note
If the type is set to Decimal, the default character used is the character used for
decimal points in the computer setup. If required, specify the character to be used as
the decimal point In Character box.
6) Select the type of Fill Character. The fill character is inserted between the tab insertion
point and the tab stop.
7) Click on New to create the new tab stop in the text box. The new tab stop appears in the
Position preview box.
8) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
9) To use the new tab stop in more than one text paragraph in a text box or object:– Modify or update the drawing style used for the text.
– Create a custom drawing style and apply it to the text.

Editing tabs
1) Select the text box so that the selection handles on the text box border or object are
displayed.
2) Right-click on the selected text box or object and select Paragraph from the context
menu or go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar to open the Paragraph dialog.
3) Click on Tabs to open the Tabs page in the Paragraph dialog.
4) Select the tab for editing in the Position preview box.
5) To change the tab position, type, or fill character, delete the selected tab first and create a
new tab with the required changes.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
7) If necessary, update the drawing style used for the text.

Deleting tabs
1) Select the text box so that the selection handles on the text box border or object are
displayed.
2) Right-click on the selected text box or object and select Paragraph from the context
menu or go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar to open the Paragraph dialog.
3) Click on Tabs to open the Tabs page in the Paragraph dialog.
4) Select the tab for deletion in the Position preview box.
5) Click on Delete to delete the selected tab, or click Delete All to delete all the tab stops
that are set for the selected text box or object.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Formatting text | 195

Figure 226: Paragraph dialog - Alignment page

Alignment options
Use the Alignment page (Figure 226) to determine the text alignment in text boxes or objects:•

Options– Left – aligns text to the left margin of the text box. If Asian language support isenabled, this option is named Left/Top.
– Right – aligns text to the right margin of the text box. If Asian language support isenabled, this option is named Right/Bottom.
– Center – aligns the text to the center of in the text box.
– Justified – aligns the text to the left and to the right margins of the text box.

•

Text-to-text– Alignment – provides alignment options for oversized or undersized characters in the
text relative to the rest of the text.

•

Properties– Text direction – specifies the text direction for text that uses Complex Text Layout(CTL) and is only available if this option is enabled.

•

Preview field – displays a preview of how the text will appear in the text box.

Sidebar Paragraph panel
An alternative method of formatting paragraphs is to use the Paragraph panel (Figure 227) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options are limited, but are similar in use to theformatting options in the various pages of the Paragraph dialog. Any formatting applied to aparagraph using the Sidebar is immediate.

196 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 227: Paragraph panel in Properties deck on
Sidebar1) Click anywhere in the paragraph that is to be formatted.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) If necessary, click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Paragraph title bar to open
the Paragraph panel.
4) Format the text using the various tools in the Paragraph panel. See “Paragraph dialog”
on page 191 for more information on formatting options.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Paragraphdialog to format text.
The text formatting options in the Paragraph panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar are as
follows. Most of these tools are also available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
•

Align Left, Align Center, Align Right, Justified – determines how text is aligned to thetext box or object margins.

•

Left-To-Right, Right-To-Left – only available when Complex Text Layout (CTL) options
have been selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages.

•

Align Top, Center Vertically, Align Bottom – aligns text to the top, center or bottom ofa text box or object. This is similar to vertical alignment of data within a table cell.

•

Increase Paragraph Spacing, Decrease Paragraph Spacing – increases or decreases
the spacing above and below the selected text.

•

Above Paragraph Spacing, Below Paragraph Spacing – increases or decreases the
spacing either above or below selected text. Enter the amount of spacing required in the
text box.

•

Set Line Spacing – adjust the spacing between the lines of selected text. Click on thetriangle ▼ to the right of the icon and select the type of line spacing required from thedrop-down list.

•

Increase Indent, Decrease Indent – each click increases or decreases the indent levelof selected text by the default value for Draw. To specify indent measurements, enter avalue in Before Text Indent, After Text Indent or First Line Indent boxes.

•

Hanging Indent – sets a different indent for the first line of text to the indent set for awhole paragraph of text as follows:– Enter a negative value in First Line Indent to reduce the indent of the first line of text.
Formatting text | 197

– Enter a positive value in First Line Indent to increase the indent of the first line of text.
– First click sets a negative hanging indent and a second click sets a positive hanging
indent.
– This tool is only active when a Before text indent has been set for the paragraph oftext.
– To remove a hanging indent, set the value in the First line box to zero.

Character formatting
Direct or manual character formatting can be applied to individual characters and words. Direct
character formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied using direct text formatting
and drawing styles.
1) Select the characters for formatting, see “Selecting text” on page 191 for more
information.
2) Format characters using one of the following methods.
– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar. Formatting applied tocharacter(s) is immediate.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context
menu or dialog where further formatting options are selected.
– Use the options available in the Character dialog. Clicking OK on the dialog applies
the formatting changes.
– Use the options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar. Formatting applied to character(s) is immediate.
3) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Character dialog
1) Select the characters for formatting and open the Character dialog (Figure 228) using oneof the following methods:– Right-click on the characters and select Character from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
2) Use the options on the tabbed pages of the Character dialog to format the selectedcharacters.
3) Click OK to apply the formatting changes and close the dialog.
4) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Fonts options
In Western Text Font on the Fonts page (Figure 228), select the font family, typeface (Italic,
Bold, and so on), size, and language. A sample of the font is displayed in the preview box in thelower part of the dialog.
If support for Asian language or Complex Text Layout (CTL) has been enabled in Tools >Options > Language Settings > Languages, then character formatting options are alsoavailable for Asian Text Font or CTL Font.

Note
The number of typefaces available depends on the font family that is selected.

198 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 228: Character dialog - Fonts page

Tip
When creating a drawing in multiple languages, use the language setting to createstyles that only differ in the language in formatting attributes. This allows for spellingchecks of all of the drawing contents without affecting appearance.

Font Effects options
The options on the Font Effects page (Figure 229) apply font color, text decoration and effects tothe selected text or characters. A sample of the font effect is displayed in the preview box in thelower part of the dialog.
•

Font Color– Font color – sets the color for the selected text. Select a color from one of theavailable palettes. If Automatic is selected, the text color is set to black for lightbackgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
– Transparency – sets the transparency of the selected text. Enter a value in the text
box. 100% entirely transparent, 0% no transparency.

Formatting text | 199

Figure 229: Character dialog - Font Effects page•

Text Decoration– Overlining – select the over lining style from the drop-down list and the over liningcolor from one of the available palettes. If Automatic is selected, the color is set toblack for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
– Strikethrough – select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
– Underlining – select the underlining style from the drop-down list and the underliningcolor from one of the available palettes. If Automatic is selected, the color is set toblack for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
– Individual words – when selected, any over lining or underlining is applied to words
only and spaces are ignored.

•

Effects– Case – select a capitalization effect from the drop-down list.
– Relief – select a relief effect for the selected text. Embossed relief makes thecharacters appear as if they are raised above the page. Engraved relief makes thecharacters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
– Emphasis mark – select a character to display over or below the entire length of theselected text.

200 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Position – specifies where to display the emphasis marks. Either above the text or
below the text.

Position options
The options on the Position page (Figure 230) allows setting of the position, scaling, andspacing of selected text.
•

Position – sets the subscript or superscript options for a character.
– Normal – removes superscript or subscript formatting.
– Superscript – reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above thebaseline.
– Subscript – reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below thebaseline.
– Raise/lower by – enter the amount to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to
the baseline. 100% is equal to the height of the font.
– Relative font size – enter the amount to reduce the font size of the selected text.
– Automatic – sets the amount by which the selected text is automatically raised or
lowered in relation to the baseline.

•

Scaling– Scale width – enter a percentage of the font width to horizontally stretch or compress
the selected text.

•

Spacing – specifies the spacing between individual characters.
– Character spacing – specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text.
Enter the amount to expand or condense the text in the text box or object. To increase
spacing, set a positive value; to reduce spacing, set a negative value.
– Pair kerning – automatically adjusts the character spacing for specific letter
combinations. Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires printersupport for this option.

Figure 230: Character dialog - Position page

Formatting text | 201

Figure 231: Character dialog - Highlighting page

Highlighting options
The options on the Highlighting page (Figure 231) allows highlighting of text so that thecharacters are different color to the rest of the text in the text box or object.
•

Colors – select a highlight color from one of the available palettes.

•

Active – shows the present color of the text and the Red, Green and Blue (RGB) settings
for the present color.

•

New – shows the highlight color of the text that has been selected in Colors and theRed, Green and Blue (RGB) settings for the new color. The color can also be selected bychanging the values in the RGB boxes or using the Pick a Color dialog when Pick is
selected.

Sidebar Character panel
An alternative method of formatting text is to use the Character panel (Figure 232) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options available in the Character panel are
limited, but are similar in use to the formatting options available in the various pages of the
Character dialog. Most of the options are also available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
1) Select a text box or object so that the selection handles on the border are displayed.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Character title bar to open the Character
section.
4) Format the text using the tools in the Character panel. See “Character dialog” onpage 198 for more information on formatting options.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Character
dialog to format text.

202 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 232: Character panel in Properties deck on
Sidebar
The text formatting options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar are as follows:•

Font Name and Font Size – select the font family and size from the drop-down lists.

•

Bold and Italic – applies a bold or italic typeface to the selected text.

•

Underline – underlines the selected text. Click on the triangle ▼ to the right and selectthe type of underlining from the drop-down list. Click More Options at the bottom of thisdrop-down list to open the Character dialog.

•

Strikethrough – draws a line through the selected text.

•

Toggle Shadow – adds a shadow to the selected text.

•

Increase Font Size and Decrease Font Size – each click increases or reduces the sizeof the selected characters by the same amount. Actual size depends on the computer
setup.

•

Font Color and Character Highlight Color – click on the triangle ▼ to the right of theseicons and select a color from the available palettes.

•

Set Character Spacing – click on the triangle ▼ to the right of this tool and select thetype of spacing between characters required. Spacing between characters is also known
as kerning. A custom value for character spacing can also be set.

•

Superscript – reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above thebaseline.

•

Subscript – reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below thebaseline.

Bullet or numbered lists
Bulleted and numbered lists can be created in text boxes and objects. However, when creating
lists in objects, please remember that Draw objects are not dynamic and do not automatically
expand as a list is created.

Note
Creating bulleted or numbered lists in Draw is similar to LibreOffice Writer, but thefunctionality in Draw has been reduced.

Bullet or numbered lists | 203

Figure 233: Lists panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 234: More Bullets list

Figure 235: More Numbering lists

204 | Draw Guide 7.2

Creating lists
Bulleted or numbered lists can be created in text boxes or Draw objects as follows:
1) Select all of the text required for a list.
2) Create a list using one of the following methods and default settings for lists:– Click on Toggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting
toolbar.
– Click on Toggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List in the Lists panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 233).
– Go to Format > Lists > Unordered List or Ordered List on the Menu bar.
3) To change the format of the list, click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the list icons andselect a list style from the options available in the pop-up More Bullets dialog(Figures 234) or More Numbering dialog (Figure 235).

Adjusting list item level and position
Each item in an unordered or ordered list can have its level demoted or promoted within a list, or
moved up or down in list order as follows:
1) Click on a list item to demote, promote, or move up or down.
2) To demote a list item one level at a time, use one of the following methods:– Use the Tab key.
– Go to Format > Lists > Demote on the Menu bar.
– Use Demote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) To promote a list item one level at a time, use one of the following methods:– Use the key combination Shift+Tab.
– Go to Format > Lists > Promote on the Menu bar.
– Use Promote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
4) To change the position of a list item in the list order, use one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Lists > Move Up or Move Down on the Menu bar.
– Use Move Up or Move Down in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.

Bullets and Numbering dialog
Use the Bullets and Numbering dialog (Figure 236) for more control over the format of a list.
Select text in a text box or object and open the dialog using one of the following methods:•

Go to Format > Bullets and Numbering on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on the selected text and select Bullets and Numbering from the context
menu.

•

Click on More Options on the right side of Lists panel title bar in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar.

•

Click on More Bullets or More Numbering after clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right ofToggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting toolbar or in the
Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Bullet or numbered lists | 205

Figure 236: Bullets and Numbering dialog
The following options are available in the Bullets and Numbering dialog.
•

Level – select the level(s) required to define the formatting options for a list. The selectedlevels are highlighted in the preview.

•

Properties– Type – select the style for the list indicator from the drop-down list. When Graphic isselected as Type, select an image from a file or the Gallery.
– Character – when Bullet is selected as Type, select the character from the Special
Characters dialog that opens.
– Color – select a color for the list indicator from the palettes available.
– Start at – when a numeric style list is selected in Type, enter a starting number for thecurrent level. Default starting number is 1.

•

Separator – this option becomes available when a numeric style list is selected in Type.
– Before – enter a character or text to display in front of the number in the list. For
example, to create a list that uses the style (1, enter ( in this box.
– After – enter a character or text to display behind the number in the list. For example,
to create a list that uses the style A), enter ) in this box.

206 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

Size
– Rel. Size – enter a percentage amount to resize the list indicator in relation to the fontheight of the current list.
– Width – only available when Graphic is selected as Type. Enter a width for thegraphic.
– Height – only available when Graphic is selected as Type. Enter a height for thegraphic.
– Keep ratio – only available when Graphic is selected as Type. Maintains the size
proportions of the graphic.

•

Position– Indent – sets the indent measurement of the list point and the margin.
– Width – set the indent measurement of the between the list indicator and the text inthe list point. For example, this option is useful when large numbers are used in a list.
– Relative – select this option to measure the indent value relative to the previous leveland not from the margin.
– Alignment – sets the paragraph alignment for the list indicator.

•

Scope
– Page – applies the changes to the drawing.
– Selection – applies the changes only to the selected text.

•

Preview – displays how the list will look when changes to the format are used.

Text columns
Text in a drawing can be formatted into columns inside text boxes and objects. However, columns
cannot be used on separate parts of text inside a text box or object. The whole of the text box orobject has to be used for columns.
The type of columns used in Draw are continuous flow columns. This means that when text
reaches the bottom of a column it will automatically flow into the next column as text is added.
This type of columns is also known as newspaper columns.

Text boxes1) Click the border of a text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.

Figure 237: Text dialog - Text Columns page

Text columns | 207

Figure 238: Columns panel in Properties deck on Sidebar2) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:– Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open
the Text dialog, the click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 237),– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel(Figure 238).
3) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
4) Save the changes and deselect the text box using one of the following methods:– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then clickoutside the text box to deselect it.
– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the text
box to deselect it and save the changes.

Note
Any text inside a text box or drawing object will automatically flow into column format
when the changes are saved.

Drawing objects
1) Click on an object to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe object is in edit mode.
2) Double-click on the selected object to switch on text edit mode.
3) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:– Right-click in the drawing object and select Text Attributes from the context menu to
open the Text dialog, the click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns
page (Figure 237),– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel(Figure 238).
4) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
5) Save the changes and deselect the object using one of the following methods:– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then clickoutside the object to deselect it.

208 | Draw Guide 7.2

– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the object
to deselect it and save the changes.
6) Double-click again on the object to switch on text edit mode.
7) Type in the required text or use copy and paste to enter the required text. Any text
entered will be in column format.
8) If necessary, format the text to the drawing requirements.
9) Click outside the object to deselect it and save the changes.

Using tables
Tables are a powerful mechanism to convey structured information quickly when used in a
drawing. Tables can be added directly to a drawing eliminating the need to embed a Calc
spreadsheet or a Writer text table. However, in some circumstances, it makes sense to embed a
spreadsheet into a drawing, especially when greater functionality is required in the table. The
tables provided by Draw do have a limited functionality.

Inserting tables
Tables are placed at the center of a drawing and cannot be placed into objects or shapes. Also,
unlike text boxes and other objects, tables cannot be rotated.
1) To create and insert a table using the Insert Table dialog (Figure 239):a) Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar to open the Insert Table dialog.
b) Enter the number of rows and columns required.
c) Click OK to insert the table into the center of a drawing and close the dialog.
2) Alternatively, to create and insert a table using the Table grid (Figure 240):a) Click on Table on the Standard toolbar to open the Table grid.
b) Click and drag the cursor until the required number of columns and rows are
selected,c) Click again to insert the table into the center of a drawing and close the Table grid.
d) If necessary, click on More Options to open the Insert Table dialog to select the
number of rows and columns required.
3) Move the table into position by clicking on the border and dragging it to its new position.

Figure 239: Insert Table dialog

Using tables | 209

Figure 240: Table grid

Figure 241: Table Design panel in Properties deck on
Sidebar

Note
When inserting tables into a drawing, the table is created using the default style withsettings already applied. Currently these defaults are hard coded in LibreOffice. The
table can be formatted to the drawing requirements after insertion.

Table Design panel
Several predefined table designs are provided in the Table Design panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar (Figure 241). The Table Design panel is only available when a table is selected.
1) Insert a table into a drawing or select a table in a drawing.
210 | Draw Guide 7.2

2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel, or click on Table Design on the Table toolbar.
3) Select a design for the table and the types of rows and columns from the available
options.
The following options for rows and columns are available in the Table Design panel:•

Header row – selected by default. The first row is normally a header row and is displayedwith a different background from the rest of the table.

•

Total row – if selected, changes the background of the last row to make it stand out fromother rows.

•

Banded rows – selected by default. Alternate rows have different backgrounds making iteasier to read data entered into the rows.

•

First column – when selected, highlights the first column of the table using a darker
background.

•

Last column – when selected, highlights the last column of the table using a darker
background.

•

Banded columns – when selected, alternate columns are highlighted with dark and lightcolors.

Table formatting
After inserting a table, it can be formatted using the tools and options available on the Table
toolbar, by going to Format > Table on the Menu bar, or using the options available in the Table
Properties dialog.

Table toolbar
The Table toolbar (Figure 242) automatically opens when a table is selected providing tools forcreating and formatting a table. The default position for the toolbar, when it is first opened, isdocked at the bottom of the Workspace.
•

Table – inserts a new table in a drawing using the Insert Table dialog or the Table grid.
See “Inserting tables” above for more information on inserting tables.

•

Border Style – changes the line style of the borders of selected cells. Click on thetriangle ▼ next to the icon to open a drop-down list and select from a range of predefinedstyles.

•Border Color – changes the color of the borders of selected cells. Click on thetriangle ▼ next to the icon to open access to the LibreOffice color palettes. Select a color
from a range of predefined palettes or create a custom color.

•

Borders – selects a predefined border configuration for the selected cells. Click on thetriangle ▼ next to the icon to open a drop-down list to select a border configuration.

Figure 242: Table toolbar

Using tables | 211

Figure 243: Split Cells dialog•

Area Style/Filling – select the cells to be filled, then select the type of fill from thedrop-down list: None, Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap or Pattern.

•

Fill Color – select a fill option from the drop-down menu. The fill options change to show
the fillings available for each Area Style/Filling type.

•

Merge Cells – merges the selected cells into one cell. Note that the contents of themerged cells are also merged. Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and selectMerge Cells from the context menu.

•

Split Cells – splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make
sure that the cursor is positioned on the cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split
Cells dialog (Figure 243).
In the Split Cells dialog, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell andwhether to split the cell horizontally or vertically. If necessary, when splitting horizontally,
select Into equal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents of the split cell are
kept in the original cell (left or top cell).

•Optimize – evenly distributes the selected rows and columns in a table either horizontallyor vertically. Clicking on Optimize opens the Optimize toolbar (Figure 244) whichcontains the following tools:

Figure 244: Optimize toolbar– Minimal Row Height – determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal
row height depends on the font size of the smallest character in the row.
– Minimal Column Width – defines the minimal column width for selected columns.
Minimal column width depends on the shortest entry within a column.
– Optimal Row Height – determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal
row height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row.
– Optimal Column Width – defines the optimal column width for selected columns.
Optimal column width depends on the longest entry within a column.
– Distribute Rows Equally – adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the heightof the tallest row in the selection.

212 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Distribute Columns Evenly – adjusts the width of the selected columns to match thewidth of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed
the width of the page.
•

Align Top, Center Vertically, Align Bottom – sets the vertical alignment of text inselected cells.

•

Insert Row Above, Insert Row Below – click in a cell or cells to select rows and use
these two tools to insert a row or rows above or below the selected rows. Alternatively,
right-click on the selected rows and select Insert > Insert Row Above or Insert Row
Below.

•

Insert Column Before, Insert Column After – click in a cell or cells to select columns
and use these two tools to insert a column or columns before or after the selectedcolumns. Alternatively, right-click on the selected columns and select Insert > Insert
Column Before or Insert Insert Column After.

•

Delete Row, Delete Column, Delete Table – click in a cell or cells to select rows orcolumns, then click on a tool to delete the selected rows or columns. To delete the wholetable, place the cursor in a cell and select Delete Table. Alternatively, right-click on theselected cells and select Delete > Delete Row or Delete Column or Delete Table fromthe context menu.

•

Select Table, Select Column, Select Row – select a table, column, or row if the same
attributes are going to be applied to a table, column, or row.

•

Table Design – click on this tool and open the Table Design panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar. See “Table Design panel” on page 210 for more information.

•

Table Properties – click on this tool and open the Table Properties dialog. Alternatively,
right-click on the table and select Table Properties from the context menu.

Menu bar
Table formatting tools are also available by going to Format > Table on the Menu bar andselecting a formatting option from the submenu that opens.
•

Minimal Row Height – determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal
row height depends on the font size of the smallest character in the row.

•

Optimal Row Height – determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal row
height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row.

•

Distribute Columns Evenly – adjusts the width of the selected columns to match thewidth of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed thewidth of the page.

•

Select Row – selects the row or rows where cells have been selected in the table.

•

Insert Rows – inserts rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.

•

Delete Row – deletes rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.

•

Minimal Column Width – defines the minimal column width for selected columns.
Minimal column width depends on the shortest entry within a column.

•

Optimal Column Width – defines the optimal column width for selected columns.
Optimal column width depends on the longest entry within a column.

•

Distribute Columns Evenly – adjusts the width of the selected columns to match thewidth of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed thewidth of the page.

•

Select Column – selects the column or columns where cells have been selected in thetable.

Using tables | 213

•Insert Columns – inserts columns in the table where cells have been selected in thetable.

•

Delete Column – deletes columns in the table where cells have been selected in thetable.

•

Merge Cells – merges the selected cells into one cell. Note that the contents of themerged cells are also merged. Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and selectMerge Cells from the context menu.

•

Split Cells – splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make
sure that the cursor is positioned on the cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split
Cells dialog.

•

Delete Table – to delete the whole table, place the cursor in a cell and select Delete
Table. Alternatively, right-click on the selected cells and select Delete Table from thecontext menu.

•

Select... – selects the whole table.

•

Properties… – opens the Table Properties dialog.

Figure 245: Table Properties dialog - Font page214 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 246: Table Properties dialog - Font Effects page

Table Properties dialog
The Table Properties dialog has five tabbed pages that provide formatting options for Font, Font
Effects, Borders, Background, and Shadow. To open the Table Properties dialog use one of
the following methods:•

Right-click in a table and select Table Properties from the context menu.

•

Go to Format > Table > Properties on the Menu bar.

•

Click on Table Properties on the Table toolbar.

The formatting options on each dialog page are as follows:•

Font (Figure 245) – select the required Family, Style, Size and Language for text in thetable. A sample of the font selected is displayed in the preview box.

•

Font Effects (Figure 246) – select the required Font Color, Text Decoration andEffects for the text in the table. A sample of the font effects applied to the text is
displayed in the preview box.

•

Borders (Figure 247) – select the required Line Arrangement, Line and Padding forthe table and cell borders. These options are similar to the tools Border Style, Border
Color and Borders on the Table toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes formore information on the lines used for table and cell borders.

Using tables | 215

Figure 247: Table Properties dialog - Borders page

Figure 248: Table Properties dialog - Background page216 | Draw Guide 7.2

•Background (Figure 248) – select a background as the area fill for the table and/or
selected cells. This dialog page provides the same functions as Area Style/Filling toolson the Table toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information onarea style and filling used for table and cell backgrounds.

•

Shadow (Figure 249) – adds a shadow to the table. The options adjust the look andposition of the shadow. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information
on table shadows.

Figure 249: Table Properties dialog - Shadow page

Figure 250: Position and Size dialog
Using tables | 217

Table position and size
Tables are placed into boxes when created and are treated just like any other object in a drawing.
However, only the Position and Size dialog (Figure 250) can be used for tables. Some options
are greyed out and are not available for tables. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more
information on position and size.
After selecting the table, open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods:•

Right-click on the table and select Position and Size from the context menu.

•

Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.

•

Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

Also, table position can be changed by dragging with the cursor and text box size can bechanged by dragging one of the selection handles. See “Text boxes” on page 183 for more
information.

Note
When the size of a table box is changed, the table and cell contents also increases
or decreases in size to match the box size.

Deleting tables
Whole table
Make sure the table is selected and the selection handles are visible on the table border, thendelete the table using one of the following methods:•

Go to Format > Table > Delete Table on the Menu bar.

•

Select Delete Table on the Table toolbar.

•

Right-click on the table and select Delete > Delete Table from the context menu.

Row or column
Click in a table cell, then delete the table row or column using one of the following methods.
Make sure the table selection handles are not be displayed.
•

Go to Format > Table > Delete Row or Delete Column on the Menu bar•

Select Delete Row or Delete Column on the Table toolbar.

•

Right-click and select Delete > Delete Row or Delete Column from the context menu.

Cell contents
Delete cell contents in a table as follows:
1) Select the cell or cells.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key on the keyboard.

Using fields
Fields allow for the automatic insertion of text into a drawing. Fields are commonly used whencreating templates and drawing masters. For more information on templates and masterdrawings, see Chapter 11, Advanced Drawing Techniques.

218 | Draw Guide 7.2

Inserting fields
A text box is created when a field is inserted into the center of a drawing and can be repositioned
just like any other text box. See “Text boxes” on page 183 for more information.
1) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the type of field.
2) If necessary, position and resize the field text box. See “Text boxes” on page 183 for more
information.
3) If necessary, format the text used for the field information. See “Formatting text” onpage 191 for more information.

Field types
The fields available in Draw are as follows:•

Date (fixed) – inserts the current date into a drawing as a fixed field. The date is not
automatically updated. Available date formats depend on the language setting in Tools >Options > Language Settings > Language. Right-click on the date field and select therequired date format from the context menu.

•

Date (variable) – inserts the current date into a drawing as a variable field. The date is
automatically updated each time the file is opened. Available date formats depend on thelanguage setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language. Right-click on
the date field and select the required date format from the context menu.

•

Time (fixed) – inserts the current time into a drawing as a fixed field. The time is not
automatically updated. Available time formats depend on the language setting in Tools >Options > Language Settings > Language. Right-click on the time field and select therequired time format from the context menu.

•

Time (variable) – inserts the current time into a drawing as a variable field. The time isautomatically updated each time the file is opened. Available time formats depend on thelanguage setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language. Right-click on
the time field and select the required time format from the context menu.

•

Author – inserts the first and last names of the author of the drawing. This information istaken from values entered in the LibreOffice user data. To modify this information go toTools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data.

•

Page Number – inserts the page number into the current drawing. Alternatively, go toInsert > Page Number on the Menu bar. If a page number is to be added to every pagein the drawing, go to View > Master on the Menu bar and insert the page number field.

•

Page Title – inserts the page title. The default name is Page # if the page has not beenrenamed.

•Page Count – inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.

•

File Name – inserts the name of the file used for the drawing. The file name only appears
after the file has been saved.

Using hyperlinks
When inserting text that can be used as a hyperlink (for example, a website address or URL),
Draw formats it automatically, creating the hyperlink and applying color and underlining.

Using hyperlinks | 219

Tip
To prevent LibreOffice from automatically turning website addresses or URLs into
hyperlinks, go to Tools > AutoCorrect Options > Options on the Menu bar anddeselect URL Recognition.

Tip
To change the color of hyperlinks, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >Application Colors, scroll to Unvisited links and/or Visited links, select thecheckboxes, then select new colors from the color palettes for the links and click OK.
Note this color change changes the color for all hyperlinks across all components ofLibreOffice.

Inserting hyperlinks
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K to open
the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 251).
3) Select the type of hyperlink required and the required options. See “Hyperlink types”
below for hyperlink types and the options available for each type.
4) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save your selections. If several hyperlinks arebeing created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Hyperlink dialog.

Figure 251: Hyperlink dialog

220 | Draw Guide 7.2

Hyperlink types
On the left side, select one of the four types of hyperlinks. The dialog changes according to thetype of hyperlink selected.
•

Internet – select whether the link is Web or FTP. Enter the required web address (URL)
and any necessary text.

•

Mail – enter the recipient details and subject for the email.

•Document– Enter the file path for the document, or click on Open File to open a file browser.
Leave this blank if the link is to a target in the same drawing.
– Specify a target, for example. a specific page in a drawing. Click on Target to open
the Target in Document dialog, where a target can be selected. If the name of thetarget is known, enter its name into the box.
– If necessary, enter the URL of the document. These hyperlinks are commonly referred
to as a bookmark.

•New Document – creates a hyperlink to a new document.
– Select Edit now to edit the newly created document immediately, or Edit later to create
a new document and edit it later.
– Select the type of document to create (text, spreadsheet, etc.).
– Click on Select path to open a file browser and navigate to the folder where the new
document is going to be saved.

The Further Settings section in the Hyperlink dialog is common to all the hyperlink types,
although some options are more relevant to some types of links.
•

Frame – determines how the hyperlink opens. This applies to documents that open in a
Web browser.

•

Form – specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button.

•

Text – specifies what text is visible to the user.

•

Name – applicable to HTML documents. It specifies the text added as a NAME attributein the HTML code behind the hyperlink.

Editing text hyperlinks
1) Select the hyperlink.
2) Go to Edit > Hyperlink on the Menu bar to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Make editing changes using the available options, then click Apply when done. If several
hyperlinks are to be edited, click Apply after editing each hyperlink.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Image maps
An image map defines areas of the image (called hotspots) associated with a URL (a web
address or a file on the computer). Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks. In
Draw, clicking on a hotspot opens the linked page in the appropriate program (for example,
default browser for HTML pages; LibreOffice Writer for ODT files; PDF viewer for PDF files).
Hotspots can be created in various shapes, such as rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, andinclude several hotspots in the same image. When a hotspot is clicked on, the URL opens in abrowser window or frame that has been specified. The text that appears when the cursor hovers
over a hotspot can also be specified.
Image maps | 221

Figure 252: Image Map Editor dialog

Creating image maps
1) Select an image in a drawing to use as a hotspot.
2) Go to Tools > ImageMap on the Menu bar to open the Image Map Editor dialog(Figure 252). The main part of the dialog shows the selected image where hotspots will
be defined.
3) Select the type of hotspot area required from the icons at the top of the Image Map Editor
dialog – Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Freeform Polygon.
4) Draw the hotspot area onto the selected image.
5) Enter the hyperlink address for the hotspot in the Address text box using the addressformat: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.
6) Click on Apply to apply the settings.
7) Click on Save to save the image map to a file, then close the Image Map Editor dialog.

Image map tools
The ImageMap Editor contains the following tools:•

Apply – applies the changes.

•

Open – loads into the Image Map Editor an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAPNCSA or SIP StarView image map file format.

•

Save – saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView image
map file format.

222 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

Select – selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.

•

Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Freeform Polygon – draws a hotspot on the selected
image in the shape selected.

•

Edit Points – change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.

•

Move Points – move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.

•

Insert Points – adds an anchor point at the selected point on the outline of the hotspot.

•

Delete Points – deletes a selected anchor point.

•

Undo – cancels the previous action.

•

Redo – reapplies the previous cancelled action.

•

Active – toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive.

•

Macro – assign a macro that runs when the hotspot is clicked on.

•

Properties – define the properties of the selected hotspot.

•

Address – enter the URL for the file that opens when the selected hotspot is clicked on.
The address format to be used: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.

•

Text – enter the text that is displayed when the cursor rests on the hotspot . If no text isentered, the Address is displayed.

•

Frame – enter the name of the target frame for the hotspot. Standard frame name can beselected from the drop-down list and used instead.
– _blank – opens in a new browser window.
– _self – default selection and opens in the current window.
– _top – file opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
– _parent – file opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent
frame, the current frame is used.
Graphic view – displays the image map so that the hotspots can be selected and edited.

•Tip
The value _self for the target frame will work on the vast majority of the occasions. It
is not recommended to use the other values, if available, unless absolutely
necessary.

Fontwork
Using Fontwork creates graphical text as objects to make a drawing look more attractive. There
are many different settings for Fontwork (line, area, position, size, and more) to match therequirements of a drawing.
Fontwork is also available with the Writer, Calc, and Impress modules of LibreOffice, but there
are small differences in the way that each LibreOffice module displays Fontwork.

Creating Fontwork
1)

Open the Fontwork Gallery dialog (Figure 253) using one of the following methods.
– Go to Insert > Fontwork on the Menu bar.
– Click on Insert Fontwork Text on the Standard toolbar.
– Click on Insert Fontwork Text on the Fontwork toolbar, if this toolbar is visible.

Fontwork | 223

Figure 253: Fontwork Gallery dialog

Figure 254: Fontwork example
2) Select a Fontwork style from the dialog and click OK. The selected Fontwork object
appears in the center of the drawing and the dialog closes.
3) Double-click on the black text in the Fontwork object to switch on editing mode.
4) Type the required text which replaces the black text in the Fontwork object as shown in
Figure 254.
5) Press the Esc key or click outside the selected area to apply the change.

224 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 255: Fontwork toolbar

Figure 256: Fontwork Shape toolbar

Fontwork toolbar
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 255) becomes visible and active on the workspace when a
Fontwork object is selected. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Fontwork on
the Menu bar.
The following tools are available for editing a Fontwork object.
•

Insert Fontwork Text – opens the Fontwork Gallery dialog.

•

Fontwork Shape – changes the shape of the selected object. Click on Fontwork Shapeto open a pop-up toolbar and select a Fontwork shape for the available options. The
shapes are shown in the Fontwork Shape floating sub-toolbar (Figure 256).

•

Fontwork Same Letter Heights – changes the height of characters in the selected
Fontwork object. Toggles between normal height where the characters have different
heights to where all characters have the same height.

•

Fontwork Alignment – specifies the text alignment within the frame. Options are Left
Align, Center, Right Align, Word Justify, and Stretch Justify. The effects of the textalignment can only be seen if the text spans over two or more lines. In the stretch justify
mode, all lines are filled completely.

•

Fontwork Character Spacing – selects the spacing between characters and whether
kerning pairs should be used. Options are Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, Very Loose
and Custom. For Custom spacing, input a percentage value: 100% is normal character
spacing, less than 100% character spacing is tighter, and more than 100% character
spacing is looser.

•

Toggle Extrusion – converts the Fontwork object into a 3D shape using extrusion. See
Chapter 7, 3D Objects for more information.

Modifying Fontwork
A Fontwork object can be treated like any other object in Draw. It can be resized, rotated,skewed, slanted, flipped, and so on. For more information on modifying a Fontwork object, see
Chapter 3, Working With Objects, Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes and Chapter 5,
Combining Multiple Objects.
Fontwork is text and all text formatting that has been described in this chapter can be applied.
Assign line properties only to Fontwork that is NOT going to be converted to 3D effect using
Toggle Extrusion, otherwise line properties will not be visible.
Some of the Fontwork shapes can be modified. For example, to change the angles of trapezoid
or parallelogram basic shapes by moving the dot that is displayed along with the selection
handles.

Fontwork | 225

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 10,
Printing, Exporting andEmailing

Printing
Quick printing
To quickly print a document or drawing, click on Print Directly on the Standard toolbar(Figure 257) to send the entire document to the default printer that is defined for the computer.

Figure 257: standard toolbar with Print Directly installed

Note
The action of Print Directly can be changed by sending a document to the printerdefined for the document instead of the default printer defined for the computer. Go
to Tools > Options > Load/Save > General and select the option Load printersettings with the document.

Note
If Print Directly is not visible on the Standard toolbar, right-click in an empty area on
the Standard toolbar and select Visible Buttons from the context menu. Select Print
Directly from the displayed list of tools and the tool is added to the Standard toolbar.

Controlled printing
For more control over printing, open and use the Print dialog (Figures 258 and 259) using one of
the following methods:•

Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.

•

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P.

•

Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

Note
The options selected in the Print dialog only apply to the printing of the current
document that is open in Draw. To specify default print settings for LibreOffice, go toTools > Options > LibreOffice > Print on the main menu bar to open the Options
LibreOffice Print dialog.

Note
Due to different computer setups and different operating systems, the print dialog
that opens on a computer monitor may differ from the dialogs shown in Figure 258
and 259. However, the printing options available for LibreOffice remain the same.

Printing | 227

Figure 258: Print dialog - General page

Note
Any print options selected with the Draw Print dialog when printing from Draw will
override the default printer settings that have been set using Tools > Options >LibreOffice > Print and Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print.

General options
The following general options are an example of what may be available on the General page of
the Print dialog (Figure 258).
•

Printer – select the printer to use from the printers available in the drop-down list.

•

Range and Copies – select from the following options:– All Pages – prints all the pages in the document.
– Selection – prints the pages selected in LibreOffice Draw.

228 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Pages – select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3. 7
or 1 – 5, 7, 9 for page number selection.
– Include – select from the drop-down list Odd and Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even
Pages.
– More > Paper sides – select from the drop-down list Print on one side (simplex), Print
on both sides (duplex long edge), or Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
– More > Number of copies – enter number of printed copies required for document.
– More > Collate – collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
– More > Order – select from Create separate print jobs for collated output (onlyavailable when more than one copy is being printed) or Print reverse order.
•

Page Layout – select from the following options:– Paper size – select the paper size to use from drop-down list
– Orientation – select from the drop-down list Automatic, Portrait or Landscape.
– More > Pages per sheet – select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed
on one sheet of paper.
– More > Order – select from the drop-down list the printing order of multiple pages on
one sheet of paper.
– More > Draw a border around each page – when multiple pages are printed on one
sheet of paper, a border is drawn around each page.
– More > Brochure – prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or
booklet.

LibreOffice Draw options
The following options are available on the LibreOffice Draw page of the Print dialog (Figure 259)
where settings are defined specific to the current document type:•Contents – prints the Page name and/or Date and time on the drawing.

•

Colors – prints the drawing in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.

•

Size – print the drawing using one of the following options:– Original size – prints the drawing using its original size.
– Fit to printable page – the drawing size is changed so that it fits on the paper sizeused for printing.
– Distribute on multiple sheets of paper – used if the drawing is too large for the paper
size being used.
– Tile sheet of paper with repeated pages – used to print multiple copies of a drawing
on a page.

Note
The following printing instructions are examples only. Actual method of printing may
differ from these examples as this depends on computer operating system, computer
setup, and the printer being used.

Printing | 229

Figure 259: Print dialog - LibreOffice Draw page

Single sheet printing of multiple pages
The following steps are an example of printing multiple pages of a drawing on single sheet ofpaper:
1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Page Layout, select the number of pages to print per sheet of paper from the Pages
per sheet drop-down list. The preview panel on the right shows how the pages will lookon a printed sheet of paper.
4) In Page Layout, select how the multiple pages are printed on the sheet of paper from theOrder drop-down list.
5) If necessary, select Draw a border around each page to distinguish each page printed ona sheet of paper.
6) Click OK to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Selecting pages to print
Individual pageThe following steps are an example of printing the individual pages in a drawing:1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page number of the page to print.
4) Click OK to print the individual pages and close the Print dialog.

230 | Draw Guide 7.2

Range of pages
The following steps are an example of printing a range of pages in a drawing:1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page numbers of the pages to print
using the format, for example, 1,3,7 or 2–5,7,9 for page number selection.
4) Click OK to print the pages and close the Print dialog.

Selection printing
The following steps are an example of printing selected pages in a drawing:
1) Select the pages in the Pages panel in LibreOffice Draw.
2) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
3) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
4) In Ranges and Copies, select Selection and then select Odd and Even Pages, Even
Pages, or Odd Pages from the drop-down list.
5) Click OK to print the pages and close the Print dialog.

Brochure printing
In Writer, Impress, and Draw, a document can be printed as a brochure (also known as booklet
printing). The pages are arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half, the pages
are in the correct order to form a brochure or booklet.

Tip
Plan the document to make it look good when printed as a brochure. Choose
appropriate margins, font sizes, and so on as the pages are normally printed at half
size on a sheet of paper. Experiment to get the best document format to match thecapabilities of the printer being used.

Simplex printerThe following steps are an example of printing a brochure or booklet on a printer only capable ofsimplex or single-sided printing:1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
4) Make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as specified in
the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but it does forbrochures.
5) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
6) In Page Layout, select More, then select the Brochure option.
7) In Range and Copies, select Even pages or Odd pages from the Selection drop-down
list.
8) Click OK to print the even or odd pages.
9) Take the printed pages out of the printer and put back into the printer in the correctorientation to print on the blank side. This may require some testing to find out what thecorrect arrangement is for the selected printer.

Printing | 23110) If Even Pages was selected, now select Odd Pages in Range and Copies. If Odd Pages
was selected, now select Even Pages in Range and Copies.
11) Click OK to finish printing the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog.

Duplex printerThe following steps are an example of printing a brochure or booklet on a printer that is capableof duplex or double-sided printing:1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
4) Make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as specified in
the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but it does forbrochures.
5) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
6) In Range and Copies, select More, then select Print on both sides (duplex long edge)
from the Paper sides drop-down list. Actual options available for duplex printing dependon the printer model and the computer system being used.
7) In Page Layout, Select More, then select the Brochure option.
8) In Range and Copies, select the All Pages option.
9) Click OK to print the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog..

Black and white or grayscale printing
Printer settings
To print documents in black and white or grayscale on a color printer:1) Open the Print dialog, see “Controlled printing” on page 227.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) Click on LibreOffice Draw to open the printing options page for LibreOffice Draw.
4) In Color, select Grayscale or Black & white.
5) Click OK to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Note
Some color printers may only allow printing in color regardless of the settings
selected. More details can be found in the information that came with the selected
printer.

Tip
Grayscale is the best option for printing any colored text or graphics in a document
on a monochrome printer. Colors printed in shades of gray give more detail. Whenprinting color in black and white some of this detail maybe lost.

LibreOffice settings
To change the LibreOffice settings to print all colored text and graphics as grayscale:1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print on the Menu bar to open the Options
LibreOffice Draw Print dialog (Figure 260).
2) In Quality, select either the option Grayscale or Black & white.
232 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 260: Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog
3) Click OK to save the change and close the Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog.
4) Print the document using one of the above procedures and the document is printed asgrayscale or black and white.

Exporting
LibreOffice can export documents to PDF (Portable Document Format). This industry widestandard of file format is ideal for sending a file for someone else to view using PDF viewing
software.

Directly as PDF
To export the entire document using default PDF settings is as follows:
1) Click on Export Directly as PDF on the Standard toolbar, or got to File > Export As >Export Directly as PDF on the Menu bar.
2) Enter a file name and location for the PDF file and click on Save to export the file as PDF.

Note
Note that page range, image compression, or other printing options are not available
when creating a PDF file using this method.

Controlling PDF content and quality
For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF, use the options available in
the PDF Options dialog (Figure 261). For more information on available options, see the Getting
Started Guide.
1) Go to File > Export As > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
dialog.
2) Select the required options available in the General, Initial View, User Interface, Links,
Security and Digital Signatures pages.

Exporting | 233

Figure 261: PDF Options dialog
3) Click on Export and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the location and enter a file name for the PDF being created.
5) Click on Save to export the file as PDF. The file browser window and the PDF Options
dialog close.

Other formats
LibreOffice can export files in various formats, which are listed in the drop-down list of the filebrowser window. For more information on exporting graphics, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.
To export a file in another format:
1) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open a file browser window.
2) Navigate to the directory where the drawing is going to be saved.
3) Specify a file name for the exported drawing in the Name text box.
4) Select the required file format from the drop-down list.
5) Click on Save to save the file and close the file browser window.

Note
The content of the exported file depends on the elements selected on the drawing. If
no elements are selected, the entire drawing is exported.

Web pages
To export a multi-page Draw document as a series of web pages:
1) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open a file browser window.

234 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 262: HTML Export dialog
2) Select HTML Document (Draw) (.html;.htm) as the file format and click on Save to open
the HTML Export dialog (Figure 262).
3) Create a New Design or select an Existing design and click on Next.
4) Follow the prompts to create the web pages and save the drawing as an HTML file. For
more information on how to create HTMl file, see the Getting Started Guide.

Emailing documents
LibreOffice provides several ways to send documents quickly and easily as an email attachment
in ODF format (LibreOffice default format), or as a PDF. For more information, see the Getting
Started Guide.

Note
Documents can only be sent from the LibreOffice menu if an email profile has been
set up.

Open Document format
To email the current document in ODF format:
1) Go to File > Send > Email Document on the Menu bar. LibreOffice opens the default
email program with the document attached to a new email.
2) In the email program, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

PDF format
To email the current document as a PDF file:
1) Go to File > Send > E-mail as PDF on the Menu bar. LibreOffice creates a PDF using
the default PDF settings and then opens the email program with the PDF file attached toa new email.
2) In the email program, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

Emailing documents | 235

Digital signatures
A digital signature is a mathematical scheme for verifying the authenticity of digital versions ofdrawings or documents.
To sign a drawing digitally, a personal key, also known as a certificate, is required. This personal
key is stored on the computer being used as a combination of a private key, which must be kept
secret, and a public key. These keys are added to a drawing when a digital signature is applied.
A certificate is obtained from a certification authority, which may be a private company or agovernment institution.
When a digital signature is applied to a drawing, a checksum is computed from the drawing
content plus the personal key being used. The checksum and public key are stored together withthe drawing.
When the drawing is opened on another computer with a recent version of LibreOffice, theprogram computes the checksum again and compares it with the stored checksum. If both
checksums are the same, the program opens the original, unchanged drawing.
In addition, the program can display the public key information from the certificate. This
information can then be compared with the public key that is published on the web site of thecertificate authority. Whenever the drawing is changed, this change breaks the digital signature.
For a more detailed description of how to obtain, use and manage a certificate and signaturevalidation, see the Getting Started Guide and “Applying Digital Signatures” in the LibreOffice Help
(https://help.libreoffice.org/7.1/en-US/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.html?
&DbPAR=WRITER&System=UNIX).

Removing personal data
It maybe necessary to remove any personal data, versions, notes, hidden information, or
recorded change from drawings before they are sent to other people or PDFs files created fromthe drawings.

Setting security and warning options
1) In Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Security, to open Options LibreOffice Security dialog(Figure 263).
2) Click on Options to open the Security Options and Warnings dialog (Figure 264).
3) Select the required options to allow LibreOffice to warn when drawings contain certain
information and/or automatically remove personal information on saving.
4) Click OK to close the Security Options and Warnings dialog and save the option
selection.

Removing personal data and drawing information
1) Go to File > Properties on the Menu bar to open the Properties dialog (Figure 265) for
the open drawing.
2) In the General page uncheck Apply user data.
3) Click on Reset Properties removing any information in the created and modified fields,
deleting the modification and printing dates, resetting the editing time to zero, resetting
the creation date to the current date and time, and resetting the version number to 1.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog.

236 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 263: Options LibreOffice Security dialog

Figure 264: Security Options and Warnings dialog

Removing version information
To remove version information from a drawing, use one of the following methods:•

Go to File > Versions on the Menu bar to open a dialog for the drawing, then select theversions from the list for deletion and click Delete. The dialog automatically closes.

•

Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the drawing with a different name.

Removing personal data | 237

Figure 265: Properties dialog

Redaction
Documents can be redacted to remove or hide any sensitive information allowing the selective
disclosure of information in a document while keeping other parts of the document secret.
When a redacted document is exported to a new document, any redacted portions are removed
and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This prevents any attempt to restore or copy theoriginal contents. A redacted document is often exported in PDF format for publication or sharing.
Any documents that are redacted in LibreOffice Writer, Calc, or Impress are automaticallytransferred as a copy to LibreOffice Draw where the redaction is carried out.

Documents, spreadsheets, or presentations
1) Open the document to be redacted in LibreOffice Writer, Calc or Impress, then go toTools > Redact on the Menu bar and the following happens:– A copy of the document is prepared and transferred to LibreOffice Draw as an untitledfile.
– LibreOffice Draw opens with the untitled document document displayed.
– The Redaction toolbar (Figure 266) automatically opens. If the Redaction toolbar is
not displayed, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar in LibreOffice Draw and selectRedaction.
2) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and select either Rectangle or Freeform, or click
on Rectangle Redaction or Freeform Redaction in the Redaction toolbar.

Figure 266: Redaction
toolbar238 | Draw Guide 7.2

3) Draw the required shapes to redact the sensitive areas in the document. The redaction
shape is gray allowing the sensitive areas in the document to be visible before they are
redacted.
4) If necessary, click on Export Directly as PDF to make an in-redaction copy of the
document as a PDF file. The sensitive information in the redacted areas can then bereviewed that it is correct before redaction is finalized.
5) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and select either Redacted Export (White) or
Redacted Export (Black), or click on Redacted Export (White) or Redacted Export(Black) in the Redaction toolbar. This opens a file browser window.
6) Navigate to the folder where the redact document is going to be saved and enter a namefor the document, then click on Save to create the redacted PDF file.
– The gray redaction shapes are converted to white or black shapes and the document
is exported as a PDF.
– There is no selectable text in the PDF file and any redacted content is non-existent.

Drawings
Open a drawing in LibreOffice Draw, then use Steps 2) thru 6) in “Documents, spreadsheets, orpresentations” to create a redacted PDF copy of the drawing file.

Note
When a redacted document is exported as a new PDF file, any redacted portions are
removed from the new document and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This
prevents any attempt to restore or copy the original contents.

Redaction | 239

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 11,
Advanced Draw Techniques

Drawing pages
Pages pane
A drawing created in Draw can consist of multiple pages allowing a drawing to be stored as one
file on a computer. The drawing pages are displayed as thumbnails in the Pages page which isused to add, rename, delete, and arrange pages in a drawing.
By default the Pages page (Figure 267) appears docked on the left of the Workspace. If thePages page is not visible, go to View > Page Pane on the Menu bar.
•

For Windows and macOS only – press and hold the Ctrl key, then double-click in the title
bar of the Pages pane to create a floating window.

•

For macOS only – press and hold the Cmd (⌘) key, then double-click in the title bar of
the Pages pane to create a floating window.

•

For Windows, Linux and macOS – click in the title bar and drag the Pages pane to create
a floating window.

•

To close the Pages pane, click on the X on the right side of the title bar, or deselect View
> Page Pane in the Menu bar.

Selecting pages
Select a page using one of the following methods and the page appears in the Workspace:•

Click on a page thumbnail in the Pages pane.

•

Select a page in the Navigator after opening.

Figure 267: Draw main window

Drawing pages | 241

Figure 268: Navigator dialog

Figure 269: Navigator deck on Sidebar
If the Navigator is not open, use one of the following methods to open it:•

Press the F5 key to open the Navigator dialog (Figure 268).

•

Go to View > Navigator on the Menu bar to open the Navigator dialog.

•

Click on Navigator on the right of the Sidebar to open the Navigator deck (Figure 269).

Navigating pages
To quickly select a page for editing so it appears in the Workspace, either select the page in the
Pages pane, or go to Page > Navigate on the Menu bar and select one of the options from thesubmenu:•

To First Page – moves the selection to the first page in the drawing.

•

To Previous Page – moves the selection backward to the previous page.

•To Next Page – moves the selection forward to the next page.

•To Last Page – moves the selection to the last page in the drawing.

242 | Draw Guide 7.2

Adding pages
Inserting new page
A new page is inserted into a drawing using one of the following methods. A new page is added
after the selected page in the Pages pane, or at the end of the pages if no page is selected.
•

Go to Page > New Page on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click in the Pages pane and select New Page from the context menu.

•

Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select New Page from thecontext menu.

•

Go to Page > Insert Page from File on the Menu bar and the Insert File dialog opens.
Navigate to the folder where the file is located, select the file, click on Open and thenclick OK.

Duplicating pages
Select a page in the Pages pane, then use one of the following methods to insert the duplicate
page after the selected page:•

Go to Page > Duplicate Page on the Menu bar.

•

Right-click on a page in the Pages pane and select Copy from the context menu, thenright-click in a blank area of the Pages pane and select Paste from the context menu.

Renaming pages
When pages are inserted into a drawing, they are automatically named as Page 1, Page 2, andso on in the Pages pane and the Navigator. As the page order is changed, pages areautomatically renumbered. However, to easily identify each page, it is recommended to give eachpage a memorable name.
1) Select a page for renaming in the Pages pane.
2) Rename the selected page using one of the following methods:– Go to Page on the Menu bar and select Rename Page from the submenu.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Rename Page fromthe context menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Rename Page fromthe context menu.
3) In the Rename Page dialog that opens, type a new name for the page and click OK to
save.

Changing page order•

Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then click and drag the page thumbnail tochange the page order.

•

Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then go to Page > Move on the Menu bar
and select one of the following options– Page to Start – moves the selected page to the beginning of the drawing.
– Page Up – moves the selected page up one place in the page order of the drawing.
– Page Down – moves the selected page down one place in the page order of thedrawing.
– Page to End – moves the selected page to the end of the drawing.

Drawing pages | 243

Deleting pages
1) Select a page for deletion in the Pages pane.
2) Delete the selected page using one of the following methods:– Go to Page > Delete Page on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Delete Page from thecontext menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Delete Page from thecontext menu.

Note
When deleting pages in a drawing, there is no deletion confirmation of the selected
page.

Master pages
A master page is a page used as the starting point for other pages in a drawing. It is similar to apage style in Writer or master slide in Impress and controls the basic formatting of all pages
based upon it. A drawing with multiple pages can have more than one master page so that adifferent look can be assigned to separate pages in a drawing, for example title page, contents
page, and drawing pages.
A master page has a defined set of characteristics. For example, background objects (such as
logos, decorative lines, and other graphics), formatting of text, blocks of standard text, and fields
such as page numbering, date, and filename.

Master page viewTo open the master page view, go to View > Master on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master
View toolbar (Figure 270). If this toolbar does not open, go to View > Toolbars > Master View on
the Menu bar. To return to normal page mode, click on Close Master View in the Master View
toolbar or go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.

Figure 270: Master
View toolbar

Creating master pages
Each drawing has a default master page. When a drawing has multiple pages, master pages canbe created and added to the drawing as follows:
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Create a new master page using one of the following methods. After creation, the newmaster page is automatically selected.
– Click on New Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Go to Page > New Master on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the Pages pane and select New Master from the context menu.

244 | Draw Guide 7.2

3) Add the required graphic objects, logos, fields, text and so on to the selected master
page, then save the drawing.
4) Assign the new master page to a drawing page. See “Assigning master pages” below for
more information.
5) If necessary, rename the master page with a meaningful name, see “Renaming masterpages” below.

Renaming master pages
Each new master page created has the default name of Default 1, Default 2, and so on. It is
recommended to rename a new master page with a more meaningful name. The default masterpage that was created when the drawing was first created can also be renamed.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Open the Rename Master Slide dialog (Figure 271) using one of the following methods:– Click on Rename Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on a master page in the Pages pane and select Rename Master from thecontext menu.
3) Enter a meaningful name for the master page in the Name text box, then click OK to savethe changes and close the Rename Master Slide dialog.

Figure 271: Rename Master Slide dialog

Figure 272: Available master Slides dialog
Master pages | 245

Assigning master pages
When a drawing has more than one master page, different master pages can be assigned todifferent pages.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
2) In the Pages pane, select the page to assign a master page to it.
3) Right-click on the page in the Workspace and select Change Slide Master from thecontext menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog (Figure 272).
4) Select a master page design for the selected page in Select a Slide Design.
5) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
6) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Slide Design that have not been assigned to a page.
7) Click OK to assign the selected master page and close the Available Master Slides
dialog.

Deleting master pages
The default master page created when the drawing was first created cannot be deleted. Also, if
the drawing only uses one named master page, then that named master page cannot be deleted.
Deleting master pages is only available when there is more than one master page in a drawing.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Delete a master page using one of the following methods:– Select and right-click on a master page in the Pages pane, then select Delete Masterfrom the context menu.
– Click on Delete Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Go to Page > Delete Master on the Menu bar.

Note
The deletion of the master page is immediate and there is no confirmation.

Inserting fields
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select a field type from the options available on
the submenu.
The field types that are available for insertion as follows:•

Date (fixed) – inserts the current date into the master page as a fixed field. The date is
not automatically updated.

•

Date (variable) – inserts the current date into the master page as a variable field. The
date is automatically updated each time the file is opened.

•

Time (fixed) – inserts the current time into the master page as a fixed field. The time is
not automatically updated.

•

Time (variable) – inserts the current time into the master page as a variable field. The
time is automatically updated each time the file is opened.

246 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 273: Page Properties dialog•

Author – inserts the first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data into the active
page. Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data on the Menu bar to enter user
data details.

•

Page Number – inserts the page number into every page of the drawing. To change thenumber format, go to Page > Page Properties on the Menu bar to open the Page
Properties dialog (Figure 273). Click on the Page tab and select a number format fromthe drop-down list in Layout Settings.

•

Page Title – inserts the page title. A page title is created in Normal view by going to Page
> Rename Page on the Menu bar and entering a title in the Name text box in the
Rename Page dialog that opens.

•

Page Count – inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.

•

File Name – inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after the file has
been saved.

Editing field format
1) Click on a field to select it and display the selection handles.
2) Double click on the field contents to select the text.
3) Edit the field format using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Fields... on the Menu bar to open the Edit Field dialog (Figure 274), thenselect format option(s) and click OK to save the changes.
– Right-click on the selected field contents and select an option from the context menu.
4) Click in a blank area of the master page to deselect the field.

Note
The options available in the Edit Field dialog change to match the field type that has
been selected for editing.

Master pages | 247

Figure 274: Edit Field dialog

Figure 275: Load Master slide dialog

Master pages from templates
Master pages from templates available in LibreOffice can be loaded into a drawing and used. If
the master pages from a template use a different page size, the master pages loaded into adrawing are adapted to the page size used in the drawing. This may cause some objects to be
stretched or incorrectly positioned when adapted to fit the drawing page size.
248 | Draw Guide 7.2

1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Right-click on a master page displayed in the drawing and select Change Master Slidefrom the context menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog.
3) Click on Load… in the Available Master Slides dialog to open the Load Master Slide
dialog (Figure 275).
4) Chose a template category from list displayed in Categories.
5) Choose a template from the list displayed in Templates. Click Preview to display apreview of the selected template.
6) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog and the Available Master Slides dialog
opens displaying the template in Select a Slide Design.
7) Select the master page design required in Select a Slide Design.
8) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
9) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Slide Design that have not been assigned to a page.
10) Click OK to assign the selected master page to a drawing page and close the Available
Master Slides dialog.

Templates
A template is a special type of drawing that is used as a basis to create a drawing. For example,
a template can include a company logo, name and information on the first page of a drawing withthe remaining pages in a drawing only showing the company logo and name. Templates cancontain anything that regular drawings can contain, such as text, graphics, a set of styles, and soon.
All document types created using LibreOffice are based on templates. If a template is not
specified when a new document is started, then the default template for that type of document isused. This default template uses a set of properties that are hard coded in LibreOffice. If
necessary, the default template for drawings that is hard coded in LibreOffice can be changed,
see “Default template” on page 252 for more information.
For more information on templates and obtaining templates from other sources, see the Getting
Started Guide.
Draw does not have any predefined templates when it is installed on a computer. However,templates can be created using methods described in the following sections. Templates can also
be installed that have been obtained from other sources, see "Importing templates" on page 256
for more information.

Creating drawing templates
Using Save As Template dialog
1) Open a drawing to use as a basis for a template, or open and edit a template to use as abasis for a new template.
2) Add any extra content and styles or edit the content and styles in the drawing.
3) Open the Save As Template dialog (Figure 276) using one of the following methods:– Go to File > Templates > Save As Template on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Save on the Standard toolbar and select Saveas Template from the drop-down menu.

Templates | 249

Figure 276: Save As Template dialog
4) Enter a name for the template in the Template Name text box.
5) Select a category for the template in the Template Category box.
6) If the template is to be used as the default template in Draw, then select the option Set as
default template.
7) Click on Save to save the template and close the dialog.

Using Save As command
Alternatively, the command Save As can be used to save the drawing as a template using thefollowing procedure:
1) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar to open the Save as dialog.
2) Navigate to the LibreOffice templates folder. Actual location of the LibreOffice template
folder depends on the computer system and setup.
3) Enter a filename using the extension .otg.
4) Select ODF Drawing Template (.otg) as the file type.
5) Click on Save to save the template and close the dialog.

Note
When saving a drawing as a template, the template must be saved in the LibreOffice
templates folder for the template to be recognized and found by the LibreOfficeTemplate Manager.

Creating a drawing from templatesInstead of using the default settings in LibreOffice to create a new drawing, a drawing can becreated from a template.

250 | Draw Guide 7.2

Start Center
Open LibreOffice and create a new drawing from a template displayed in the Start Center using
one of the following methods:•

Click on Templates in the Start Center to open a display of available templates for all
LibreOffice applications. Click on a template and a new document opens using therelevant LibreOffice module application for the template.

•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Templates in the Start Center, then select Draw
Templates to display only the available templates for LibreOffice Draw. Click on atemplate and a new drawing opens using LibreOffice Draw.

Templates dialog
Instead of using the default settings in LibreOffice to create a new drawing, the Templates dialog(Figure 277) can be used as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Draw as the application and the template category
required for the new drawing.
3) Select a template from the options available in the preview box.
4) Click Open or double click on the template to create a new drawing using the selected
template and close the Template dialog.
5) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the new drawing as a file using theextension .odg.

Figure 277: Templates dialog
Templates | 251

Default template
If a new drawing is created without selecting a template, LibreOffice creates the drawing using a
set of properties that are hard coded in LibreOffice. However, any drawing template can be usedas the default template, but the template must be located in the templates folders used for
LibreOffice applications and categories.

Setting default template
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings and then the template category.
3) Select a template from the templates displayed in the preview box.
4) Right-click on the template and select Set as default from the context menu. There is no
confirmation that the selected template has become the default template for new
drawings. The default template is indicated by check mark at the top left corner of thetemplate icon.
5) Click on Cancel to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
will use the new default template.

Note
If a new drawing is suitable to use as the default template, then the drawing must be
saved as a template first before it can be used as the default template. See “Creatingdrawing templates” on page 249 for more information.

Resetting default template
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings and then the template category.
3) Right-click on the default template. The default template is indicated by check mark at the
top left corner of the template icon.
4) Select Reset Default from the context menu. There is no confirmation that Draw has
been reset to using LibreOffice default properties for creating a new drawing. The check
mark is removed from the template icon.
5) Click on Cancel to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
will use the LibreOffice default properties.

Editing templates
Note
Templates that were supplied with LibreOffice cannot be edited or deleted. Only
templates that have been created using LibreOffice or imported into LibreOffice canbe edited or deleted.

252 | Draw Guide 7.2

Template styles and template content can be edited, and then, if necessary, reapplied to
drawings that were created from that template. Any content in the drawing, but not included in thetemplate, cannot be reapplied.

Editing
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) Select a template that was created using LibreOffice or imported into LibreOffice.
3) Right-click on the selected template and select Edit from the context menu. The template
opens in Draw.

Note
If the Edit option is greyed out, then the selected template is part of the LibreOfficeinstallation and cannot be edited.
4) Edit the template as any other drawing.
5) Go to File > Save on the Menu bar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S to save thetemplate.
6) Alternatively, save the edited template as a new template. See “Creating drawing
templates” on page 249 for more information.

Updating drawings from modified template
The next time a drawing is opened created from the modified template, a confirmation dialog
opens asking to update the styles in the drawing to the formatting used in the modified template.
•

Click Update Styles to update any styles in the drawing that have been changed in thetemplate and close the confirmation dialog.

•

Click Keep Old Styles so that styles in the drawing that have been changed in thetemplate are not updated. The confirmation dialog closes and will not appear again thenext time the document is opened.

Note
If Keep Old Styles is selected, the drawing is no longer connected to the template.
However, the template is still listed under File > Properties > General. To reconnect
the document to the template, the template has to be reassigned. See “Changing
templates assigned to drawings” below for more information.

Changing templates assigned to drawings
If necessary, the template associated with a drawing can be changed to a different template, orreassign the original template for the drawing back to the drawing.
•

To manually change or reassign a template, create a new drawing from the required
template and copy the contents from the old drawing into the new drawing.

•

Download the Template Changer extension from the LibreOffice website athttps://extensions.libreoffice.org/en/extensions/show/template-changer and install it into
LibreOffice. Restart LibreOffice to activate the extension. Open the drawing and use File
> Templates > Change template (current document) on the Menu bar to change thetemplate. For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.
Templates | 253

Organizing templates
LibreOffice can only locate templates that are in LibreOffice template folders (categories). New
LibreOffice template categories can be created and used to organize templates, for example
creating separate categories for different projects or clients. Templates can also be imported andexported.

Tip
The location of LibreOffice template folders varies with the computer operating
system. To learn where the template folders are stored on a computer, go to Tools >Options > LibreOffice > Paths on the Menu bar.

Creating template categories
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Click on Tools in the bottom left corner and select New Category from the context menu.
4) Enter a name in the Enter category name text box in the dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the new category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Renaming template categories
Template categories supplied with LibreOffice cannot be renamed. Only template categories thathave been created can be renamed.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application and the templatecategory for renaming.
3) Click on Tools in the bottom left corner and select Rename Category from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name in the Enter category name text box in the dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renamed category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Note
If an attempt to rename a category that was installed with LibreOffice is made, anerror message opens stating that the category cannot be renamed.

Deleting template categories
Template categories supplied with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only template categories thathave been created can be deleted.

254 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 278: Delete Category dialog
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) Click on Settings and select Delete Category from the context menu.
3) Select the category in the Delete Category dialog (Figure 278) that opens.
4) Click OK to delete the selected category and close the Delete Category dialog.
5) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the category.

Note
If an attempt to delete a category that was installed with LibreOffice is made, an error
message opens stating that the category cannot be deleted.

Moving templates
A template is moved from one template category to another template category as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application and the templatecategory where the template is located.
3) Select the template that is going to be moved.
4) Click on Move and the Select Category dialog (Figure 279) opens.
5) Select a category from Select from Existing Category or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
6) Click OK to move the template to the selected category and close the Select Category
dialog.
Templates | 255

Figure 279: Select Category dialog

Importing templates
Templates can be downloaded from many sources, including the official LibreOffice template
repository using the Extension Manager. Save the template anywhere on a computer, then import
the template into LibreOffice as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) Click on Import and the Select Category dialog opens.
3) Select a category from Select from Existing Category or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
4) Click OK and a file browser window opens.
5) Navigate to the folder containing the template, select the template and click Open. The
file browser closes and the template appears in the selected template category in the
Templates dialog.

Note
For more information about using the Extension Manager to import templates, see
the Getting Started Guide.

Exporting templates
Export a template from a template category to another location in a computer or network as
follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
256 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application and the templatecategory where the template is located.
3) Select a template for export and click Export to open a file browser window.
4) Navigate to the folder to export the template into.
5) Click OK and the exported template appears in the selected folder.
6) Click Cancel to close the Templates dialog.

Note
Exporting a template does not remove it from the Templates dialog. The action
places a copy of the template in the location specified.

Deleting templates
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Shift+Ctrl+N.
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application and the templatecategory where the template is located.
3) Right-click on the template for deletion and select Delete from the context menu.
4) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the template.
5) Click Cancel to close the Templates dialog.

Tip
Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the selected template in the
Templates dialog

Note
Templates that were installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only templates thathave been created after the installation of LibreOffice can be deleted.

Other ways of using templates
Templates can be created and stored anywhere on a computer and then used without involving
the Templates dialog. However, some results maybe different from those described above.

Drawing from a template
Create a drawing from a compatible template by double-clicking the template in a file browser
window. The resulting drawing is not associated with (linked to) the template from which it was
created. The template is not listed in the properties of the document and any changes to thetemplate cannot be directly applied to the document. For many purposes, this may be what isrequired.

Templates | 257

Template from a drawing
Create a template from a drawing using File > Save As on the Menu bar and selecting ODF
Drawing Template (.otg) as the file type, then saving it anywhere on a computer, for example in a
project folder.
The resulting template is visible in the Templates dialog, unless it is imported it or added to theproject folder to the locations shown for templates on the LibreOffice – Paths page of the Tools >Options dialog. See “Organizing templates” on page 254 and “Importing templates” on page 256
for more information.

Multiple layers
Layers in LibreOffice Draw allow assembly of elements in a drawing that are related. Think oflayers as individual workspaces that can be hidden from view, prevented from printing, or locked
so that changes cannot be made.
Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on a drawing, except for the Controls layer
which is always in front of all other layers. The stacking order of objects on a drawing isdetermined by the sequence in objects are added. This stacking order can be rearranged bygoing to Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar.
Layers in a drawing are indicated by tabs located at the bottom of the Workspace and above theStatus bar. Click on a tab to select a layer. Figure 280 shows the Layout layer has been
selected.

Figure 280: Layer tabs in Workspace

Note
When a new layer is added, the layer is added to all pages in a drawing. However,when an object is added to a layer, the object is only added to the selected drawing
page.

Note
If an object is to appear on all pages of a drawing (for example, a company logo),
add the object to the master page by going to View > Master on the Menu bar. See“Master pages” on page 244 for more information.

Default layers
Normal view
In Normal view, LibreOffice Draw provides three default layers that are visible to the user. Thesedefault layers cannot be deleted or renamed.
•

Layout – is the default workspace where objects are normally placed.

•

Controls – used for form controls that have been assigned an action. Objects on thislayer are always in front of objects on other layers. Normally, form controls are not printed
and the Printable option in the Modify Layer dialog has to be set deselected.

•

Dimension Lines – is where the dimension lines are drawn. By switching the layer
between show or hide, dimension lines are switched on and off.

258 | Draw Guide 7.2

Master view
In Master view, LibreOffice provides a single layer, Background objects, that is visible to theuser. This layer is used to places objects that appear on every page in a drawing, for example
company logo, date, page number, drawing title, and so on.

Inserting layers
Inserting a layer into a drawing is as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Insert Layer dialog (Figure 281):– Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom of the Workspace area and select Insert
Layer from the context menu.
– Go to Insert > Layer on the Menu bar.
2) Enter meaningful names for the layer in the Name and Title text boxes.
3) If necessary, enter a description for the new layer in the Description text box.
4) Select Visible for the layer to be visible in a drawing. When Visible is not selected, thelayer is hidden and its name in the layer tab changes color to blue.
5) Select Printable for the layer to print when the drawing is printed. The name of a layer isunderlined in the layer tab bar when Printable is NOT selected. For example, not printing
a layer is useful if the layer is a draft layer for guides or annotations used in creating thedrawing, but do not want this draft layer to appear in the final printed output.
6) Select Locked to prevent any objects on a layer from deletion, editing, or moving. No
additional objects can be added to a locked layer. For example, locking a layer is usefulwhen a base plan is to be protected while adding a new layer with other details. The
name of a locked layer is changes to italic text in the layer tab bar.
7) Click OK to close the Insert Layer dialog and the new layer automatically becomes active.

Figure 281: Insert Layer dialog

Multiple layers | 259

Figure 282: Modify Layer dialog

Modifying layers
Modify any or all of the attributes of an inserted layer as follows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Modify Layer dialog (Figure 282).
– Right-click the name tab for the layer at the bottom of the Workspace and selectModify Layer from the context menu.
– Click on the layer tab to select it, then go to Format > Layer on the Menu bar.
– Double click on the layer tab.
2) Make the necessary changes to the attributes for the layer, then click OK to save thechanges and close the Modify Layer dialog.

Working with layers
Selecting a layer
To select a layer, click on the name tab for the layer at the bottom of the Workspace. When alayer is selected it is activated, and any objects added to the drawing are only added to that layer.
Form controls are automatically added to the Controls layer and dimension lines areautomatically added to the Dimension Lines layer.
If there are several layers in a drawing, a layer tab may not not be visible on the layer tab bar.
Use the navigation icons on the left of the layer tab bar to navigate to the layer for selection.

Hiding layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be hidden and open the Modify Layer dialog. See“Modifying layers” above for more information.
2) Deselect Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to blue. Any
objects placed on a hidden layer are no longer visible on the other layers in the drawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the layer name tab to hide the layer.

260 | Draw Guide 7.2

Showing hidden layers
1) Select the hidden layer and open the Modify Layer dialog. See “Modifying layers” above
for more information.
2) Select Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to the default
text color. Any objects placed on a hidden layer are now visible on the other layers in a
drawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the name tab of a hidden layer to makethe layer visible.

Locking layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be locked and open the Modify Layer dialog. See“Modifying layers” above for more information.
2) Select Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is underlined. Locking alayer prevents any modification of the layer.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the name tab to lock the layer.

Unlocking layers
1) Select the locked layer and open the Modify Layer dialog. See “Modifying layers” above
for more information.
2) Deselect Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is no longer underlined.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the name tab of the locked layer tounlock it.

Renaming layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be renamed and open the Modify Layer dialog.
2) Enter a new name in the Name text box. See “Modifying layers” above for more
information.
3) Alternatively, right-click on the name tab of the layer and select Rename Layer from thecontext menu. The text becomes editable allowing the name to be changed. Click outside
the tab area to save the change.
4) Alternatively, hold down the Alt key and click on the name tab. The text becomes editableallowing the name to be changed. Click outside the tab area to save the change.

Note
Only layers that have been added to a drawing can be renamed or deleted. The
default layers Layout, Controls, Dimension Lines and Background objects
cannot be renamed or deleted.

Deleting layers
1) Right-click on the name tab of the layer that is going to be deleted and select Delete
Layer from the context menu.
2) Confirm the deletion of the layer. The layer and all of the objects on the layer are deleted.

Moving objects between layers
If objects are selected on a layer, the Status bar indicates how many objects are selected. Movethese selected objects from one layer to another layer using one of the following methods:•

Click and drag the selected objects to the name tab of the destination layer and release
the mouse button. The position of the moved objects does not change and the layer
where the objects have been placed is displayed in the Status bar.
Multiple layers | 261

•

Go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar or right-click on the selected objects and select Cutfrom the context menu. Select the destination layer, then go to Edit > Paste on the Menu
bar or right-click on the Workspace and select Paste from the context menu. The
position of the moved objects does not change and the layer where the objects havebeen placed is displayed in the Status bar.

Dimensioning
Draw allows objects to be dimensioned and display these dimensions to make a drawing look
more like an engineering drawing. When dimensions are created, they are automatically placedon the Dimension Lines layer.

Configuring dimensioning
Two ways are available to access the options to configure dimensioning. Both methods use a
dialog where the length, measurement, and guide properties of a dimension line can be changed.

Drawing object styles
1) Open the Graphics Styles dialog (Figure 283) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Styles on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Styles
deck on the Sidebar, then right-click on a style and select Modify from the context
menu.

Figure 283: Graphic Styles dialog - Dimensioning page262 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Use the keyboard shortcut F11 to open the Styles deck on the Sidebar, then right-click
on a style and select Modify from the context menu.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck, then right-click on a style andselect Modify from the context menu.
2) Click on Dimensioning to open the Dimensioning page in the dialog.
3) Make the changes required to dimensioning using the various options in the Line andLegend sections on the Dimensioning page.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.
5) To reset the dimensioning options to the default properties of the template, open theGraphics Style dialog as given in Steps 1 and 2 above, then click on Standard.

Dimension line dialog
1) Draw a dimension line. See “Dimensioning objects” on page 265 for more information.
2) Right-click on the dimension line and select Dimensions from the context menu to open
the Dimension line dialog (Figure 284).
3) Make the required changes for dimensioning using the various options in the Dimension
line dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension line dialog.

Dimensioning options
The dimensioning options in the Dimensions page in the Graphics Style dialog and theDimension Line dialog are as follows. The preview in the dialogs changes as the following
options are changed showing how the dimension line will appear in a drawing. An example
dimension line is shown in Figure 285.

Figure 284: Dimension Line dialog
Dimensioning | 263

Figure 285: Example dimension line•

Line – sets the distances between the dimension line and guides with respect to eachother, the dimension baseline and the object. The baseline is not visible in a drawing, but
is indicated by baseline points on each of the guides.
– Line distance – specifies the distance between the dimension line and the object or
the baseline. A minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text
box. The lower the value, the closer the dimension line is to the object or baseline.
– Guide overhang – is the distance the guide either extends above the dimension line oris below the dimension line. A minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can beentered in the text box. Positive values cause the guide overhang to extend above thedimension line. Negative values cause the guide overhang to be below the baseline.
– Guide distance – specifies the length of the right and left guides below the dimension
line toward the object. A minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in
the text box. Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and further awayfrom the object. Negative values extend the guides below the baseline and closer tothe object.
– Left guide – specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. A
minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive
values extend the guide below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values
move the guide away from the object.
– Right guide – specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. A
minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive
values extend the guide below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values
move the guide away from the object.
– Measure below object – reverses the positions and lengths of the dimension line andguides set in Line options.
– Decimal places – specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line
properties.

•

Legend – sets the properties of the dimension text.
– Text position – determines the position of the dimension text with respect to thedimension line and the guides. The AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal checkboxes must
be empty before a text position can be assigned.
– AutoVertical – determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text.
– AutoHorizontal – determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text.

264 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Parallel to line – displays, when selected, the text parallel to the dimension line or,when deselected, at 90 degrees to the dimension line.
– Show measurement units – shows or hides the dimension measurement units. A
measurement unit can be selected from the drop-down list.

Note
The dimensioning options are linked and stored with the current work page. All thechanges that made apply only to this drawing. New drawings are started with thestandard properties of Draw. If the dimensioning options are to be used for futuredrawings, save the drawing as a template.

Guide selection handles
The guide selection handles at the top and bottom of the guides are used to extend the guides
more than the limits of -10mm to 10mm. With reference to the dimension example in Figure 285,
the guide selection handles are used as follows:•Top guide selection handles – select either selection handle and drag the handle toincrease or decrease the guide overhang of both guides.

•

Lower left guide selection handle – select the left guide selection and drag the handle
to increase or decrease of the left guide distance.

•

Lower right guide selection handle – select the right guide selection and drag thehandle to increase or decrease of the right guide distance.

Tip
When dimensioning objects, it is recommended to use the zoom function, guide lines
and snap functions so dimension lines can be accurately placed on an object. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.

Dimensioning objects
1) Click on the triangle ▼ next to the Lines and Arrows icon on the Drawing toolbar toopen the Lines and Arrows pop-up toolbar (Figure 286).
2) Click on Dimension Line and the cursor changes to shape, for example to a cross. The
shape depends on the computer setup.
3) Position the cursor at one corner of the object, then click and drag the cursor to the othercorner of the object to draw the dimension line. To restrict drawing the dimension line in
the horizontal or vertical direction, press and hold the Shift key while dragging the cursor.
4) Release the mouse button when the other corner of the object is reached and thedimension line is drawn with the dimension automatically added (as shown in Figure 287).
The dimension line is also placed automatically on the Dimension Lines layer.
5) To edit the text of the dimension, double-click on an unselected dimension line to entertext edit mode and make any necessary changes. Click outside the dimension line tosave the changes.
6) To configure the dimension line, see “Configuring dimensioning” on page 262.

Note
After editing the dimension text, entering text and then deleting text, save thedrawing and reopen it to enable automatic measurements for dimensioning.

Dimensioning | 265

Figure 286: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Figure 287: Example of dimensioning an
objectNote
If drawing to scale (see below), the dimension configuration values in the Graphics
Style dialog and the Dimension Line dialog will also be to scale. For example, avalue of 10mm in the dialog results in a dimension value of 300mm if the scale has
been set to 1:30.

Drawing to scale
In Draw, the predefined drawing area is called the Workspace is normally Letter or A4 page size
depending on the computer setup and the default printer connected to the computer. However,depending on the actual size of the drawn objects, it is often convenient to reduce or enlarge thedrawing by scaling (for example 1:10 or 2:1).
Specify the drawing scale value by going to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General(Figure 288) and selecting a value from the Drawing scale drop-down list. The default setting forthis option is 1:1. When a change is made to the drawing scale, it is reflected in the rulers at the
top and left side of of the Workspace.
Any change in the drawing scale has no effect on the basic drawing operations. Draw
automatically calculates the necessary values (for example, dimension lines). The spacing of thegrid points is independent of drawing scale as the grid is only a visual drawing aid and not a
drawing element.
An increase in scale (for example 1:4) allows large objects to be drawn that would not fit into thepaper size for a drawing. A decrease in drawing scale (for example 4:1) allows small objects tobe drawn accurately at an increased size and make them easier to understand. Examples ofdrawing to scale are shown in Figure 289 where all three rectangles are the same size in thedrawing.
•

Left rectangle – drawn at the default 1:1 scale and dimensioned.

•Center rectangle – drawing scale changed to 1:4 and the dimensions were automaticallyincreased by Draw to reflect the decrease in scale.

•

Right rectangle – drawing scale changed to 4:1 and the dimensions were automaticallydecreased by Draw to reflect the increase in scale.

266 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 288: Options LibreOffice Draw General dialog

Figure 289: Examples of drawing to scale

Figure 290: Example of multiple windows

Multiple views of a drawing
Several views of the same drawing can be opened and used in LibreOffice Draw. These views
are displayed in windows that can use different settings for layers (visible, printable and locked),different zoom levels, different origins, or display different pages of the drawing and even use
master page and normal page at the same time. However, make sure that the correct view isactive when saving a drawing.
To open a new window showing the drawing, go to Window > New Window on the Menu bar.
Arrange the windows according to the computer operating system and display preferences. Eachwindow open acts on the same drawing. A change to the drawing in one window is immediatelyreflected in the other windows.
In each window opened, the filename in the title bar is automatically numbered as shown by theexample in Figure 290. If other LibreOffice documents are open at the same time, the list of
windows includes all the open documents. The active window has a marker by its filename in thelist. Switch between windows by clicking on a name in the list, or by clicking on the window itself
if it is visible on the display.
To close a window, go to Window > Close Window on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+W, or click on Close in the Menu bar of the window.
Multiple views of a drawing | 267

Figure 291: Arrows theme in Gallery deck on
Sidebar

Gallery
Draw includes several images in the Gallery. These images are grouped into themes (forexample Arrows, Bullets, Diagrams, and so on). The Gallery deck on the Sidebar (Figure 291)
lists the available themes. Click on a theme and its images are displayed below the theme list.
•

For a detailed view of the images in a gallery theme, click on Detailed View at the bottom
left of the Sidebar.

•

For an icon view of the images in a gallery theme, click on Icon View at the bottom left of
the Sidebar

Using the Gallery
1) Click on Gallery on the Sidebar, or go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
2) Select a theme from the available options.
3) Use one of the following methods to place an image into a drawing:– Click on an image in the Gallery deck and drag the image into a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Insert from the context menu. The image is placedat the centre of a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Copy from the context menu. Paste the image into
the drawing and the image is placed at the center of the drawing.
4) Edit the gallery image to the drawing requirements. For more information on editing
images and pictures, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.

268 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 292: Properties of New Theme dialog - General page

Figure 293: Properties of New Theme dialog - Files page

Creating themes and adding images
1) Open the Gallery deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on New on the Gallery deck to open the Properties of New Theme dialog(Figure 292).
3) Enter a name for the theme in the text box.
4) Click on Files to open the Files page as shown by the example in Figure 293.
5) Click on Find Files to open a Select Path dialog.
6) Browse to the folder that contains the images required and select the folder

Gallery | 269

7) Click OK to select the files contained in the folder and the Select Path dialog closes. The
list of files contained in the folder now appear in the Files page as shown by the example
in Figure 293.
8) Select the files required for the new theme and click Add. The selected files disappear
from the file list and the images appear in the Gallery.
9) If all the files in the list are to be added, click Add All. All the files disappear from the list
and the images appear in the Gallery.
10) Click OK when finished adding files and close the Properties of New Theme dialog. The
name of the new theme appears in the Gallery deck.

Note
If a Draw object is added to a theme, the object loses its connection to Draw graphic
styles and all properties are set as direct formatting.

Deleting gallery themes and images
1) Right-click on a theme or image in the Gallery and select Delete from the context menu.
2) Click Yes in the confirmation dialog and the image or theme is deleted from the Gallery.

Note
Only themes and images that have added to Draw can be deleted. The themes andimages that were included with the installation of LibreOffice cannot be deleted.

Note
An image is a linked file and only the link is deleted from the Gallery. The original
image file is not deleted.

Updating the Gallery
All images in the Gallery are linked files. Occasionally, it is beneficial to update a theme that has
been added to Draw to make sure that all files are still accessible. Right-click on a theme that has
at least one file added to the theme and select Update from the context menu.

Renaming themes
To rename a theme that has been added to Draw, right-click on the theme name and selectRename from the context menu.

Note
Only themes and images that have added to Draw can be renamed. The themes andimages that were included with the installation of LibreOffice cannot be renamed.

ColorsDraw (like all LibreOffice components) uses colors grouped into color palettes. Colors can becreated to suit drawing requirements. All custom colors created are placed in the custom color
palette. The following explains the color models that can be used to create a custom color.

270 | Draw Guide 7.2

•

RGB – stands for Red, Green, Blue. The RGB color model is based on the additive color
model of light waves and is designed for electronic displays and computers. This means,the more color added, the closer a color moves towards white. RGB is created using
scales from 0 to 255. This means that black is when R=0, G=0, and B=0 and white iswhen R=255, G=255, and B=255. LibreOffice uses the RGB color model internally for
printing in all of its software modules.

•

CMYK – stands for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (Black). It is a subtractive color model
where colors are subtracted to get to white. It is mainly used in printing, which is why the
ink cartridges for a printer are labeled CMYK. CMYK works on a scale of 0 to 100. If
C=100, M=100, Y=100, and K=100, the color produced is black. If C=0, M=0, Y=0, and
K=0, the color produced is white.

•

HSB – stands for Hue, Saturation, Brightness. HSB values are an alternative
representation of the RGB color model and was designed to be more closely aligned withthe way human vision perceives color-making attributes. Use HSB values to fine tune
any custom colors that are created.

Tip
More information on color models and color values can be found at
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Color_model.

Changing colors
When changing colors in objects, color palettes are used to select colors. These color palettes
are installed with LibreOffice and are used in all the LibreOffice modules. Using these color
palettes is similar across all types of objects, but accessing the color palettes does vary
according to the type of object selected.

Color Bar
Although LibreOffice includes tools that to precisely specify a color, it also includes a Color Bar(Figure 294) that allows the area fill, border, or line color of an object to be quickly changed in a
drawing.
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar to open the Color Bar. When the Color Bar
opens, it is labelled Color Palette.
3) Left click on a color to change the area fill color or right-click on a color to change theborder or line color of a selected object.

Figure 294: Color Bar (Color Palette)
Colors | 271

Figure 295: Area dialog - Area Color page4) Left click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to remove the color froman object fill, or right-click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to
remove the color from an object border,5) To close the Color Bar, go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar and deselect Color Bar.

Note
The colors available in the Color Bar are from the Standard color palette that is partof the LibreOffice installation.

Area dialog
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog (Figure 295) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
3) Click on Area, then click on Color to open the Color page.
4) In Colors, select a color palette from the Palette drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the ones displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from Recent Colors.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The selected fill color appears inthe selected object.

Area panel on the Sidebar
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 296).
3) Select Color from the Fill drop-down list.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Fill Color to open the palette last used.

272 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 296: Area panel in Properties deck on
Sidebar5) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected fill color is applied to the object.

Fill Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Fill Color on the Line and Filling or Draw toolbar toopen the last color palette used.
3) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
4) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected fill color is applied to the selected line.

Line dialog
1) Select a line or an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 297) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line or object and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on Line to open the Line page.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color to open the last color palette used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.

Colors | 273

Figure 297: Line dialog - Line page - Color

Figure 298: Line panel in Properties deck on
Sidebar274 | Draw Guide 7.2

6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.
7) Click OK to save the color change and close the Line dialog.

Line panel on the Sidebar
1) Select a line or an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 298).
3) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color to open the palette last used.
4) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Line Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars
1) Select a line or object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color on the Line and Filling or Draw toolbar toopen the last color palette used.
3) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
4) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Figure 299: Character dialog - Font Effects page - Color

Colors | 275

Changing text color
Changing text color is very similar to changing the color of an area fill, object border, or line. The
Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens and replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when text isselected in a drawing. If the Text Formatting toolbar does not appear, go to View > Toolbars on
the Menu bar and select Text Formatting.

Character dialog
1) Select the text in a text box or object and make sure the text is highlighted.
2) Open the Character dialog (Figure 299) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the highlighted text and select Character from the context menu.
3) Click on Font Effects to open the Font Effects page.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the last color palette used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected color is applied to the selected text.
7) Click OK to save the color change and close the Character dialog.

Character panel on the Sidebar
1) Select the text in a text box or object and make sure the text is highlighted.

Figure 300: Character panel in Properties
deck on Sidebar

276 | Draw Guide 7.2

2) Open the Character panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 300).
3) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the color palette last used.
4) Select a color palette to use from the palette drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected color is applied to the selected text.

Creating colors
Using Pick a Color dialog
1) Select the object or text and open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 301) using one of thefollowing methods:– Open the Area dialog, then click on Color to open the Color page and click on Pick.
– Open the Area section in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to theright of Fill Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottomof the color palette.
– Open the Line dialog, then open a color palette in Color and click on Custom Colorat the bottom of the color palette.
– Open the Line section in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to theright of Line Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottomof the color palette.
– Open the Character dialog, then open a color palette in Font color and click on
Custom Color at the bottom of the color palette.

Figure 301: Pick a Color dialog

Colors | 277

– Open the Character section in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle▼to the right of Font Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at
the bottom of the color palette.
2) Select a color range in the vertical color bar on in the Pick a Color that approximately
matches the custom color being created.
3) Click and drag the small target circle in the color box until the color matches the custom
color required. The values for RGB, HSB and CMYK change as the small target circle isdragged around the color box. This helps in creating the exact color if these color values
are known.
4) Alternatively, if the color values or hex number are known, enter these values in theappropriate text box. The values in all the text boxes changes to match the new values.
For example, enter HSB values, the RGB, CMYK and Hex values also change to match.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Pick a Color dialog.

Note
When using the Line or Character dialog to open the Pick a Color dialog, the custom
color created cannot be saved into the Custom color palette or renamed with a moremeaningful name. The custom color created is named using the hex value that isdisplayed in the Pick a Color dialog. Only the Area dialog has the ability to rename
custom colors and save custom colors into the Custom palette.

Note
LibreOffice uses the RGB color model for printing in color. The RGB values of a
selected color are displayed below the preview boxes.

Using Area dialog
1) Open the Area dialog and click on Color to open the Color page.
2) In New, enter the RGB values or, if known, the Hex value into the text boxes. The color
changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
3) Alternatively, in New, use the minus and plus signs for the RGB values to decrease or
increase the values. The color changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
4) Click OK to change the color and close the Area dialog.

Adding custom colors
If necessary, add a custom color to the Custom color palette using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in Recent Colors.
3) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the color in the text box,5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. The custom color appears in
the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Renaming custom colors
Only a custom color can be renamed using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.

278 | Draw Guide 7.2

2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom color palette.
3) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the color in the text box,5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. The custom color appears in
the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Note
Renaming a custom color does not actually rename the custom color, but adds thecustom color to the Custom palette with a new name.

Note
It is important to use a memorable names for custom colors so that they can beeasily recognized in the Custom palette. By default, a custom color is given a hex
number, which makes it difficult identifying colors when there is more than one
custom color.

Deleting custom colors
Only a custom color can be deleted using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom color palette.
3) Click on Delete. There is no confirmation given when deleting custom colors.
4) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Bézier curves
In LibreOffice, Bézier2 curves can be used in a drawing. A curve is defined by means of a startpoint, an end point, and, where necessary, control points. For points on the curve the terms
nodes or anchors are often used. For more information and an explanation of the mathematicalbackground of Bézier curves, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bezier_curve.
Bézier curves are very useful for experimenting with the shape and form of curves. In point modethe curve alignment can be changed by dragging the points with the cursor. In the example
shown in Figure 302, the curve leaves the start point P0 in the direction of the first control point
P1 and arrives at the end point P3 from the direction of the second control point P2. The moredistant a control point is from the start or end point, the smaller the curvature at that point.

Drawing Bézier curves1) Click on Curve in the Curves and Polygons section in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar orin the Drawing toolbar.
2) Click at the start point for the curve and drag the cursor to the approximate position of theend point for the curve.
3) Release the mouse button and drag the end point of the curve to its end position.
4) Double-click when the end position of the curve is reached and a curve is drawn. The arcof the curve is determined by the distance dragged to create the end point.
2

Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, an engineer working with the Renault car manufacturer,
who developed the technique in the 1960s. The technology was intended to make modeling thesurface of vehicles easier.

Bézier curves | 279

Figure 302: Example of a Bézier curve

Figure 303: Edit Points toolbar
5) Switch to points mode using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Points on the Menu bar.
– Click on Points on the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
6) Open the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 303) using one of the following methods. The Edit
Points toolbar does not become visible until a point has been selected on a curve.
– Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Edit Points.
– Click on Points on the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
– If added to the toolbar, click on Points on the Drawing toolbar.
7) Click once on the curve to display the start and end points. The start point of the curve islarger than the end point.
8) Click on a start or end point to display the control points. Control points appear at the endof a dashed line connected to the selected point, as shown in Figure 302.
9) Click on the control point and drag it to a new position to change the shape of the curve.
10) When the shape of the curve is correct, release the mouse button to fix the curve.
11) Click anywhere on the workspace to deselect the curve and stop editing points.

Edit Points tools
After the initial opening of the Edit Points toolbar, when an object is selected that has been
converted to a curve or polygon, the toolbar is displayed. The tools available on the Edit Points
toolbar allow the editing of a Bézier curve and changing of the curve shape. A point on a Bézier
curve has to be selected for all the tools on the Edit Points toolbar to become available.
•

Move Points – click and drag on a point to move it to another location.
– The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement and changes shape as theselected point changes position.

280 | Draw Guide 7.2

– Click and drag on the curve between points to move the entire curve without distorting
the form.
•

Insert Points – activates the insert mode when selected and inserts smooth points onto
a curve. Insert mode remains active after inserting points. Select Move Points todeactivate insert mode.
– The inserted point can be moved while insert mode is activated.
– If a corner or symmetrical point is required, insert a smooth point first and convert the
point to a corner or symmetrical point.

•

Delete Points – deletes selected points. If several points are to be deleted, hold down
the Shift key whilst selecting points and before clicking on Delete Points.

•

Convert To Curve – converts a curve into a straight line or a straight line into a curve asshown in Figure 304.
– Select a single point and the curved segment after the point converts to a straight line,
or coverts a straight line segment to a curve after the point.
– When converting a segment from a curve to a straight line, each point at each end of
the segment becomes a control point similar to the start or end point.
– When converting a segment from a straight line to a curve, each control point at eachend of the segment becomes a smooth point.

Figure 304: Example of converting a curved
segment to a line•

Close Bézier – closes a freeform line or curve by connecting the start point with the end
point creating an object with area fill.

•

Split Curve – splits a curve into two or more curves. Select a point or points and click on
Split Curve to create separate segments of a curve. Deselect the curve, then select asegment to move or edit it.

•

Corner Point – converts a selected point into a corner point, as shown in Figure 305.
Corner points have two movable control points, which are independent from each other,and allows a corner to be created in a curve.

Figure 305: Example of a corner point•

Smooth Transition – converts a corner or symmetrical point into a smooth point, asshown in Figure 306. Both control points of a smooth transition point are aligned inparallel and can only be moved simultaneously. The control points may differ in length,
allowing the degree of curvature to be varied.
Bézier curves | 281

Figure 306: Example of a smooth transition point•

Symmetric Transition – converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetricalpoint, as shown in Figure 307. Both control points of a symmetrical transition point arealigned in parallel and have the same length. These control points can only be moved
simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.

Figure 307: Example of a symmetrical transition
point•

Eliminate Points – allows selection of several points before using the Delete Points
tool. This is useful when deleting a straight line segment to create a complete curve.

Adding comments to a drawing
Draw supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc. For more about adding, navigating,and replying to comments, see the Getting Started Guide for more information. Comments in
Draw cannot be printed. To reply to a comment in Draw, a new comment has to be added.
1) Go to Insert > Comment on the Menu bar and a comment box (Figure 308) appears in
the upper left-hand corner of a drawing. Draw automatically adds the user name and dateat the bottom of the comment and places a comment marker on the drawing page.
2) Type or paste a comment into the comment text box.
3) To apply basic formatting to the text, right-click on the text and select the formatting option
from the context menu.
4) To delete a comment, use one of the following methods:– Right-click in the comment box and select a delete option from the context menu.
– Right-click on the comment marker and select a delete option from the context menu.
– Click on the triangle ▼ in the bottom right of the comment box and select a delete
option from the context menu.
5) To move a comment, click on the comment marker and drag it to a new position.
6) To hide comments, use one of the following methods:– Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Comments to hide the comment and thecomment marker.
– Click on the drawing outside of the comment to hide the comment. The comment
marker remains visible.
7) To show comments, go to View > Comments on the Menu bar and click on the comment
marker.

282 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 308: Comments in Draw

Note
For the user name and initials to appear in a comment, enter the user data in Tools> Options > LibreOffice > User Data dialog. If more than one person edits the
document, each author is automatically allocated a different background color.

Coordinate system
X and Y axes
The x-axis is the horizontal position of an object and the y-axis is the vertical position of an
object. The rulers do not show a minus sign if there are negative coordinates. However, theminus sign for negative coordinates is shown in the position field in the Status Bar and the
Position and Size dialog.

Workspace
The Workspace in Draw is larger than the drawing page. The area outside the drawing page is
one page width right and left and a half page above and below the drawing page. The size of thedrawing page is indicated by highlighted portions in the horizontal and vertical rulers.
Draw objects can be drawn partly or wholly outside the drawing page and these objects are
saved with the drawing. However, when the drawing is printed or exported, any object or portionof an object not on the drawing page is not included. This allows the Workspace area around thedrawing page to be used for drafts when creating objects.

Object position
The coordinates of objects and snap guides are shown relative to the origin. The default origin for
coordinates (0.00/0.00 position) is the top-left corner of the drawing page without margins or the
top left corner of the drawing page where the margins intersect. To change the default origin,click and drag the intersection of the rulers in the top left corner of the Workspace to the desired
position. Guide lines appear as the intersection is dragged from its default origin to its new
position. This origin setting is only for the current view and is not saved in the document.
The area inside the default origin is the area used for the grid when the option Snap to Grid andDisplay Grid are selected.

Coordinate system | 283

To reset the default origin back to its original setting at the top-left corner of the page,
double-click in the top-left corner on the Workspace where the horizontal and vertical rulers
meet.

Accuracy
Draw internally uses integer values in 1/100 mm. Therefore, for example, it is not possible to get
an exact position for 1/8 inch. Also, many dialog fields are restricted to two decimals.
To work with the maximum possible accuracy, go to Tools > Options > Draw > General and set
the option Unit of measurement to Millimeter. The rulers will show metric units after this option
has been selected, To use another measurement unit for the rulers, right-click on a ruler andselect the measurement unit from the context menu. The horizontal and vertical rulers can havedifferent measurement units.

284 | Draw Guide 7.2

Draw Guide 7.2

Chapter 12User Interface Variants

Introduction
By default, commands and tools used in LibreOffice Draw are grouped in a user interface
consisting of cascading menus and toolbars. The functions and use of these cascading menus
and toolbars are described in previous chapters of this user guide.
This chapter describes the user interface variants that are available for LibreOffice Draw. A user
then has the option to select the user interface that suits their requirements and methods ofcreating drawings in LibreOffice Draw.

Note
When changing the user interface, the variant can be applied only to LibreOffice
Draw, or applied to all the modules in LibreOffice.

Selecting user interface
To select a user interface variant or switching between the user interface variants:
1) Go to View > User Interface on the Menu bar to open the Select Your Preferred User
Interface dialog (Figure 309).
2) In UI variants, select one of the variants. An example of the selected variant is shown in
the Preview box, along with a short description.
3) Click on Apply to Draw to apply the variant selection to LibreOffice Draw only, or click on
Apply to All to apply the variant to all the LibreOffice modules. The LibreOffice windowchanges to match the selected variant.
4) Click Close to close the dialog.

Figure 309: Select Your User Preferred User Interface dialog

Note
If the option Enable experimental features has been selected in the Tools >Options > Advanced dialog, several more variants appear in UI variants. Being
experimental, these variants are not described in this user guide.

286 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 310: Standard Toolbar user interface in LibreOffice Draw 7.2

Note
In all the user interface variants, the Sidebar can be hidden or shown by clicking on
the Hide/Show button on the left of the Sidebar,

Standard Toolbar UIThe Standard Toolbar user interface is the default view when LibreOffice is installed and theWorkspace opened for the first time. Figure 310 shows an example of the default Workspaceview in LibreOffice Draw, which normally consists of the following.
•

Menu bar at the top of the Workspace.

•Standard toolbar positioned below the Menu bar.

•

Line and Filling toolbar positioned below the Standard toolbar.

•

Drawing toolbar positioned vertically on the left of the Workspace.

•

Sidebar positioned on the right of the Workspace.

For more information on the Draw Workspace, see Chapter 1, Introducing Draw.

Tabbed UIThe Tabbed user interface provides a familiar interface for users coming from proprietary officesuites, for example Microsoft Office. This user interface is divided into tabs, where each tab
displays a set of tools grouped by context. The context changes depending on the object
selected and the LibreOffice module being used.
It includes a Menu bar, a Tab bar, and tool icons grouped in context that would be normally usedin LibreOffice Draw. If the tool icons on a tab page do not fit into the width of the Draw window, adouble chevron >> appears at the right end of the row. Click the double chevron >> to display
more commands.

Tabbed UI | 287

Figure 311: Quick menu options

Figure 312: Icon bar
On Windows and Linux operating systems, the Menu bar can be hidden or displayed by clicking
on Menubar at the left end of the Tab bar.
On the right of the Tab bar, a Quick menu (≡) (Figure 311) is available giving access to somecommonly used commands and links. Some of the Quick menu items have submenus, indicatedby a triangle ► on the right. The Quick menu is the same for all tabs.
On the left of the Tab bar, an icon bar (Figure 312) is available giving access to some commonlyused tools – Menu bar; Open (Ctrl+O); Save (Ctrl+S);Undo (Ctrl+Z); Redo (Ctrl+Y).
The Tabbed user interface can be customized using the Notebookbar page of the Customize
dialog to show or hide the individual tools on the various tabs. For more information on
customization of LibreOffice, see the Getting Started Guide and the Writer Guide.

Note
When using the Tabbed user interface, the Draw toolbars are removed from view. If it
is necessary, toolbars can be opened and used by going to View > Toolbars on the
Menu bar or Quick menu > Toolbars.

Fixed tabs
The fixed tabs in the Tabbed user interface for Draw are described on the following pages. The
illustrations show the left and right ends of the tabs separately so they are large enough to moreeasily see the commands.

File tab
The File tab (Figure 313) is a fixed tab providing commands to create new documents; open,
save, print, and close documents; manage templates; export to PDF and EPUB; display
document properties; add a digital signature; and sign an existing PDF.
The File tab has two menus (Figures 314 and 315): File and Help. The File tab menu contains
the same commands as the tools available on the tab. The Help tab menu provides links to avariety of resources.

288 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 313: Tabbed user interface - File tab

Figure 314: File tab menu

Figure 315: Help tab
menu

Figure 316: Tabbed user interface - Home tab

Tabbed UI | 289

Figure 317: Home tab menu

Home tab
The Home tab (Figure 316) is a fixed tab providing commands to cut, copy, paste, and format
text; insert common items (for example images, tables, charts); apply, update, and edit drawing
styles; and so on. The Home tab menu (Figure 317) at the right end of the Tab bar provides
additional commands that are not on the tab.

Insert tab
The Insert tab (Figure 318) is a fixed tab providing commands to insert many commonly used
items. The Insert tab menu (Figure 319) at the right end of the Tab bar provides some of thesame commands.

Figure 318: Tabbed user interface - Insert tab

Figure 319: Insert tabmenu
290 | Draw Guide 7.2

Layout tab
The Layout tab (Figure 320) is a fixed tab providing commands to create the drawing pagelayout. The Layout tab menu (Figure 321) provides extra commands to create the drawing pagelayout.

Figure 320: Tabbed user interface - Layout tab

Figure 321: Layout tabmenu

Review tab
The Review tab (Figure 322) is a fixed tab providing commands for spell checking text; insertingand deleting review comments; and redaction. The Review tab menu (Figure 323) provides
additional text editing commands. Some of these commands appear only if Asian or Complex
Text Layout are selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages.

Figure 322: Tabbed user interface - Review tab
Tabbed UI | 291

Figure 323: Review tab menu

Figure 324: Tabbed user interface - View tab

Figure 325: View tabmenu

292 | Draw Guide 7.2

View tab
The View tab (Figure 324) is a fixed tab providing commands for the display of a drawing onscreen. The View tab menu (Figure 325) provides additional commands relating to the display on
a drawing on screen.

Extension tab
The Extension tab (Figure 326) is a fixed tab containing only the command to access the
Extension Manager allowing the installation of extensions that are compatible for use in
LibreOffice.

Figure 326: Tabbed user interface Extension tab

Tools tab
The Tools tab (Figure 327) is a fixed tab providing several tools for macros; color replacer; media
player; and form creation. The Tools tab menu (Figure 328) provides some of the samecommands, plus extra tools for organizing macros and dialogs; image map; data sources; filter
settings; extension manager; and options.

Figure 327: Tabbed user interface - Tools tab

Figure 328: Tools tab
menu

Tabbed UI | 293

Additional tabs
Additional tabs appear when an object in Draw is selected and are displayed between the View
and Extension tabs. The illustrations show the left and right ends of the tabs separately so they
are large enough to more easily see the commands.

Draw tab
The Draw tab (Figure 329) is only available when a draw object is selected in a drawing. It
provides commands for editing, transforming, grouping, aligning, and distributing draw objects.
The Draw tab menu (Figure 330) provides a similar set of commands for editing, transforming
and converting draw objects.

Figure 329: Tabbed user Interface - Draw tab

Figure 330: Draw tabmenu

294 | Draw Guide 7.2

Image tab
The Image tab (Figure 331) only becomes available when an image is selected in a drawing
such as a photograph, Fontwork, OLE object, or QR code. It provides commands for working withthese images, including captions, cropping, borders and area styles and colors, anchors,
wrapping, positioning, and filtering. The Image tab menu (Figure 332) provides links to dialogs
for working with images.

Figure 331: Tabbed user interface - Image tab

Figure 332: Image tab menu

Figure 333: Tabbed user interface - Object tab

Tabbed UI | 295

Object tab
The Object tab (Figure 333) only becomes available when an object, such as a chart, isselected. It provides commands to position, resize, choose colors and borders for the selected
object. The Object tab menu (Figure 334) provides extra commands to match the type of object
selected.

Figure 334: Object tab
menu

Table tab
The Table tab (Figure 335) only becomes available when a table is selected in a drawing. It
provides tools to format a table to the drawing requirements. The Table tab menu (Figure 336)
includes extra commands for editing a table.

Figure 335: Tabbed user interface - Table tab

Figure 336: Table tab menu

Media tab
The Media tab (Figure 337) only becomes available when a media object is selected in a
drawing. It provides commands for positioning and running an audio or video file. The Media tabmenu (Figure 338) includes extra commands for editing a media object.

296 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 337: Tabbed user interface - Media tab

Figure 338: Media tab
menu

Single Toolbar UI & Sidebar UIWhen selected, the Single Toolbar and Sidebar user interfaces only show the Menu bar with notoolbars. However, toolbars can be added to either of these user interfaces by going to View >Toolbars on the Menu bar and selecting the required toolbar from the options available. For
more information on toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars in this guide and the Getting Started
Guide.

Tabbed Compact UIThe Tabbed Compact user interface has the same tabs as the Tabbed user interface, but thecommands on each tab are arranged as a single row of tools. Some of these tools havedrop-down menus with extra options. Figure 339 shows an example of the File tab in the Tabbed
Compact user interface.
The tab menu on the right of the Tabbed Compact user interface provides the same options as
the tab menus in the Tabbed user interface, see “Tabbed UI” on page 287 for more information.

Figure 339: Tabbed Compact user interface - File tabGroupedbar Compact UIThe Groupedbar Compact user interface (Figure 340), with a Draw object selected, is divided
into groups that contain commands organized as sets of tools and menus. Clicking on the double
chevron >> displays more tools for editing an object.
Groupedbar Compact UI | 297

The Groupedbar menu (Figure 341) on the right-hand end of this interface provides extra
commands for working with LibreOffice Draw, including convenient ways to change the userinterface and access toolbars.

Figure 340: Groupedbar user interface with Draw object selected

Figure 341: Groupedbar
menu

Contextual Single UIThe Contextual Single user interface displays a single toolbar to suit the type of object that has
been selected. Figure 342 shows an example of Contextual Single user interface when a draw
object is selected. Clicking on the double chevron >> displays more tools for editing an object.

Figure 342: Contextual Single user interface with Draw object selected298 | Draw Guide 7.2

Draw Guide 7.2

Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
LibreOffice can be used without requiring a pointing device, such as a mouse or trackball, byusing the keyboard shortcuts that are available in Draw. Tasks as varied and complex as docking
and un-docking toolbars and windows, or changing the size or position of objects can all beaccomplished with using keyboard shortcuts. Although LibreOffice has an extensive set of
keyboard shortcuts, each LibreOffice module has keyboard shortcuts that are specific to thatmodule.
For help with LibreOffice keyboard shortcuts, or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only, search
the LibreOffice Help using the “shortcut” or “accessibility” keywords.
In addition to using keyboard shortcuts that are listed in this appendix, keyboard shortcuts canalso be defined. Assign keyboard shortcuts to standard Impress functions or macros and savethem for use with Draw only, or with the other modules in LibreOffice. To customize keyboard
shortcuts, see the Getting Started Guide for more information.

Note
Some keyboard shortcuts are not available for computers using macOS and are
indicated in the following tables by a blank cell.

Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts
Draw function keys
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectF1

F1

Opens LibreOffice Draw help.

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

F3

F3Enters a group of objects for editing.

Shift + F3

Shift + F3

Opens the Duplicate dialog of a selected object.

Ctrl + F3⌘ + F3

Exits a group of objects.

F4

F4Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
object.

F5F5Opens the Navigator.

F6

F6

Forward navigation of the emphasis within the on
screen elements.

Shift + F6

Shift + F6

Backward navigation of the emphasis within the on
screen elements.

F7

F7

Starts the spelling checker. Only available in text
editing mode.

Shift + F7

Shift + F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell checking. Only
available in text editing mode.

Ctrl + F7⌘ + F7

Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language being
used. Only available in text editing mode.

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar.

300 | Draw Guide 7.2

Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectCtrl + Shift + F8

⌘ + Shift + F8

Fits text to frame of a selected object.

Shift + F10

Shift + F10

Opens the context menu of a selected object.

F11

⌘+T

Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Draw keyboard shortcuts
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectPlus (+)

Zooms in.

Minus (-)

Zooms out.

Times (×) on
number pad

Fits the drawing to fill the Workspace view.

Divide (÷) on
number pad

Zooms in on the selected object.

Ctrl + Shift + G⌘ + Shift + G

Groups selected objects.

Shift + Ctrl + Alt+G⌘ + Shift+ Option + G

Ungroups selected group.

Ctrl + click⌘ + click

Enters a group to edit individual objects in the group.
Click outside the group to return to normal view.

Ctrl + Shift + K⌘ + Shift + K

Combines selected objects.

Ctrl + Shift + Alt+K⌘ + Shift+ Option + K

Splits a selected object that has been combined from agroup of two or more objects.

Ctrl + +⌘++Brings current selection forward.

Ctrl +Shift + +⌘ + Shift + +Brings current selection to the front.

Ctrl + -⌘+-Sends current selection backward.

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Sends current selection to the back.

Page Up

Switches to previous page. No function on the firstpage.

Page Down

Switches to next page. No function on the last page.

Ctrl+Page Up

Switches to previous layer.

Ctrl+Page Down

Switches to next layer.

Arrow

Arrow

Moves a selected object in the direction of the arrow.

Ctrl+Arrow

Ctrl+Arrow

Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow.

Left Arrow

Left Arrow

With Pages Pane selected, switches to the previous
page in a drawing. No function on the first page.

Right Arrow

Right Arrow

With Pages Pane selected, switches to the next pagein a drawing. No function on the last page.

Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts | 301

Windows
Linux

macOS

Effect

Shift

Shift

When selecting objects, adds or removes object to orfrom a selection of objects.

Shift

Shift

Hold down Shift then click and drag a selection handle
when resizing an object to maintain the proportions of
the object.

Shift

Shift

Hold down the Shift key while moving a selected object
to constrain the movement in multiples of 45 degrees.

Shift

Shift

Hold down the Shift key before selecting several
adjacent objects or characters. Click at the start of a
selection, move to the end of the selection.

Ctrl

⌘

Hold down the Ctrl (⌘) key, then click and drag aselected object to create a copy of the object. Note that
this shortcut works only when the Copy when moving
option in LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice
Draw > General is enabled (this option is enabled bydefault).

Alt

OptionHold down the Alt (Option) key and draw or resize an
object from the centre of the object.

Alt

OptionHold down the Alt (Option) key when selecting an
object that is behind the currently selected object.

Alt+ Shift

Option + Shift

Hold down the Alt (Option) + Shift keys when selecting
an object that is in front of the currently selected object.

Tab

Tab

Selects objects in the order in which they were created.

Shift + Tab

Shift + Tab

Selects objects in the reverse order in which they werecreated.

Esc

Esc

Exits current mode.

Enter

Enter

Enters text mode if a text object in the drawing isselected.

Ctrl + Enter⌘ + Enter

Inserts a new page after the selected page in a
drawing.

Home/End

Selects the first/last page in a drawing.

Editing text keyboard shortcuts
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectCtrl + -⌘+-Inserts a custom hyphen (soft hyphen) in text at the
cursor position.

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Inserts a non-breaking hyphen (hard hyphen) in text at
the cursor position.

Ctrl + Shift +Space⌘ + Shift +Space

Inserts a non-breaking space, which is not used for
hyphenation and is not expanded if the text is justified.

Shift + Enter

Shift + Enter

Inserts a line break without paragraph change.

302 | Draw Guide 7.2

Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectLeft arrow

Left arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the left.

Shift + Left arrow

Shift + Left arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the left and selects
the character.

Ctrl + Left arrow

Option + Leftarrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous
word.

Ctrl + Shift + Leftarrow

Option + Shift +Left arrow

Moves the cursor to the left and selects the word on
the left.

Right arrow

Right arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right.

Shift + Right
arrow

Shift + Rightarrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right and selects
the character.

Ctrl + Right arrow

Option + Rightarrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

Ctrl + Shift +Right arrow

Option + Shift +Right arrow

Moves the cursor to the right and selects the word on
the right.

Up arrow

Up arrow

Moves the cursor up one line.

Shift + Up arrow

Shift + Up arrow

Moves the cursor up one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.

Ctrl + Up arrow

Option + Up
arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.

Ctrl + Shift + Up
arrow

Option + Shift +Up arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor
position to the beginning of the paragraph.

Down arrow

Down arrow

Moves the cursor down one line.

Shift + Down
arrow

Shift + Down
arrow

Moves the cursor down one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.

Ctrl + Downarrow

⌘ + Down arrow

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.

Ctrl + Shift +Down arrow

Opt + Shift +Down arrow

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph. Selects
the text in the paragraph from the cursor position to theend of the paragraph.

Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Shift + Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line andselects the text from the cursor position.

Ctrl + Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text block on
the slide.

End

Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

Shift + End

Moves the cursor to the end of the line and selects the
text from the cursor position.

Ctrl + End

Moves the cursor to the end of the text block on theslide.

Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts | 303

Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectCtrl + Del

Deletes the text from the cursor position to the end of
the word.

Ctrl + Shift + Del

Deletes the text from the cursor position to the end of
the sentence.

Ctrl + Backspace⌘ + Backspace

Deletes the text from the cursor position to thebeginning of the word.

Ctrl + Shift +Backspace⌘ + Shift +Backspace

Deletes the text from the cursor position to thebeginning of the sentence.

Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts
The function key and keyboard shortcuts listed in the following tables are available in each menu
category on the Menu bar. The tables give the menu item or sub-item, operating system validity,
and the effect or purpose of the shortcut.

Note
The menus listed below are in the same order as displayed on the Menu bar from left
to right.

File menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectOpen

Ctrl + O⌘+OOpens the Open file browser allowing
navigation to a folder and file selection.

Save

Ctrl + S⌘+SSaves the open drawing.

Save As

Ctrl + Shift + S⌘ + Shift + S

Opens the Save as file browser
allowing navigation to a folder andsaving the open drawing as a new file.

Print

Ctrl + P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog allowing
selection of how the drawing is printed.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectUndo

Ctrl + Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl + Y⌘+YReverses the action of the last Undo
command.

Cut

Ctrl + X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places
it on the clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl + C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

Edit Menu

304 | Draw Guide 7.2

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectPaste

Ctrl + V⌘+V

Places the object on the clipboard into
the drawing.

Paste Special> PasteSpecialCtrl + Shift + V⌘ + Shift + V

Pastes the contents of the clipboard at
the cursor position in a format that is
specified using the Paste Special
dialog.

Select All

Ctrl + A⌘+A

Selects all objects in a drawing.

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there isan object on the drawing that uses
editable points, for example a freeform
line.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectRulersCtrl + Shift + R⌘ + Shift + R

Switches the rulers off and on in theWorkspace.

SidebarCtrl + F5

Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

Navigator

F5

F5Opens the Navigator.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectText Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens
the Text Formatting toolbar.

Hyperlink

Ctrl + K⌘+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.

Comment

Ctrl + Alt + C⌘ + Option + C

Inserts a new comment box onto theselected page.

Formatting
Mark > Insert
non-breaking
space

Ctrl + Shift +Space⌘ + Shift +Space

Inserts a non-breaking space at the
cursor position.

Formatting
Mark > Insert
Narrow
No-breakSpace

Alt + Shift +Space

Alt + Shift +Space

Inserts a narrow non-breaking space at
the cursor position.

Formatting
Mark >
No-width
Optional Break

Ctrl + /⌘+/Inserts a narrow no-width optional breakat the cursor position.

PointsView menu

Opens or closes the Sidebar.

Insert menu

Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts | 305

Format menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectText > Bold

Ctrl + B⌘+B

Applies Bold format to selected text.

Text > Italic

Ctrl + I⌘+I

Applies Italic format to selected text.

Text >
Superscript

Ctrl + Shift + P⌘ + Shift + P

Reduces the font size of the selected
text and raises the text above thebaseline.

Text >
Subscript

Ctrl + Shift + B⌘ + Shift + B

Reduces the font size of the selected
text and lowers the text below thebaseline.

Text > Increase
Size

Ctrl + ]⌘+]Increases the point size of selected text.

Text >
Decrease Size

Ctrl + [⌘+[Decreases the point size of selectedtext.

Spacing > Line
Spacing 1

Ctrl + 1⌘+1

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph toa single line.

Spacing Line
Spacing 5

Ctrl + 5⌘+5

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph toone and half lines.

Spacing > Line
Spacing 2

Ctrl + 2⌘+2

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph totwo lines.

Align Text >Left

Ctrl + L⌘+L

Sets the paragraph alignment to leftaligned.

Align Text >CenterCtrl + E⌘+E

Sets the paragraph alignment to centeraligned.

Align Text >Right

Ctrl + R⌘+R

Sets the paragraph alignment to rightaligned.

Align Text >JustifiedCtrl + J⌘+J

Sets the paragraph alignment tojustified.

Clear Direct
Formatting

Ctrl + M

Ctrl + M

Removes direct formatting that has
been applied without using styles.

Styles >Manage Styles

F11

⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

Position and
Size

F4

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectArrange >Bring to Front

Ctrl + Shift + +⌘ + Shift + +Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Arrange >Bring Forward

Ctrl + +⌘++Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Shape menu

306 | Draw Guide 7.2

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectArrange >Send
Backward

Ctrl + -⌘+-Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

Arrange >Send to Back

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Group > Group

Ctrl + Shift + G⌘ + Shift + G

Groups selected objects.

Group >
Ungroup

Ctrl + Alt + Shift+G⌘+ Option +Shift + G

Ungroups selected group.

Group > Enter
Group

F3

F3

Enters a group of objects for editing.

Group > ExitGroup

Ctrl + F3⌘ + F3

Exits a group of objects.

Duplicate

Shift + F3

Shift + F3

When an object is selected, opens the
Duplicate dialog, which provides options
for duplicating the selected object.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectSpelling

F7

Automatic Spell
Checking

Shift + F7

Shift + F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell
checking. Only available in text editing
mode.

Thesaurus

Ctrl + F7⌘ + F7

Opens the thesaurus dialog for the
language being used. Only available intext editing mode.

Extension
Manager

Ctrl + Alt + E⌘ + Alt + E

Opens the Extension Manager dialog.

Options

Alt + F12

Tools menu

Starts spelling checker. Only available
in text editing mode.

Opens the Options LibreOffice dialog.

Windows menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectCloses Window

Ctrl + W⌘+W

Closes the active window. If there is
only one window, closes Draw.

Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts | 307

Help menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectLibreOffice
Help

F1

F1

Opens your browser application at the
LibreOffice Help pages.

General function key and keyboard shortcuts
Opening menus and menu items
Windows
Linux

macOS

Press the Alt key first, then select the underlined characterof the menu to be opened. The <?> is the underlined
character in the menu. For example, Alt+F opens the Filemenu.
With the menu open, menu items have an underlined
character. To access these menu items directly, press theunderlined character key. Where two menu items have thesame underlined character, press the character key again
to move to the next item.
If an item in a menu has no underlined character, click on
the menu item directly.

Alt + <?>

Esc

EffectEsc

Closes an open menu.

F6

F6

Repeatedly pressing F6 cycles the focus through thefollowing objects:
Menu bar (Windows and Linux operating systems only)
Each toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right
Each free window from left to right
Drawing

Shift + F6

Shift + F6

Repeatedly pressing Shift+F6 cycles the focus in the
opposite direction.

Ctrl + F6

Ctrl + F6

Cycles the focus back to the drawing.

F10

Switches the access on or off for the Menu bar.

Accessing Menu bar commands•

Press F6 to select the first item on the Menu bar (the File menu).

•

Press the right arrow to select the next menu to the right.

•

Press the left arrow to select the previous menu to the left.

•

Press the Home and End keys to select the first or last item on the Menu bar.

•Press the down arrow to open a selected menu. An additional press on the down arrowor up arrow moves the selection through the menu commands.

•

Press the right arrow to open any submenus on the selected menu. Submenus areindicated by a triangle ► next to the menu item.

•

Press Enter to execute the selected menu command.

308 | Draw Guide 7.2

Accessing toolbar commands•

Press F6 repeatedly until the first tool on a toolbar is selected.

•

Use the right and left arrows to select a tool on a horizontal toolbar, or the up and downarrows to select a tool on a vertical toolbar.

•

Press the Home key to select the first tool on a toolbar, or the End key to select the lasttool on a toolbar.

•

Press Enter to activate the selected tool.

•

Press the right arrow to open any sub-toolbar on the selected toolbar. Sub-toolbars areindicated by a triangle ▼ next to the tool.

•

Keep pressing the right arrow to select a tool on a sub-toolbar.

•

Press Ctrl+Enter to insert the selected draw object. The draw object is placed in thecenter of the drawing, with a predefined size.

Controlling dialogs
When any dialog is opened, one element (for example a button or option field) indicates it has
focus by highlighting, a check mark, or a dotted box around the field or button name.
Windows
Linux

EffectEnter

Activates the selected option. Where no option is selected, Enter isthe equivalent to clicking on OK.

Esc

Closes a dialog without saving any changes made while it was
open, the equivalent to selecting Cancel.

Up or down arrow keys

Moves focus up and down a list.
Increases or decreases the value of a variable.
Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog.

Left or right arrow keys

Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog.

Tab

Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog.

Shift + Tab

Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog.

Alt + Down Arrow

Shows the options available in a drop-down list.

Spacebar

Checks or selects an empty checkbox.
Clears or deselects a checked checkbox.

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts
Draw provides several toolbars for the creation and editing of drawings. Some tools on the Draw
toolbars can be activated using a function key or keyboard shortcut.

Note
The Draw toolbars are listed in the same order displayed in the context menu that is
opened by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar.

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts | 309

Drawing
Tool nameWindows
Linux
macOS

EffectInsert Text Box

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text Formatting
toolbar.

Edit Points

F8

Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is an object on thedrawing that uses editable points, for example a freeform
line.

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectFind andReplace

Ctrl + H⌘ + Option + H

Finds and replaces all instances of text
in a drawing.

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectBring to Front

Ctrl + Shift + +⌘ + Shift + +Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Send to Back

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Group

Ctrl + Shift + G⌘ + Shift + G

Groups selected objects.

Ungroup

Ctrl + Alt + Shift+G⌘+ Option +Shift + G

Ungroups selected group.

Enter GroupF3F3Enters a group of objects for editing.

Exit Group

Ctrl + F3⌘ + F3

Exits a group of objects.

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectPosition and
Size

F4

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Bring to Front

Ctrl + Shift + +⌘ + Shift + +Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Bring Forward

Ctrl + +⌘++Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Send
Backward

Ctrl + -⌘+-Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

Send to Back

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Find

Form Design

Image

310 | Draw Guide 7.2

Line and Filling
Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectPosition and
Size

F4

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Bring to Front

Ctrl + Shift + +⌘ + Shift + +Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Bring Forward

Ctrl + +⌘++Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Send
Backward

Ctrl + -⌘+-Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

Send to Back

Ctrl + Shift + -⌘ + Shift + -Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectNew

Ctrl + N⌘+N

Opens a new drawing.

Templates

Ctrl + Shift + N⌘ + Shift + N

Opens the Templates dialog to create a
new drawing using a template.

Open

Ctrl + O⌘+OOpens the Open file browser to allow
navigation to a folder and selection of adrawing.

Save

Ctrl + S⌘+SSaves the open document.

Save As

Ctrl + Shift + S⌘ + Shift + S

Opens the Save as file browser to savethe open drawing as a new drawing.

Edit Mode

Ctrl + Shift + M⌘ + Shift + M

Switches on edit mode when a drawing
is in read only mode.

Print

Ctrl + P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how toprint the drawing.

Cut

Ctrl + X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places
it on the clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl + C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

Paste

Ctrl + V⌘+V

Places the object on the clipboard into
the document.

Clear

Ctrl + M

Ctrl + M

Removes direct formatting that has
been applied without using styles.

Undo

Ctrl + Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl + Y⌘+YReverses the action of the last Undo
command.

Standard

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts | 311

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectSpelling

F7

F7

Starts the spelling checker. Only
available in text editing mode.

AutoSpellcheck

Shift + F7

Shift + F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell
checking. Only available in text editingmode.

Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens
the Text Formatting toolbar.

Insert Hyperlink

Ctrl + K⌘+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.

Position and
Size

F4

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

F8

Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there isan object on the drawing that uses
editable points, for example a freeform
line.

Edit Points

F8Standard (Viewing Mode)
Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectSave As

Ctrl + Shift + S⌘ + Shift + S

Opens the Save as file browser so you
can save the open document as a new
document.

Edit Mode

Ctrl + Shift + M⌘ + Shift + M

Switches on edit mode when adocument is in read only mode.

Print

Ctrl + P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog so that you canselect how you want to print the
document.

Copy

Ctrl + C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

Find andReplace

Ctrl + H⌘ + Option + F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog.

Text Formatting
Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectIncrease

Ctrl + ]⌘+]Increases the point size of selected text.

Decrease

Ctrl + [⌘+[Decreases the point size of selected
text.

Bold

Ctrl + B⌘+B

Applies Bold format to selected text.

ItalicCtrl + I⌘+I

Applies Italic format to selected text.

Superscript

Ctrl + Shift + P

Ctrl + Shift + P

Reduces the font size of the selected
text and raises the text above thebaseline.

312 | Draw Guide 7.2

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectSubscript

Ctrl + Shift + B

Ctrl + Shift + B

Reduces the font size of the selected
text and lowers the text below thebaseline.

Clear

Ctrl + M

Ctrl + M

Removes direct formatting that has
been applied without using styles.

Left

Ctrl + L⌘+L

Sets the paragraph alignment to leftaligned.

CenterCtrl + E⌘+E

Sets the paragraph alignment to centeraligned.

Right

Ctrl + R⌘+R

Sets the paragraph alignment to rightaligned.

JustifiedCtrl + J⌘+J

Sets the paragraph alignment tojustified.

Select All

Ctrl + A⌘+A

Selects all the text in a text box.

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts | 313

Draw Guide 7.2

Appendix B,
Toolbars

Introduction
Draw provides several toolbars to help in creating drawings. Each toolbar has a default set oftools and the option to add additional tools.

Note
The icons displayed in the Draw toolbars illustrated in this appendix may differ fromwhat is displayed on a computer screen. Toolbar icons depend on the computer
operating system being used and how LibreOffice has been set up. For more
information on customizing LibreOffice and the toolbars, see the Getting Started
Guide.

Using toolbars
Displaying toolbars
To display a toolbar and make it active, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar. A submenu
opens with a list of available toolbars for Draw. Click on a toolbar name to display it and make it
active. Active toolbars are indicated by highlighting or a check mark next to the name.
Impress toolbars available
1) 3D-Objects
2) 3D-Settings3) Align Objects
4) Comments
5) Distribute Selection6) Drawing7) Edit Points
8) Find9) Fontwork
10) Form Controls11) Form Design12) Form Navigation
13) Glue Points
14) Image15) Insert

16) Legacy Circles and Ovals
17) Legacy Rectangles
18) Line and Filling19) Master View20) Media Playback21) Options
22) Redaction23) Standard24) Standard (Single Mode)
25) Standard (Viewing Mode)
26) Table
27) Text Formatting28) Transformations
29) Zoom

Note
Some toolbars, although selected in View > Toolbars on the Menu bar, will not
display until an object of the correct type is selected in the drawing. For example, theImage toolbar only displays when an image is selected.

Closing toolbars
To close a toolbar, use one of the following methods:•

Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and deselect the toolbar.

•

Right-click on a tool on a toolbar and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.

•

Click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating toolbar.

Using toolbars | 315

Figure 343: Toolbar handles

Moving toolbars
Docked toolbars
By default, some toolbars are docked into position in the Draw main window. For example, theStandard toolbar is docked at the top of the main window. Docked toolbars can be undocked andmoved to a new docked position on the main window or left as a floating toolbar. Before moving a
toolbar, the toolbar must be unlocked.
1) Move the mouse cursor over the small vertical handle at the left end of the toolbar as
shown in Figure 343. The mouse cursor changes to a moving cursor for the computer
system and setup.
2) Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar to a new location. This can bea new docked position or a floating toolbar. A hashed border appears around the toolbar
indicating the toolbar position as it is dragged.
3) Release the mouse button when the required position is reached.

Note
If the small vertical bar is not visible at the left end of a docked toolbar, then the
toolbar is locked into position. A docked toolbar must be unlocked before it can be
moved to a new position in the Draw main window.

Floating toolbars
To move a floating toolbar, click on its title bar and drag it to a new floating location. Release themouse button when the toolbar is in the required position. A floating toolbar does not have to bepositioned on the Draw main window for it to function.

Floating sub-toolbars
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool indicating that more tools areavailable on a sub-toolbar, for example Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar. Sub-toolbars canbe turned into floating toolbars and moved into a new position as follows:
1) Move the mouse cursor over the horizontal handle at the top of the toolbar, as shown in
Figure 344. The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system andsetup.
2) Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar to a new location to create afloating sub-toolbar.
3) Release the mouse button when the required position is reached.
4) To close the floating sub-toolbar, right-click on the triangle ▼ in the sub-toolbar title bar
and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.

316 | Draw Guide 7.2

Figure 344: Creating floating sub-toolbar

Docking a floating toolbar
To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:•

Click on the title bar and drag it to the top, bottom, left side, or right side of the main
window. When the toolbar reaches a docking position, a hashed border appears at thedocked position. Release the mouse button and the toolbar is docked.

•

Right-click on the toolbar and select Dock Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar
moves into a docked position. If the position is not suitable, move the toolbar to a new
docked position.

•

To dock all floating toolbars that are active, right-click on the toolbar and select Dock All
Toolbars from the context menu.

Locking toolbars
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar has been docked into position on the Draw main window, the toolbar can also belocked into position preventing the toolbar from becoming a floating toolbar.
•

To lock a toolbar into a docked position, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar andselect Lock Toolbar Position in the context menu. A check mark appears against thisoption indicating the toolbar is now locked.

•

To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and click on Lock Toolbar
Position in the context menu. The check mark next to this option disappears indicating
the toolbar is now unlocked. A small vertical or horizontal bar appears at the left end or
top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. This bar is also is used to movethe toolbar.

Note
Some toolbars cannot be docked or locked into position. This is indicated by the
options Dock Toolbar and/or Lock Toolbar Position being grayed out, making theoptions unavailable.

Locking sub-toolbars
To prevent sub-toolbars from becoming floating sub-toolbars, sub-toolbars have to be locked asfollows:
1) Save any drawing that is open in Draw.

Using toolbars | 317

2) Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars from the context
menu.
3) Select Restart Now in the Restart LibreOffice dialog that opens to activate the Lock
Toolbars option.
4) To unlock sub-toolbars so they can become floating sub-toolbars, repeat Steps 1 thru 3.
The Lock Toolbars option is an on/off switch.

Note
Using Lock Toolbars option affects all sub-toolbars available in LibreOffice modules.

Editing toolbars
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, it includes a set of toolbars suitable for each
LibreOffice component. Each toolbar has a default set of visible tools. You can add tools, delete
tools, and customize toolbars.

Adding tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool required and the tool appears in the toolbar. The list of available tools
closes automatically. A highlight or check mark next to the tool indicates that the tool isalready installed on the toolbar.

Note
When adding tools using Visible Buttons, the tool is added to the toolbar at thesame position as the tool appears in the Visible Buttons list. That is, the top tool in
Visible Buttons appears at the left end of the toolbar and the bottom tool appears at
the right end of the toolbar. Tool positions cannot be changed using Visible Buttons.

Deleting tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool no longer required and the tool is removed from the toolbar. The highlightor check mark next to the tool is also removed. The list of available tools closes
automatically.

Customizing toolbars
Extra tools and commands that are not available in Visible Buttons can be added to a toolbar
using customization. Customization also allows the creation of new toolbars if a specific set oftools are required for a specific task. For information on customizing toolbars, see the Getting
Started Guide.

318 | Draw Guide 7.2

Toolbars
Note
The tools installed on a toolbar are normally indicated in Visible Buttons either by
the tool icon being highlighted or by a check mark. However, this install indication
depends on computer setup and computer operating system being used.

Note
On some toolbars, the icons have a small downward pointing triangle ▼ to the rightof an icon. Click on this triangle to open further options that are available for use.

Note
Some of the tools in the toolbars also have the option of using a keyboard shortcut
instead of clicking on the tool. For a full list of keyboard shortcuts that are available inDraw, see Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts.

3D-Objects
The 3D-Objects toolbar (Figure 345) provides tools to create 3D objects in a slide. It is activatedby going to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar. Alternatively, click on the triangle ▼next to the 3D-Objects icon displayed on the Drawing toolbar to open a submenu giving accessto the available 3D objects.
Available tools from left to right1) Cube2) Sphere
3) Cylinder
4) Cone

5)
6)
7)
8)

Pyramid
Torus
Shell
Half Sphere

Figure 345: 3D-Objects toolbar

3D-Settings
The 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 346) and its tools only become active when an object has been
converted to 3D using the tool Toggle Extrusion and the converted object is then selected.
Available tools from left to right1) Toggle Extrusion
2) Tilt Down
3) Tilt Up4) Tilt Left
5) Tilt Right

6) Depth7) Direction8) Lighting9) Surface10) 3D Color

Figure 346: 3D-Settings toolbar

Toolbars | 319

The following tools on this toolbar have a triangle ▼ on the right of the icon. Click on this triangle
to open a drop-down menu giving access to various options as follows:•

Depth – 3D extrusion depth – 0cm; 1cm; 2.5cm; 5cm; 10cm; Infinity; Custom. The
measurement unit depends on the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw >General.

•Direction – 3D extrusion direction and type – Parallel; Perspective.

•

Lighting – lighting direction and lighting level of 3D extrusion – Bright; Normal; Dim.

•

Surface – surface type of 3D extrusion – Wire Frame; Matt; Plastic; Metal.

•

3D Color – color of 3D extrusion. Select a color from one of the available color palettes.

Align Objects
The Align Objects toolbar (Figure 347) provides tools for aligning several objects in a drawing to
improve the visual impact of a drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Left2) Centered
3) Right

4)
5)
6)

Top
Center
BottomFigure 347: Align Objects
toolbarComments
Th⎇e Comments toolbar (Figure 348) provides tool for adding, deletion, and navigation ofcomments in a drawing. To use comments, it is recommended to add the name and initials of allusers in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data so that comments can be easily identified.
Available tools from left to right1) Comment (Ctrl+Alt+C) (macOS ⌘+⎇+C)
2) Previous Comment

3)
4)
5)

Next Comment
Delete Comment
Delete All Comments

Figure 348: Comments
toolbar

Distribute Selection
The Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 349) provides tools to distribute three or more selected
objects evenly along the horizontal axis or vertical axis. Also, the spacing between objects can beevenly distributed.
Available tools from left to right1) Horizontally Left
2) Horizontally Center
3) Horizontally Spacing4) Horizontally Right

320 | Draw Guide 7.2

5)
6)
7)
8)

Vertically Top
Vertically Center
Vertically Spacing
Vertically Bottom

Figure 349: Distribute Selection
toolbarDrawing
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 350) provides the majority of the tools normally used to creategraphic objects in a drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Select
2) Zoom & Pan
3) Zoom4) Text Box (F2)5) Vertical Text
6) Insert Fontwork
7) Line Color
8) Fill Color
9) Line10) Rectangle11) Ellipse
12) Line Ends with Arrow
13) Lines and Arrows
14) Curves and Polygons
15) Connectors
16) Basic Shapes17) Symbol Shapes18) Block Arrows (Arrow Shapes in Visible
Buttons))19) Flowchart (Flowchart Shapes in Visible
Buttons)20) Callouts (Callout Shapes in Visible Buttons)21) Stars and Banners (Star Shapes in Visible
Buttons)22) 3D Objects23) Rotate24) Flip25) Align Objects
26) Arrange
27) Select at least three objects to distribute(Distribution in visible Buttons)
28) Shadow29) Crop Image (Crop in Visible Buttons)30) Filter
31) Points F8 (Edit Points (F8) in Visible Buttons)
32) Show Glue Points Function (Glue Points in
Visible Buttons)
33) To Curve
34) To Polygon35) To 3D36) T0 3D Rotation Object
37) Toggle Extrusion38) Insert
39) Controls

Figure 350: Drawing toolbar
Some tool shapes on the Drawing toolbar change depending on the last tool that had previously
been selected and used.
•

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool to open a pop-up toolbar. Select the required
shape to add to a drawing.

•

To create a sub-toolbar, click and drag at the top of the pop-up toolbar to an empty areaon the main window. The sub-toolbars for each object type and the various shapes
available are shown Figures 351 to 360.

Figure 351: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Toolbars | 321

Figure 352: Curves and Polygons
sub-toolbar

Figure 353: Connectors sub-toolbar

Figure 354: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Figure 355: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar

Figure 356: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Figure 357: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Figure 358: Callouts
sub-toolbar

Figure 359: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

Figure 360: 3D-Objects subtoolbar

322 | Draw Guide 7.2

Edit Points
The Edit Points toolbar (Figure 361) provides tools for editing the points of a curve or an object
that has been converted to a curve. The toolbar only becomes active when an object is selected
and one of the following methods is used to open the toolbar:•

Click on Edit Points on the Drawing or Standard toolbar.

•

Use the keyboard shortcut F8.

Available tools from left to right1) Edit Points (F8)2) Move Points
3) Insert Points4) Delete Points5) Convert to Curve
6) Close Bezier7) Split Curve
8) Corner Point
9) Smooth Transition
10) Symmetric Transition
11) Eliminate Points

Figure 361: Edit Points toolbar

Find
The Find toolbar (Figure 362) opens by default in the bottom left corner of the Draw main
window. This toolbar is normally docked at the bottom left of the Draw main window above theStatus bar. However, it can be undocked and made into a floating toolbar.
Available tools from left to right1) Close Find Bar
2) Find Text
3) Find Previous
4) Find Next

5)
6)
7)

Find All
Match Case
Find and Replace (Ctrl+H) (macOS ⌘+⎇+F)

Figure 362: Find toolbar

Fontwork
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 363) is used to create graphical text objects in a drawing andprovide the tools for editing the graphical text object. This toolbar only becomes active when a
Fontwork graphical text object in the drawing has been selected.
Available tools from left to right1) Insert Fontwork Text
2) Fontwork Shape
3) Fontwork Same Letter Heights

4)
5)
6)

Fontwork Alignment
Fontwork Character Spacing
Toggle Extrusion

Figure 363: Fontwork toolbar

Toolbars | 323

Some tools on the Fontwork toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool. Click on the triangle
to open a pop-up toolbar or drop-down option list.
•

Fontwork Shape – select the required shape for the Fontwork graphical text object fromthe options available.

•

Fontwork Alignment – select the paragraph alignment from the options available.

•

Fontwork Character Spacing – select the required character spacing from the options
available.

Form Controls
The Form Controls toolbar (Figure 364) provides the tools required to create an interactive form.
This allows controls to be added to a form in a text, drawing, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML
document (for example a button that opens another drawing or document).
Available tools from left to right1) Select
2) Design Mode
3) Toggle Form Control Wizards
4) Form Design5) Control Properties
6) Form Properties
7) Label8) Text Box
9) Check Box10) Option Button
11) List Box
12) Combo Box
13) Push Button
14) Image Button

15) Formatted Field
16) Date Field17) Numerical Field18) Group Box19) Time Field
20) Currency Field
21) Pattern Field
22) Table Control23) Navigation Bar24) Image Control25) File Selection
26) Spin Button
27) Scrollbar

Figure 364: Form Control toolbar

Form Design
The Form Design toolbar (Figure 365) opens a form in Design Mode so that it can be edited.
Controls of the form cannot be activated or its contents edited when in Design Mode. However,the position and size of the controls can be changed, other properties edited, and added ordeleted controls in Design Mode.
Available tools from left to right1) Select
2) Control Properties
3) Form Properties
4) Position and Size (F4)5) Form Navigator6) Activation Order
7) Add Field
8) Automatic Control Focus
9) Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++) (macOS⌘+Shift++)
10) Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+-) (macOS⌘+Shift+-)

324 | Draw Guide 7.2

11) Group (Ctrl+Shift+G) (macOS ⌘+Shift+G)
12) Ungroup (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G) (macOS⌘+⎇+Shift+G)13) Enter Group (F3)14) Exit Group (Ctrl+F3) (macOS ⌘+F3)
15) Align Objects16) Open in Design Mode17) Display Grid
18) Snap to Grid
19) Helplines While Moving

Figure 365: Form Design toolbar

Form Navigation
The Form Navigation toolbar (Figure 366) provides tools to edit a database table or control thedata view. The toolbar is normally displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields thatare linked to a database. This toolbar is only active when forms are connected to a database; aninactivate toolbar is shown in Figure 366.
The Form Navigation toolbar also allows movement within records as well as inserting anddeleting records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. This
toolbar also provides tools providing sort, filter, and search functions for data records.
Available tools from left to right1) Find Record
2) Record
3) Absolute Record4) Text -> Record5) Total No. of Records
6) First Record7) Previous Record8) Next Record9) Last Record10) New Record11) Save Record12) Undo: Data entry

13) Delete Record
14) Refresh15) Refresh Control
16) Sort
17) Sort Ascending18) Sort Descending19) AutoFilter20) Apply Filter21) Form-Based Filters22) Reset Filter/Sort
23) Data source as Table

Figure 366: Form Navigation toolbar

Glue Points
The Glue Points toolbar (Figure 367) provides tools to insert a glue point or modify the propertiesof a glue point. A glue point is a point where a connector is attached to an object. By default,
LibreOffice automatically places a glue point at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle
for every object created.
Available tools from left to right1) Insert Glue Point
2) Exit Direction Left
3) Exit Direction Top
4) Exit Direction Right
5) Exit Direction Bottom
6) Glue Point Relative

7) Glue Point Horizontal Left
8) Glue Point Horizontal Center
9) Glue Point Horizontal Right10) Glue Point Vertical Top11) Glue Point Vertical Center12) Glue Point Vertical Bottom

Figure 367: Glue Points toolbar

Toolbars | 325

ImageThe Image toolbar (Figure 368) provides tools to edit, modify, align, reposition and resize images.
The toolbar only becomes active and available when an image is selected in a drawing. The
Image toolbar automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when it becomes active.
Available tools from left to right1) Position and Size (F4)2) Align Objects
3) Left4) Centered
5) Right
6) Top7) Center8) Bottom
9) Arrange
10) Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++) (macOS⌘+Shift++)
11) Bring Forward (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++)
12) Send Backward (Ctrl+-) (macOS ⌘+-)
13) Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+-) (macOS⌘+Shift+-)14) In Front of Object
15) Behind Object
16) Reverse

17) Line Style
18) Line Width
19) Line Color
20) Area Style/Filling21) Fill Color
22) Shadow23) Filter24) Image Mode
25) Crop26) Vertically27) Horizontally28) Transformations
29) Transparency30) Color
31) Line
32) Area33) Animation34) Interaction

Figure 368: Image toolbar

InsertThe Insert toolbar (Figure 369) provides tools to insert different types of objects into a drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) New Page
2) Floating Frame
3) Insert Page from File
4) Table5) Image

6)
7)
8)
9)

Insert Audio or Video (Media in Visible
Buttons)
Formula Object (Ctrl+Alt+=) (macOS ⌘+⎇+=)Chart
OLE Object

Figure 369: Insert toolbar

Legacy Circles and Ovals
The Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 370) provides tools to insert different types ofcircles and ovals into a drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Insert Ellipse2) Circle

326 | Draw Guide 7.2

3)
4)

Ellipse Pie
Circle Pie

5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Ellipse Segment
Circle Segment
Ellipse, Unfilled
Circle, Unfilled
Ellipse Pie, Unfilled10) Circle Pie, Unfilled11) Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
12) Circle Segment, Unfilled
13) Arc
14) Circle Arc

Figure 370: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

Legacy Rectangles
The Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 371) provides tools to insert different types of rectangles
and squares into a drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Insert Rectangle2) Square3) Rectangle, Rounded
4) Rounded Square

5)
6)
7)
8)

Rectangle, Unfilled
Square, Unfilled
Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled
Rounded Square, Unfilled

Figure 371: Legacy Rectangles
toolbarLine and Filling
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 372) provides tools and drop-down lists for editing lines,
arrows, and object borders. The tools available vary depending on the type of object selected forediting.
Available tools from left to right1) Position and Size (F4)2) Align Objects
3) Left4) Centered
5) Right
6) Top7) Center8) Bottom
9) Arrange
10) Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++) (macOS⌘+Shift++)
11) Bring Forward (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++)
12) Send Backward (Ctrl+-) (macOS ⌘+-)
13) Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+-) (macOS⌘+Shift+-)14) In Front of Object
15) Behind Object
16) Reverse
17) Line Style

18) Line Width
19) Line Color
20) Area Style/Filling21) Fill Color
22) Shadow23) Arrow Style
24) Vertically25) Horizontally26) Transformations27) Line
28) Area29) 3D Effects30) Image Map
31) Animation32) Interaction33) Show the Styles Sidebar (F11)34) Display Grid
35) Helplines While Moving

Toolbars | 327

Figure 372: Line and Filling toolbar

Master View
The Master View toolbar (Figure 373) provides tools to create a new master page, rename amaster page, delete a master page, and close master view. This toolbar is only active when Draw
is in master view.
Available tools from left to right1) New Master2) Rename Master

3)
4)

Delete Master
Close Master View

Figure 373: Master
View toolbar

Media Playback
The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 374) provides the standard tools required to insert, view,
play, and listen to audio and video files. The toolbar only becomes active when an audio or video
file is selected. Draw supports many different media formats depending on the computer
operating system being used.
Available tools from left to right1) Insert Audio or Video
2) Play3) Pause4) Stop5) Repeat

6)
7)
8)
9)

Position
Mute
VolumeView

Figure 374: Media Playback toolbar

Options
The Options toolbar (Figure 375) provides tools for editing various settings for newly createddrawings, for example how objects snap to the grid when being moved or resized.
Available tools from left to right1) Rotation Mode after Clicking Object
328 | Draw Guide 7.22)

Display Grid

3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Display Snap Guides
Helplines While Moving
Snap to Grid
Snap to Snap Guides
Snap to Page Margins
Snap to Object Borders9) Snap to Object Points10) Allow Quick Editing
11) Select Text Area Only
12) Double-click to edit Text
13) Modify Object with Attributes14) Exit All Groups

Figure 375: Options toolbar

Redaction
The Redaction toolbar (Figure 376) is used to block portions of a drawing protecting sensitive
information and helps enterprises and organizations to comply with regulations on confidentiality
or privacy.
When a redacted drawing is exported to a new drawing, any redacted portions are removed fromthe new drawing and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This prevents any attempt to restore
or copy the original contents. A redacted drawing is often exported to PDF for publication or
sharing.
Available tools from left to right1) Rectangle
2) Freeform
3) Redacted Export (White)

4)
5)

Redacted Export (Black)
PDF

Figure 376: Redaction
toolbarStandard
The Standard toolbar (Figure 377) is common to all LibreOffice components and provides themost common tools when creating and editing documents using LibreOffice. The Standard
toolbar differs between LibreOffice components to allow for different toolsets used in creating thedifferent types of documents.
Available tools from left to right1) Load URL17) Clone Formatting (Clone in Visible Buttons)
2) New (Ctrl+N) (macOS ⌘+N)
18) Clear (Ctrl+Shift+M) (macOS Shift+M)
3) Templates (Ctrl+Shift+N) (macOS ⌘+Shift+N) 19) Undo (Ctrl+Z) (macOS ⌘+Z)
4) Open (Ctrl+O) (macOS ⌘+O)
20) Redo (Ctrl+Y) (macOS ⌘+Y)
5) Open Remote21) Spelling (F7)6) Save (Ctrl+S) (macOS ⌘+S)
22) Auto Spellcheck (Shift+F7)
7) Save As (Ctrl+Shift+S) (macOS ⌘+Shift+S) 23) Display Grid (Grid in Visible Buttons)
8) Email24) Helplines While Moving9) Edit Mode (Ctrl+Shift+M) (macOS ⌘+Shift+M) 25) Zoom & Pan
10) Export
26) Object Zoom
11) Export Directly as PDF27) Zoom
12) Print Directly28) Table
13) Print (Ctrl+P) (macOS ⌘+P)29) Insert Image (Image in Visible Buttons)
14) Cut (Ctrl+X) (macOS ⌘+X)
30) Insert Chart (Chart in Visible Buttons)
15) Copy (Ctrl+C) (macOS ⌘+C)31) Insert Text Box (F2) (Text Box in Visible
16) Paste (Ctrl+V) (macOS ⌘+V)
Buttons)
Toolbars | 32932) Insert Special Characters (Symbol in Visible
Buttons)33) Vertical Text
34) Insert Fontwork Text
35) Insert Hyperlink (Ctrl+K) (macOS ⌘+K)
(Hyperlink in Visible Buttons)36) Transformations37) Flip38) Position and Size (F4)39) Align Objects40) Distribution41) Shadow42) Crop43) Filter44) 3D Effects45) Edit Points (F8)46) Glue Points47) Toggle Extrusion
48) Show Draw Functions (Draw Functions in
Visible Buttons)
49) LibreOffice Help50) What’s That
51) Go to First Page
52) Go to Previous Page
53) Go to Next Page
54) Go to Last Page
55) Move Page to Start
56) Move Page Up57) Move Page Down
58) Move Page to End

Figure 377: Standard toolbar

Standard (Viewing Mode)
The Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar (Figure 378) provides tools to save, edit, and distribute a
drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Save As (Ctrl+Shift+S) (macOS ⌘+S)
7) Print Directly2) Edit Mode (Ctrl+Shift+M) (macOS ⌘+Shift+M) 8) Print (Ctrl+P) (macOS ⌘+P)
3) Read Only Mode
9) Copy (Ctrl+C) (macOS ⌘+C)
4) Attach to Email (Email in Visible Buttons)10) Find and Replace (Ctrl+H) (macOS ⌘+⎇+F)
5) Export Directly as PDF
11) Zoom6) EPUB
12) Start from First Slide (F5)

Figure 378: Standard (Viewing Mode)
toolbarTable
The Table toolbar (Figure 379) provides tools and options to edit and format a table placed in a
drawing. This toolbar only becomes active when a table is selected.
Available tools from left to right1) Table2) Border Style
3) Border Color
4) Borders (Shift to overwrite)5) Area Style/Filling6) Fill Color
7) Merge Cells
330 | Draw Guide 7.28) Split Cells
9) Optimize
10) Align Top (Top in Visible Buttons)11) Center Vertically (Center in Visible Buttons)
12) Align Bottom (Bottom in Visible Buttons)
13) Insert Row Above
14) Insert Row Below15) Insert Column Before16) Insert Column After
17) Delete Row
18) Delete Column
19) Delete Table

20) Select Table
21) Select Column22) Select Row23) Table Design24) Table Properties

Figure 379: Table toolbar

Text Formatting
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 380) provides tools for formatting text and alignmentcommands. This toolbar becomes active when text in a text box or graphic object has been
selected and it automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar.
Available tools from left to right1) Font Name
2) Font Size
3) Increase Font Size (Ctrl+]) (macOS ⌘+])
(Increase in Visible Buttons)
4) Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) (macOS ⌘+[)
(Decrease in Visible Buttons)
5) Bold (Ctrl+B) (macOS ⌘+B)
6) Italic (Ctrl+I) (macOS ⌘+I)
7) Underline (Ctrl+U) (macOS ⌘+U)
8) Double Underline
9) Strikethrough10) Overline
11) Superscript (Ctrl+Shift+P) (macOS⌘+Shift+P)
12) Subscript (Ctrl+Shift+B) (macOS ⌘+Shift+B)
13) Toggle Shadow (Shadow in Visible Buttons)
14) Apply outline attribute to font (Outline Font
Effect in Visible Buttons)
15) Clear (Ctrl+Shift+M) (macOS ⌘+Shift+M)16) lowercase
17) UPPERCASE18) SMALL CAPITALS19) Font Color
20) Character Highlighting Color
21) Toggle Unordered List (Unordered List in
Visible Buttons)

22) Toggle Ordered List (Ordered List in Visible
Buttons)23) Outline Format
24) Align Left (Ctrl+L) (macOS ⌘+L) (Left in
Visible Buttons)25) Align Center (Ctrl+E) (macOS ⌘+E) (Centerin Visible Buttons)
26) Align Right (Ctrl+R) (macOS ⌘+R) (Right in
Visible Buttons)27) Justified (Ctrl+J) (macOS ⌘+J)
28) Align Top (Top in Visible Buttons)29) Center Vertically (Center in Visible Buttons)30) Align Bottom (Bottom in Visible Buttons)
31) Set Line Spacing (Line Spacing in Visible
Buttons)32) Character Spacing33) Increase Paragraph Spacing (Increase in
Visible Buttons)
34) Decrease Paragraph Spacing (Decrease in
Visible Buttons)35) Text direction from left to right36) Text direction from top to bottom37) Left-To-Right38) Right-To-Left
39) Select All (Ctrl+A) (macOS ⌘+A)40) Character
41) Paragraph

Toolbars | 331

Figure 380: Text Formatting toolbar

Transformations
The Transformations toolbar (Figure 381) provides tools to modify the shape, orientation, or fill of
selected objects.
Available tools from left to right1) Rotate2) Flip3) In 3D Rotation Object
4) Set in Circle (perspective)5) Set to circle (slant)

6)
7)
8)

DistortInteractive transparency tool (Transparency
tool in Visible Buttons)
Interactive gradient tool (Gradient tool in
Visible Buttons)

Figure 381: Transformations
toolbarZoom
The Zoom toolbar (Figure 382) provides tools to reduce or enlarge the screen display of thecurrent drawing.
Available tools from left to right1) Zoom In2) Zoom Out3) 100%4) Zoom Previous
5) Zoom Next
6) Entire Page

7) Page Width8) Optimal View (Optimal in Visible Buttons)9) Object Zoom
10) Zoom & Pan
11) Shift

Figure 382: Zoom toolbar

332 | Draw Guide 7.2